US20040209584A1 - Integrated crosspoint switch with band translation - Google Patents

Integrated crosspoint switch with band translation Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20040209584A1
US20040209584A1 US10/735,521 US73552103A US2004209584A1 US 20040209584 A1 US20040209584 A1 US 20040209584A1 US 73552103 A US73552103 A US 73552103A US 2004209584 A1 US2004209584 A1 US 2004209584A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
band
input
signal
output
frequency
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US10/735,521
Inventor
Keith Bargroff
Bert Fransis
Dale Hancock
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Entropic Communications LLC
RF Magic Inc
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to US10/735,521 priority Critical patent/US20040209584A1/en
Publication of US20040209584A1 publication Critical patent/US20040209584A1/en
Assigned to RF MAGIC, INC. reassignment RF MAGIC, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: BARGROFF, KEITH, MR., FRANSIS, BERT, MR., HANCOCK, DALE, MR.
Priority to US11/618,922 priority patent/US20070111661A1/en
Assigned to MAXLINEAR COMMUNICATIONS LLC reassignment MAXLINEAR COMMUNICATIONS LLC CHANGE OF NAME (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: ENTROPIC COMMUNICATONS LLC
Assigned to MAXLINEAR, INC., MAXLINEAR COMMUNICATIONS LLC reassignment MAXLINEAR, INC. RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MUFG UNION BANK, N.A.
Assigned to ENTROPIC COMMUNICATIONS, LLC reassignment ENTROPIC COMMUNICATIONS, LLC ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MAXLINEAR COMMUNICATIONS LLC
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B1/00Details of transmission systems, not covered by a single one of groups H04B3/00 - H04B13/00; Details of transmission systems not characterised by the medium used for transmission
    • H04B1/06Receivers
    • H04B1/10Means associated with receiver for limiting or suppressing noise or interference
    • H04B1/12Neutralising, balancing, or compensation arrangements
    • H04B1/123Neutralising, balancing, or compensation arrangements using adaptive balancing or compensation means
    • H04B1/126Neutralising, balancing, or compensation arrangements using adaptive balancing or compensation means having multiple inputs, e.g. auxiliary antenna for receiving interfering signal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03DDEMODULATION OR TRANSFERENCE OF MODULATION FROM ONE CARRIER TO ANOTHER
    • H03D7/00Transference of modulation from one carrier to another, e.g. frequency-changing
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03DDEMODULATION OR TRANSFERENCE OF MODULATION FROM ONE CARRIER TO ANOTHER
    • H03D7/00Transference of modulation from one carrier to another, e.g. frequency-changing
    • H03D7/14Balanced arrangements
    • H03D7/1425Balanced arrangements with transistors
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03DDEMODULATION OR TRANSFERENCE OF MODULATION FROM ONE CARRIER TO ANOTHER
    • H03D7/00Transference of modulation from one carrier to another, e.g. frequency-changing
    • H03D7/14Balanced arrangements
    • H03D7/1425Balanced arrangements with transistors
    • H03D7/1433Balanced arrangements with transistors using bipolar transistors
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03DDEMODULATION OR TRANSFERENCE OF MODULATION FROM ONE CARRIER TO ANOTHER
    • H03D7/00Transference of modulation from one carrier to another, e.g. frequency-changing
    • H03D7/14Balanced arrangements
    • H03D7/1425Balanced arrangements with transistors
    • H03D7/1458Double balanced arrangements, i.e. where both input signals are differential
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03FAMPLIFIERS
    • H03F3/00Amplifiers with only discharge tubes or only semiconductor devices as amplifying elements
    • H03F3/189High frequency amplifiers, e.g. radio frequency amplifiers
    • H03F3/19High frequency amplifiers, e.g. radio frequency amplifiers with semiconductor devices only
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03GCONTROL OF AMPLIFICATION
    • H03G3/00Gain control in amplifiers or frequency changers without distortion of the input signal
    • H03G3/20Automatic control
    • H03G3/30Automatic control in amplifiers having semiconductor devices
    • H03G3/3036Automatic control in amplifiers having semiconductor devices in high-frequency amplifiers or in frequency-changers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04HBROADCAST COMMUNICATION
    • H04H40/00Arrangements specially adapted for receiving broadcast information
    • H04H40/18Arrangements characterised by circuits or components specially adapted for receiving
    • H04H40/27Arrangements characterised by circuits or components specially adapted for receiving specially adapted for broadcast systems covered by groups H04H20/53 - H04H20/95
    • H04H40/90Arrangements characterised by circuits or components specially adapted for receiving specially adapted for broadcast systems covered by groups H04H20/53 - H04H20/95 specially adapted for satellite broadcast receiving
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/10Adaptations for transmission by electrical cable
    • H04N7/102Circuits therefor, e.g. noise reducers, equalisers, amplifiers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/20Adaptations for transmission via a GHz frequency band, e.g. via satellite
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04QSELECTING
    • H04Q3/00Selecting arrangements
    • H04Q3/42Circuit arrangements for indirect selecting controlled by common circuits, e.g. register controller, marker
    • H04Q3/52Circuit arrangements for indirect selecting controlled by common circuits, e.g. register controller, marker using static devices in switching stages, e.g. electronic switching arrangements
    • H04Q3/521Circuit arrangements for indirect selecting controlled by common circuits, e.g. register controller, marker using static devices in switching stages, e.g. electronic switching arrangements using semiconductors in the switching stages
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03DDEMODULATION OR TRANSFERENCE OF MODULATION FROM ONE CARRIER TO ANOTHER
    • H03D2200/00Indexing scheme relating to details of demodulation or transference of modulation from one carrier to another covered by H03D
    • H03D2200/0001Circuit elements of demodulators
    • H03D2200/0025Gain control circuits
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03DDEMODULATION OR TRANSFERENCE OF MODULATION FROM ONE CARRIER TO ANOTHER
    • H03D2200/00Indexing scheme relating to details of demodulation or transference of modulation from one carrier to another covered by H03D
    • H03D2200/0041Functional aspects of demodulators
    • H03D2200/0043Bias and operating point
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03FAMPLIFIERS
    • H03F2200/00Indexing scheme relating to amplifiers
    • H03F2200/171A filter circuit coupled to the output of an amplifier
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03FAMPLIFIERS
    • H03F2200/00Indexing scheme relating to amplifiers
    • H03F2200/294Indexing scheme relating to amplifiers the amplifier being a low noise amplifier [LNA]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H03ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
    • H03FAMPLIFIERS
    • H03F2200/00Indexing scheme relating to amplifiers
    • H03F2200/451Indexing scheme relating to amplifiers the amplifier being a radio frequency amplifier
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04QSELECTING
    • H04Q2213/00Indexing scheme relating to selecting arrangements in general and for multiplex systems
    • H04Q2213/1302Relay switches
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04QSELECTING
    • H04Q2213/00Indexing scheme relating to selecting arrangements in general and for multiplex systems
    • H04Q2213/13034A/D conversion, code compression/expansion
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04QSELECTING
    • H04Q2213/00Indexing scheme relating to selecting arrangements in general and for multiplex systems
    • H04Q2213/1304Coordinate switches, crossbar, 4/2 with relays, coupling field
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04QSELECTING
    • H04Q2213/00Indexing scheme relating to selecting arrangements in general and for multiplex systems
    • H04Q2213/1319Amplifier, attenuation circuit, echo suppressor
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04QSELECTING
    • H04Q2213/00Indexing scheme relating to selecting arrangements in general and for multiplex systems
    • H04Q2213/13322Integrated circuits

Definitions

  • the invention relates to electronic signal processing. More particularly, the invention relates to Radio Frequency (RF) signal distribution and frequency conversion.
  • RF Radio Frequency
  • Communication systems are designed to provide information from a source to a destination using a communication channel.
  • Electronic communication channels can be implemented in a variety of ways.
  • An electronic communication system can implement a communication channel as point to point channels, broadcast channels, or a combination of the two.
  • the communication channels can be implemented using optical communication links or electronic communication links.
  • Optical communication links include, but are not limited to, free space optical links and fiber optic links.
  • Electronic communication links similarly include, but are not limited to, wireless links and wired links.
  • the amount of information that can be carried on a particular link is limited by the usable bandwidth in the link.
  • Some communication links can be band limited due to a physical characteristic, while other communication links can be band limited due to artificial factors, which can include system design limitations and regulatory restrictions. Regulatory restrictions are particularly prevalent in wireless communication systems in order to minimize interference that can result if the radio spectrum was unregulated.
  • a signal that occupies the same bandwidth as another uncorrelated signal, whether occurring in a wired system or a wireless system appears as interference to the uncorrelated signal. Similarly, the uncorrelated signal appears as interference to the first signal.
  • Wireless communication systems commonly operate in regulated bands because of the difficulty in isolating a signal from interfering signals in a wireless environment.
  • Common communication systems that are band limited by regulations, such as those imposed by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) in the United States, or the International Telecommunications Union (ITU), include broadcast radio and television systems. Regulation and standardization of the frequency bands used in broadcast radio and television enable consumer electronics to standardize their frequency bands of operation.
  • FCC Federal Communications Commission
  • ITU International Telecommunications Union
  • Common multiplexing techniques include Time Division Multiplexing (TDM), Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM), Code Division Multiplexing (CDM), Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM), and the like.
  • TDM Time Division Multiplexing
  • FDM Frequency Division Multiplexing
  • CDM Code Division Multiplexing
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
  • TDM systems independent users are allocated time slots that do not overlap. Thus, at any particular time, one user is allowed to occupy the entire allocated bandwidth. Similarly, in FDM systems, users are allocated portions of the entire allocated frequency band and the portion of the frequency band allocated to one user does not overlap those portions allocated to another user.
  • CDM systems each user is allocated the entire frequency band for the entire time, but each user communicates in the frequency band using an orthogonal code. Because the user codes are orthogonal, each user can recover their respective signal from the other signals occupying the frequency band. However, in a CDM system, each user appears as an interfering signal to every other user in the frequency band.
  • the power transmitted by each user in a CDM system is tightly controlled to the minimum power that is required to achieve a particular signal quality.
  • the frequency band is divided into a number of distinct frequency bands.
  • Each user can communicate over the entire band, but the information from each user is divided up into a number of parallel streams that are broadcast as orthogonal waveforms in each of a predetermined number of sub-bands.
  • this discussion of multiplexing techniques is not exhaustive and some communication systems can implement other multiplexing techniques or a combination of more than one multiplexing technique.
  • regulated frequency bands and communication channels within the regulated frequency bands are compatibility.
  • Communication systems operating in a first communication band can desire to provide information to second communication system operating in second communication band.
  • One manner of interfacing two otherwise compatible signals at different frequency bands is frequency translation.
  • a signal from a first communication system at a first frequency can be translated to a second frequency in order to make the signal available in the second communication system.
  • Communication systems can incorporate a number of frequency translations in providing a signal from a source to its ultimate destination.
  • signals from a first communication system can be frequency translated to be compatible with a second communication system.
  • frequency translation is in cable television systems.
  • Televisions are typically produced to be compatible with a particular television standard. In the United States, most televisions are compatible with the National Television System Committee (NTSC) standard and the frequency allocation for television channels regulated by the FCC.
  • NTSC National Television System Committee
  • cable television providers are, to some extent, able to provide the same content on practically any channel.
  • the number of signals to which a cable operator has can be far in excess of the number of channels that a typical television receiver can tune.
  • a cable operator can receive a desired number of signals and frequency translate each signal to a desired television channel.
  • the system design implemented by the cable operator determines frequency translation and the majority of the contributors to inter-channel interference such that these issues are typically of no concern to the end user.
  • receivers that are local to the end user are incorporating the ability to interface to multiple sources and combine those multiple sources into a signal that is presented to the end user.
  • a single household can have access to over-the-air television broadcast channels, cable television channels, satellite television channels, microwave television channels, closed circuit television channels, and television channels from other sources.
  • These multiple channels from multiple signal sources can easily provide more channels to which a typical television may be tuned.
  • some of the channels from one or more of the signal sources can appear on the same channel such that direct signal combination can not be feasible.
  • signals from a satellite transponder can be downconverted to a particular block of channels that can coincide with channels provided by the cable television source.
  • the channels from the two signal sources cannot be directly combined without channels from the satellite television source interfering with the coincident channels from the cable television source.
  • a switch can be provided to allow an end user to choose one signal source and eliminate interfering signals from all other sources.
  • signals from a source such as a satellite television source
  • a satellite television receiver is typically capable of simultaneously receiving signals from multiple satellite transponders positioned on one or more satellites.
  • the signals received from the multiple satellite transponders can exceed the channel tuning capability of a typical television tuner.
  • only a subset of all available satellite television signals can be simultaneously made available to a particular television receiver.
  • a source switch can be a viable solution for a single receiver, the use of a source switch quickly becomes unfeasible when multiple receivers, such as televisions, interface to the same sources via a common distribution mechanism, such as a shared coaxial cable. It is typically unfeasible to provide every signal source to each television location and provide a source switch at the television. However, it is desirable for each television receiver to independently have the ability to control the signal source. Additionally, where signals from a particular source, such as satellite television, can be provided on the same channels, it is desirable to have the ability to frequency translate some of the signals such that they are provided at different channels.
  • the system allows signals from any one of a first number of input signals to be directed to any one of a number of destinations. Additionally, each of the first number of input signals can comprise signals in at least one frequency band from a number of predetermined input frequency bands.
  • the system also allows signals from each of the number of predetermined input frequency bands to be frequency translated to one of a number of predetermined output frequency bands.
  • the predetermined input frequency bands can coincide with the predetermined output frequency bands. Additionally, an input signal in an input frequency band can be output to an output frequency band that is substantially the same as the input frequency band.
  • Amplifiers within the system allow a signal from one signal source to be provided to any number of independent frequency translation blocks. Some or all of the system can be implemented in a single integrated circuit.
  • Desired signals can be received from multiple distinct signal sources.
  • the communication link from the signal sources to local receivers can be wired or wireless.
  • Each of the signal sources provides one or more source signals that can be frequency translated to one of a number of predetermined input frequency bands, such as, for example, by a low noise block converter.
  • one or more of the source signals can be provided in one or more of the predetermined input frequency bands.
  • the input frequency bands are typically distinct and define a contiguous composite frequency band. However, the input frequency bands can overlap or define a disjoint composite frequency band.
  • the input and output frequency bands may carry data for one or more channels originating on one or more transponders.
  • FIG. 1 is a functional block diagram of a satellite communication system configured to provide signals from multiple satellites to multiple user devices.
  • FIG. 2 is a functional block diagram of cascaded band translation switches.
  • FIG. 3 is a functional block diagram of a band translation switch having one band translation device configured to provide pass through and one band translation device configured to provide translation.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates a simplified switch diagram of a doubly balanced mixer as known in the art.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates the doubly balanced mixer of FIG. 4A as a Gilbert cell mixer circuit.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates a common oscillator, multiple mixer system in which the mixer circuit could be employed.
  • FIG. 6A illustrates a simplified switch diagram of a mixer circuit in accordance with one embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 6B illustrates a method of operating the mixer circuit shown in FIG. 6A.
  • FIG. 6C illustrates the mixer circuit of FIG. 6A as a modified Gilbert cell mixer circuit.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a second embodiment of the mixer circuit.
  • FIGS. 8A and 8B illustrates common oscillator, multiple mixer systems utilizing the mixer circuits of FIGS. 3A and 4 in accordance with embodiments of the invention.
  • FIGS. 9A-9C are functional block diagrams of cascadable buffer amplifiers with switches.
  • FIG. 10 is a functional block diagram of an integrated crosspoint switch with band translation.
  • FIGS. 11A-11D are functional block diagrams of switches.
  • FIG. 12 is a functional block diagram of an integrated crosspoint switch with band translation.
  • FIG. 13 is a functional block diagram of an integrated crosspoint switch with band translation.
  • FIG. 14 is a functional block diagram of an integrated crosspoint switch with band translation.
  • FIG. 15 is a functional block diagram of an integrated band translation switch interfacing with additional components to provide two signal outputs.
  • FIG. 16 is a functional block diagram of a signal distribution system configured to receive signals from satellites and distribute them to multiple user devices.
  • FIGS. 17A-17D are functional block diagrams of AGC amplifiers.
  • FIGS. 18A-18B are functional block diagrams of cascaded amplifier configurations.
  • FIG. 19 is a functional block diagram of cascaded integrated band translation switches.
  • FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a method of distributing signals using cascadable AGC amplifiers.
  • FIG. 21 is a functional block diagram of a band translation switch configured to frequency convert an input signal having a predetermined bandwidth.
  • FIG. 22 is a functional block diagram of a band translation switch configured to switch and frequency translate signals from two sources to a single output.
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a method of frequency translating input frequency bands using an integrated band translation switch.
  • FIG. 1 is a functional block diagram of one embodiment of a satellite based communication system, such as a satellite television system 100 .
  • a satellite based communication system such as a satellite television system 100 .
  • the invention is not limited to application in a satellite based communication system, nor is the invention limited to use in a television system.
  • the invention is applicable to any communication system where multiple signals in one or more input frequency bands can be distributed as signals in one or more output frequency bands to one or more receivers.
  • the satellite television system 100 includes one or more satellites 110 a - 110 c that are set at various different orbital slots. Although three satellites 110 a - 110 c are shown in FIG. 1, any number of satellites can exist in a particular satellite television system 100 .
  • the satellites can operate at different carrier frequencies and polarizations. The different carrier frequencies and polarizations that can be used by the satellites 110 a - 110 c provide a degree of isolation of one satellite transmission from another. Additionally, the satellites 110 a - 110 c can implement a directional antenna to provide further signal selectivity.
  • a receiver can select the signals from a desired satellite, for example 110 a , by receiving the broadcast signals with a corresponding polarized antenna oriented in the general direction of the desired satellite 110 a and tuning to the desired satellite frequency. Because each satellite 110 a - 110 c is configured in a similar manner, a more detailed description is provided for only one of the satellites 110 a.
  • a satellite 110 a in a satellite television system 100 can include a single transponder (not shown), but typically includes multiple transponders. Each of the transponders typically transmits at a different frequency and has an associated polarization. Two different transponders on the same satellite 110 a can transmit on the same frequency but with different polarities if the selectivity provided by the difference in polarities is sufficient for the system. If each transponder transmits at a different frequency, the different transponders on a single satellite 110 a can all transmit with the same polarity, or can use different polarities.
  • some transponders can be configured with multiple carrier frequencies having various channel offsets. Other transponders may multiplex numerous digital channels on a single carrier.
  • the integrated crosspoint switch with band translation described below can be configured to operate over one or more frequency bands with any transponder modulation type.
  • a satellite 110 a can include a first transponder that provides information on multiple carrier frequencies, with the carrier frequency spacing corresponding to a channel spacing for a television receiver.
  • the transponders in a satellite 110 a are typically arranged as transponder groups.
  • the transponder group can be configured to provide a contiguous group of channels.
  • the signals in a particular transponder group can have varied channel offsets, with one or more channels having different carrier bandwidths or symbol rates.
  • the transponders in a satellite group can be configured to all transmit using the same polarization.
  • a typical satellite 110 a configured for a satellite television system 100 can include two transponder groups having sixteen transponders in each transponder group, with each group having a different polarity.
  • the satellite 110 a is not limited to any particular transponder configuration, nor are transponder groups necessarily limited to sixteen transponders.
  • a satellite 110 a configured to operate in a satellite television system 100 typically transmits downlink signals in one of two frequency bands.
  • Each frequency band can include one or more channels corresponding to one or more transponders.
  • a first downlink frequency band is in the C-band and typically spans 3.6-4.2 GHz.
  • a second downlink frequency band is in the Ku-band and typically spans 10.7-12.75 GHz.
  • each satellite or some other signal source may transmit signals over one or more frequency bands.
  • the frequency bands are not limited to the two listed frequency bands, and may be any suitable frequency bands, including one or more frequency bands that have yet to be defined and allocated by regulating bodies.
  • the upper and lower band edges for the one or more downlink frequency bands are not absolutes because of the practical limitations on constructing a brick wall filter. Rather, the frequency bands typically represent passbands and the operating transponder downlink frequency band typically comprises a frequency band that includes a frequency band having the upper and lower band edges within the passband. Alternatively, the band edges can define stop band edges and the transponder can transmit a substantially diminished energy outside of the band edge frequencies. Thus, practically, the downlink frequency bands can span about, or substantially, 3.6-4.2 GHz and 10.7-12.75 GHz. Additionally, while a satellite 110 a can be configured to use a particular downlink frequency band, the satellite 110 a may not actually transmit signals at all frequencies within the downlink frequency band.
  • a satellite 110 a is not limited to transmitting a downlink signal in these two frequency bands, and there can be additional downlink frequency bands implemented by the satellite 110 a . These additional downlink frequency bands can be distinct from the previously described downlink frequency bands or can overlap some or all of the previously described downlink frequency bands.
  • the downlink signals transmitted by the satellites 110 - 110 c can be received by a terrestrial television system and displayed to one or more televisions 170 a - 170 c .
  • An antenna 120 is typically used to receive the signals from the satellites 110 a - 110 c .
  • the antenna 120 is shown in FIG. 1 as a dish antenna but other antenna 120 configurations can also be used.
  • a reflector can direct the downlink signals to an antenna feed 122 .
  • the antenna 120 is shown with only one antenna feed 122 , one or more antenna feeds 122 can be implemented on a single antenna 120 . Some antenna configurations suitable for operation within the system can not include an antenna feed 122 .
  • the antenna 120 or antenna feed 122 can be configured to receive signals from a particular downlink frequency band or a particular polarization.
  • the antenna 120 and antenna feed 122 can be configured to receive the 10.7-12.75 GHz frequency band having a left hand circular polarization.
  • Another antenna feed (not shown) included as part of the antenna 120 can be configured to receive another downlink frequency band having the same or different polarization.
  • one antenna 120 is shown in FIG. 1, multiple antennae can be implemented in a location or multiple locations as part of a single system.
  • the output from the antenna 120 is connected to a receiver 180 that is used to process the received signals.
  • the receiver 180 includes low noise amplifiers that amplify the signals while minimizing the associated noise contribution.
  • the signals received at the satellite downlink frequencies are typically frequency translated to one or more predetermined frequency bands, or common Intermediate Frequency (IF) bands.
  • IF Intermediate Frequency
  • the received downlink signals can also be filtered to remove out of band signals that can contribute interference.
  • the carrier frequency spacing of the downlink signals transmitted by the satellites 110 a - 110 c typically corresponds to a channel spacing used by a television receiver or a set top box.
  • the received downlink frequency band can be frequency converted to predetermined frequency bands at intermediate frequencies for further processing prior to conversion to frequencies compatible with television receivers or set top boxes.
  • several channels may be multiplexed using a single carrier.
  • one or more multiplexed carriers can be frequency converted to input frequencies of a set top box.
  • LNB low noise block converters 130 a - 130 c .
  • a LNB can be configured to receive signals from one or more antennae, for example 120 , amplify, filter, and block frequency convert the signals to a common IF band.
  • a first set of downlink signals, such as those from a first transponder group, can be block converted to a first common IF band and a second set of downlink signals, such as those from a second transponder group, can be block converted to a second common IF band.
  • the LNB 130 a can receive downlink signals from two transponder groups.
  • the multiple signals from two transponder groups can be received at one or more antennae 120 , or one or more antenna feeds 122 .
  • the downlink signals can originate from one satellite, for example 110 a , or more than one satellite 110 a - 110 c.
  • the LNB 130 a can block convert the signals from the first transponder group to a common IF band of 950-1450 MHz. Similarly, the LNB 130 a can simultaneously block convert the signals from the second transponder group to a common IF band of 1650-2150 MHz. The block converted signals at the two common IF bands can be combined prior to being output from the LNB 130 a . This process of block converting two transponder groups to different predetermined frequency bands and then combining the signals from the predetermined frequency bands is commonly referred to as band-stacking.
  • the band stacked output from the LNB 130 comprises block converted transponder signals in a first common IF band at 950-1450 MHz and block converted transponder signals in a second common IF band at 1650-2150 MHz.
  • signals from two transponder groups can be block converted to the same common IF band and combined without having two channels assigned to the same carrier frequency.
  • two independent signals would not be combined at the same IF carrier frequency because each would appear as an interference source for the other, potentially making both signals unresolvable.
  • two signals can occupy the same frequency space and still be independently resolvable provided they occupy different spaces in other dimensions, such as time or code.
  • the band-stacked output from a particular LNB 130 a may constitute only a subset of all available transponder groups. Additional LNB's 130 b - 130 c can be used to ensure that signals from all of the transponder groups are represented in one of the band-stacked outputs of the LNB's 130 a - 130 c .
  • the band-stacked outputs of the LNB's 130 a - 130 c are not limited to having signals from distinct transponder groups.
  • one or more of the band-stacked LNB outputs can have signals in common with another of the band-stacked LNB outputs.
  • band-stacking is not used, and each transponder group is outputted from the LNB independently.
  • the outputs from the LNB's 130 a - 130 c are connected to the input of a switch configuration, referred to herein as an N ⁇ M crosspoint switch 140 .
  • the N ⁇ M crosspoint switch 140 includes N inputs and M outputs. Signals from each of the N inputs can be selectively routed to any of the M outputs.
  • the band-stacked output from a first LNB 130 a can be connected to a first input of the crosspoint switch 140 and can be selectively routed to any of the outputs of the crosspoint switch 140 .
  • the crosspoint switch 140 can be configured such that only one input can be selectively routed to an output. Alternatively, the crosspoint switch 140 can be configured to selectively route more than one input to the same output. Additionally, the crosspoint switch 140 can also be configured such that an input signal can be selectively routed to only one output. Alternatively, the crosspoint switch 140 can be configured to selectively route an input signal to more than one output. Typically, the crosspoint switch 140 is configured to selectively route an input to a single output and only one input can be routed to the particular output. Where the crosspoint switch 140 configuration limits one output to one input, there can be some inputs that cannot be routed to outputs if the number if inputs, N, is greater than the number of outputs, M. Similarly, some input signals can not be able to be routed to an output if the crosspoint switch 140 configuration limits an output to a signal from only one input, and one input can be routed to multiple outputs.
  • some outputs can not have any signals routed to them if the crosspoint switch 140 configuration only allows one input to be routed to one output and the number of inputs, N, is less than the number of outputs, M. Similarly, some outputs may not have any signals routed to them if multiple inputs can be routed to the same output and an input can only be routed to one output.
  • the crosspoint switches in each of the embodiments can be configured in the various alternatives discussed above.
  • Each of the outputs of the crosspoint switch 140 is coupled to a corresponding input to a band translation section 150 .
  • the band translation section 150 can represent an integrated device that is configured to independently provide frequency band translation to signals at each of its inputs.
  • the band translation section 150 can represent a collection of one or more band translation devices that are configured to frequency band translate signals at each of the inputs.
  • the band translation section 150 can include one or more band translation devices configured to frequency band translate one or more signals using a common local oscillator.
  • the band translation section can include one or more band translation devices configured to independently frequency band translate each of the input signals.
  • a band translation device within the band translation section 150 has an input connected to an output of the crosspoint switch 140 .
  • An output of the band translation device represents an output of the band translation section 150 .
  • the band translation device can be configured to selectively couple an input signal directly to the output with no frequency translation, or alternatively to frequency translate the input signal to an output signal at a frequency band that differs from the input frequency band.
  • the frequency translation device can further be configured, such that when frequency translation is selected, to selectively frequency translate the input signal from a first one of the predetermined frequency bands to a second one of the predetermined frequency bands.
  • a first predetermined frequency band spans 950-1450 MHz and the second predetermined frequency band spans 1650-2150 MHz.
  • a band translation device can frequency translate an input signal at one of the two predetermined frequency bands to an output signal at one of the same two predetermined frequency bands. It can be seen that there are four distinct possibilities.
  • An input signal in the lower of the two predetermined frequency bands, 950-1450 MHz can be frequency translated by the band translation device to either the lower, or the upper, of the two predetermined frequency bands.
  • the signal output from the band translation device can be in the lower predetermined frequency band, 950-1450 MHz, or the upper predetermined frequency band, 1650-2150 MHz.
  • the input signal is coupled directly from the input of the band translation device to the output of the band translation device.
  • the direct coupling from input to output without frequency translation can be referred to as a pass through state.
  • an input signal provided to the band translation device at the upper frequency band can be output from the band translation device at the upper frequency band or the lower frequency band.
  • the band translation device In one state the band translation device is configured in pass through and in the other state the frequency translation device is configured to frequency translate the input signal.
  • the band translation section 150 can be configured to combine the outputs from one or more band translation section.
  • external components (not shown) can combine one or more band translation device outputs.
  • a receiver 180 can implement the LNB's 130 a - 130 c , the crosspoint switch 140 , and the band translation section 150 .
  • the receiver 180 can implement all of these elements in a single integrated circuit or can implement one or more of the elements on separate integrated circuits or stand-alone devices.
  • the LNB's 130 a - 130 c can each be implemented as stand-alone devices and the crosspoint switch 140 with the band translation section 150 can be implemented on a single integrated circuit.
  • the LNB's 130 a - 130 c , crosspoint switch 140 and band translation section 150 can be implemented in a single housing. This arrangement can be particularly advantageous where size of the components is of concern.
  • an integrated circuit crosspoint switch 140 and band translation section 150 having reduced power requirements may allow a system with a smaller power supply.
  • reduced power consumption typically corresponds to reduced heat dissipation.
  • a system having reduced heat dissipation requirements can often use smaller heatsinks or may eliminate heatsinks. The use of smaller heatsinks can further reduce the size of the system.
  • an integrated circuit embodiment can advantageously have reduced cost as compared to a discrete system. The cost savings can be attributable to savings in components and materials that can be minimized or eliminated when the crosspoint switch 140 and band translation section 150 are configured as an integrated circuit.
  • portions of the crosspoint switch 140 and portions of the band translation section 150 can be implemented on separate integrated circuits and one of the integrated circuits can be packaged within a LNB, for example 130 a .
  • the LNBs 130 a - 130 c can be housed in a device that is remote from the crosspoint switch 140 and band translation section 150 .
  • the outputs of the band translation section 150 are coupled to corresponding inputs of set top boxes 160 a - 160 c .
  • the predetermined frequency bands do not correspond to typical television receiver bands.
  • the set top boxes 160 a - 160 c can further frequency translate the signals to television receiver operating bands.
  • the output signals from the band translation section 150 can be in a format that is not compatible with standard television receivers 170 a - 170 c .
  • the set top boxes 160 a - 160 c can then function as signal processing stages.
  • the satellite downlink signals can be digitally modulated in a format that is not compatible with a typical television receiver 170 a - 170 c .
  • the set top boxes 160 a - 160 c can be configured to demodulate the digitally modulated signals, process the demodulated signals, and then modulate a television channel carrier frequencies with the signals for delivery to television receivers 170 a - 170 c.
  • the set top boxes 160 a - 160 c may not be required.
  • one or more of the functions performed by the set top boxes 160 a - 160 c can be integrated into the television receivers 170 a - 170 c.
  • each of the television receivers 170 a - 170 c can be connected to an output from one of the set top boxes 160 a - 160 c .
  • Each of the set top boxes 160 a - 160 c can have one or more individually programmable outputs.
  • more than one television receiver 170 a - 170 c can be connected to an output from a single set top box, for example 160 a .
  • outputs from more than one set top box 160 a - 160 c , or multiple outputs from one set top box such as 160 a can be combined or otherwise connected to a single television receiver, for example 170 a , although such a configuration is not typical.
  • a television receiver, for example 170 a can be configured to tune to a particular channel within the one or more frequency bands provided by the set top box, such as 160 a .
  • the television receiver 170 a can process the signal from the selected channel to present some media content, such as video or audio, to the user.
  • a user is typically provided control, such as through a remote control for the television 170 a or set top box 160 a , to selectively configure the crosspoint switch 140 or band translation section 150 .
  • a user can be allowed to select, using a remote control configured to operate with the set top box 160 a , to receive signals from two distinct satellite transponder groups.
  • One of the satellite transponder groups can be received and frequency converted to a common IF band using the first LNB 130 a .
  • the first LNB 130 a can be configured to frequency convert the signals to the upper IF band, 1650-2150 MHz.
  • the second of the satellite transponder groups can be received and frequency converted to a common IF band using the Nth LNB 130 c .
  • the Nth LNB 130 c can also be configured to frequency convert the signals to the upper IF band, 1650-2150 MHz.
  • the LNB's of the other embodiments can be similarly configured.
  • the block converted signals from the two transponder groups would ordinarily not be combinable if any two channels in the two transponder groups share signal bandwidths in the common IF bands.
  • the crosspoint switch 140 can be configured by control signals to output the signals from the first LNB 130 a to a first crosspoint switch output and to output the signals from the Nth LNB 130 c to a second crosspoint switch output.
  • the band translation section 150 can then be configured, using the control signals provided by the set top box 160 a , to pass frequency translate the signals from the first switch output from the upper IF band to the lower IF band.
  • the band translation section 150 can also be configured to pass through the signals from the second switch output without frequency translation.
  • a combiner within the band translation section can be configured to combine the output signals from the first and second band translation outputs.
  • the composite signal then includes the signals from the first transponder group, located at the upper common IF band, and the signals from the second transponder group, located at the lower common IF band.
  • the example can be generalized to allow signals from any N signal sources, which can be satellite transponder groups, to be combined to M distinct band stacked signals.
  • the band stacked signals can each include from one to M distinct frequency bands.
  • Each of the band stacked signals can then be delivered to a set top box, multiple set top boxes, or one or more other receivers for presentation to one or more users.
  • an output from a first output of the receiver 180 can be coupled to one or more set top boxes, for example 160 a and 160 b .
  • multiple receiver 180 outputs that have information in mutually exclusive bands can be power combined and coupled to a single cable or distribution system for delivering the signal to one or more set top boxes or receivers.
  • the crosspoint switch 140 may direct the same input signal to two separate inputs of the band translation section 150 .
  • the band translation section 150 may then frequency translate a portion of the input to a first frequency band and may also frequency translate a second portion of the input signal to a second frequency band.
  • the two frequency bands can be combined into a signal that is directed to a single cable or distribution system.
  • two separate LNB's with their own crosspoint switch with band translation section 150 having output signals in separate frequency bands can have their signals power combined at the LNB outside the house.
  • the LNBs 130 a - 130 c , crosspoint swtich 140 and band translation section 150 are implemented as a single device that may be placed, for example, at the antenna 120 .
  • the LNBs 130 a - 130 c may be implemented in a first device and the crosspoint switch 140 and band translation section can be implemented as one or more devices that can be located locally or remotely from the LNBs.
  • the LNB's 130 a - 130 c , crosspoint switch 140 , band translation section 150 , and set top boxes 160 a - 160 c can be assembled in many different configurations. In each configuration, multiple independent users can each select different channels from one or more independent signals without affecting other users or devices.
  • FIG. 2 is a functional block diagram of an embodiment of a receiver 200 having cascaded band translation switches 220 , 221 that can be implemented as integrated circuits (IC).
  • each of the band translation switches 220 , 221 is configured with two inputs and a single output.
  • the band translation switches 220 , 221 are not limited to any particular input and output configuration, but rather, can implement any number of inputs and outputs.
  • the first band translation switch 220 need not be configured the same as a second band translation switch 221 , although the similar configurations are shown in FIG. 2.
  • Two LNB's 210 a , 210 b are configured to provide the input signals to the first band translation switch 220 .
  • Each of the LNB's 210 a , 210 b can provide one or more signals in one or more frequency bands.
  • a first LNB 210 a is connected to a first set of buffer amplifiers 222 a and 222 b .
  • the two buffer amplifiers 222 a and 222 b are configured in parallel.
  • Various alternative buffer amplifier configurations can be used, as will be discussed in greater detail below.
  • a first internal buffer amplifier 222 a connects the first input of the first band translation switch 220 to an input of a crosspoint switch 226 .
  • a first cascading buffer amplifier 222 b connects the first input of the first band translation switch 220 to a first cascaded output.
  • the first internal buffer amplifier 222 a and the first cascading buffer amplifier 222 b can be configured similarly or can be configured differently.
  • Each of the first set of buffer amplifiers 222 a , 222 b can be configured to provide gain or attenuation.
  • the buffer amplifiers 222 a , 222 b can be unity gain amplifiers or can provide significant signal gain. Alternatively, the buffer amplifiers 222 a , 222 b can provide attenuation rather than gain.
  • the buffer amplifiers 222 a , 222 b can be configured such that changes at the output of one of the amplifiers, for example 222 a , do not affect the other amplifier 222 b .
  • the output of the internal buffer amplifier 222 a is connected to an input of the crosspoint switch 226 .
  • the load that the input of the crosspoint switch 226 provides to the output of the internal buffer amplifier 222 a can vary depending on various factors.
  • the impedance of the crosspoint switch 226 input can vary as a function of frequency.
  • the impedance of the crosspoint switch 226 input can vary depending on the switch output selected or on the configuration of devices that can be connected to the selected crosspoint switch 226 output.
  • signals such as local oscillator signals can be present at the output of the buffer amplifiers.
  • the input of the crosspoint switch 226 can present any load from a short circuit to an open circuit, although in an actual configuration the actual variation in the load will not likely span the entire range.
  • the internal buffer amplifier 222 a is configured such that its effect on the input of the band translation switch 220 does not vary for any load or signal presented at its output.
  • the internal buffer amplifier 222 a provides a level of signal isolation that is not infinite, but is great enough such that effects experienced at its input are minimal.
  • input load variation is not zero, but is minimal.
  • the cascading buffer amplifier 222 b can experience a load variation spanning from an open circuit to a short circuit because the output of the cascading buffer amplifier 222 b is connected to an output of the first band translation switch 220 .
  • the cascading buffer amplifier 222 b can likewise be configured to minimize the effect of load variations on the input of the amplifier.
  • the second input to the first band translation switch 220 is configured similarly to the first input.
  • a second set of buffer amplifiers 224 a , 224 b have inputs connected to the second input.
  • a second internal buffer amplifier 224 a connects the second input to a second input of the crosspoint switch 226 .
  • a second cascading buffer amplifier 224 b connects the second input to a second cascaded output of the first band translation switch 220 .
  • the second set of buffer amplifiers 224 a , 224 b are also configured to be insensitive to load variations and signals present at their outputs.
  • the crosspoint switch 226 in the first band translation switch 220 is configured to selectively couple each of the two internal buffer amplifier, 222 a , 224 a , outputs to one of two switch outputs. Although only two switch outputs are shown in the first band translation switch 220 , any number of switch outputs can be incorporated into the crosspoint switch 226 .
  • a first switch output is connected to a first band translation device 228 a and a second switch output is similarly connected to a second band translation device 228 b .
  • each of the band translation devices 228 a - 228 b can be configured to frequency translate a signal or pass the signal to its output without frequency translation.
  • the outputs of the band translation devices 228 a - 228 b are connected to inputs of a signal combiner 230 , here represented as a signal summer.
  • the output of the first band translation device 228 a is connected to a first input of the signal combiner 230 and the output of the second band translation device 228 b is connected to a second input of the signal combiner 230 .
  • the signal combiner 230 is configured to combine the signals provided at its inputs and output a combined composite signal.
  • the signal combiner 230 is shown as a signal summer, which is configured to sum the input signals and provide the composite signal at its output.
  • the signal provided by the first band translation device 228 a occupies a frequency band that is distinct from frequency band occupied by the signal provided by the second band translation device 228 b . Because the signals from the two band translation devices 228 a - 228 b are effectively frequency multiplexed, the input signals can be combined to provide a composite signal without experiencing destructive interference. Of course, the input signals are not required to occupy distinct frequency bands.
  • the first input signal can occupy a band that overlaps some or all of the frequency band occupied by the second input signal.
  • the resulting combined composite signal can experience some destructive signal interference if desired signals in the input signals occupy the same signal space. Alternatively, no signal interference can occur in the combined signal if the signal components in the input signals do not occupy the same signal space, for example frequency, time, or code space.
  • the composite output from the signal combiner 230 is connected to a first set top box 240 a .
  • the output from the signal combiner 230 can be coupled to more than one set top box, or to a signal distribution system (not shown) that can be coupled to one or more set top boxes and one or more receivers.
  • the set top box 240 a can be configured to further process the composite signal in order for the signals to be compatible with an end user device (not shown), such as a television.
  • a second band translation switch 221 is configured similarly to the first band translation switch 220 .
  • a first set of buffer amplifiers 223 a , 223 b receives a first input signal and a second set of buffer amplifiers 225 a , 225 b receives a second input signal.
  • the first set of input buffers 223 a , 223 b includes an internal input buffer amplifier 223 a that amplifies the first input signal and provides the amplified signal to an input of a crosspoint switch 227 .
  • the first set of input buffers 223 a , 223 b also includes a cascading buffer amplifier 223 b that amplifies the first input signal and provides the amplified signal to an output of the second band translation switch 221 .
  • the second set of input buffers 225 a , 225 b is similarly configured.
  • the crosspoint switch 227 , band translation devices 229 a , 229 b , and signal combiner 231 for the second band translation switch 221 are configured similarly to the corresponding element from the first band translation switch 220 .
  • the output of the second band translation switch 221 similarly is connected to a second set top box 240 b and can be coupled to more than one set top box.
  • the input signals provided to the second band translation switch 221 are provided from the cascading buffer amplifiers 222 b , 224 b of the first band translation switch 220 .
  • the signals from LNB's 210 a - 210 b can be provided to any number of band translation switches 220 , 221 and ultimately to any number of set top boxes 240 a - 240 b.
  • the LNB 210 a - 210 b outputs can provide signals to multiple set top boxes 240 a - 240 b without the number of set top boxes 240 a - 240 b significantly affecting the quality of the signals to any other set top box, for example 240 a .
  • the signal quality from a particular LNB, for example 210 a , at a particular set top box, for example 240 a is not significantly affected by the number of set top boxes 240 a - 240 b that are ultimately connected to the LNB 210 a .
  • connections from an LNB 210 a to set top boxes 240 a - 240 b can be added or subtracted, either through changes in the number of band translation switches 220 , 221 cascaded or through selection at one of the crosspoint switches 226 , 227 , without substantially affecting the signal quality at a particular set top box 210 a .
  • the ability of the end user device to present the information, and the end users' ability to perceive differences in signal quality are factors that contribute to the amount of signal degradation that can occur in a signal to a set top box without there being a substantial affect on the signal quality at the set top box.
  • a band translation switch can be configured to provide a pass through signal path in the band translation devices.
  • FIG. 3 shows a functional block diagram of an embodiment of a band translation switch 300 having band translation devices 330 a - 330 b configured to selectively provide frequency translation or pass through.
  • the band translation switch 300 can be implemented as a single integrated circuit.
  • a series of signal inputs are each coupled to the input of a corresponding buffer amplifier 310 a - 310 d .
  • each of the signal inputs can receive a frequency multiplexed signal, such as an output from a LNB (not shown).
  • the frequency multiplexed signal can be a band-stacked signal including signals from one or more predetermined frequency bands.
  • one or more of the signal inputs can receive information corresponding to a single channel.
  • one or more of the signal inputs can receive a multiplexed signal containing several channels.
  • the multiplexed signal can be, for example, a digitally modulated signal that is multiplexed to carry several channels.
  • Each of the buffer amplifiers 310 a - 310 d amplifies the received signal and couples the amplified output to a corresponding input of a crosspoint switch 320 .
  • the buffer amplifiers 310 a - 310 d can be configured to couple the amplified signals solely to the respective crosspoint switch 320 inputs.
  • one or more of the buffer amplifiers 310 a - 310 d can be configured to also couple the amplified signals to corresponding cascade outputs (not shown) as will be disclosed in further detail below with respect to FIGS. 4A-4C.
  • the crosspoint switch 320 can be configured to selectively couple any one of its inputs to any one of its outputs.
  • the amplified signals output from the buffer amplifiers 310 a - 310 d and provided to the inputs of the crosspoint switch 320 can be selectively coupled to any of the outputs of the crosspoint switch 320 .
  • the crosspoint switch 320 has two outputs, although the crosspoint switch 320 can typically implement any number of outputs.
  • a first output from the crosspoint switch 320 is coupled to a first band translation device 330 a .
  • a second output of the crosspoint switch 320 is coupled to a second band translation device 330 b .
  • the two band translation devices 330 a , 330 b are typically similar structures, this is not a requirement.
  • Each of the band translation devices 330 a - 330 b can, for example, have a different structure.
  • the first band translation device 330 a is configured with an input switch 336 a which selectively routes an input signal to one of a frequency translation path or a pass through path in the band translation device 330 a .
  • the input switch 336 a for the first band translation device 330 a is shown in the frequency translation position.
  • the input switch 336 a When the input switch 336 a is configured to route an input signal to a frequency translation path, the input signal is routed to an input of a frequency translation device, such as a mixer 332 a .
  • a frequency translation device such as a mixer 332 a .
  • a signal from a local oscillator (LO) is coupled to a LO port on the mixer 332 a .
  • the LO can be integrated onto the same integrated circuit as other components of the band translation switch 300 or can be implemented externally to an integrated circuit band translation switch 300 .
  • the band translated output frequency from the mixer 332 a is a function of the input signal to the mixer and the LO frequency.
  • the signals provided to the buffer amplifiers 310 a - 310 d , and thus to the band translation devices 330 a - 330 b can be signals in predetermined frequency bands.
  • the LO frequency can be programmable, or otherwise tunable, in order to allow an any one of the predetermined input frequency bands to be frequency translated to any one of the predetermined output frequency bands.
  • the mixer 332 a is configured such that the frequency translated output from the mixer 332 a is optimized for ideal multiplier products.
  • the desirable multiplier products can include the sum and difference frequency components or only one of the sum or difference frequency components.
  • the input signal and the LO signal are undesirable signals at the output of the mixer.
  • the mixer 332 a can be configured such that higher order mixer products are negligible, that is, the higher order mixer products are below the desired mixer products by a predetermined amount, such as 40 dB.
  • higher order mixer products can be lower than 10 dB, 15 dB, 20 dB, 30 dB, 50 dB, 60 dB or some other level.
  • the mixer 332 a can be configured such that significant higher order mixer products appear at the output of the mixer 332 a .
  • Some or all of the higher order mixer products can be determined to not adversely affect the system.
  • some or all of the higher order mixer products can be substantially reduced through filtering in subsequent stages (not shown).
  • Filtering can be performed by implementing filters or can be accomplished as a result of the frequency response of elements that appear after the mixer 332 a output.
  • the filters can be implemented on the same substrate as the buffers 310 a - 310 d , crosspoint switch 320 , and mixers 332 a and 332 b .
  • the filters can be implemented separate from the buffers 310 a - 310 d , crosspoint switch 320 , and mixers 332 a and 332 b and need not even be implemented locally to the other devices.
  • the filters may have a passband that is greater than, equal to, or less than an input frequency bandwidth.
  • the predetermined input frequency bands can be the same as, or different from, some or all of the predetermined output frequency bands.
  • the predetermined input frequency bands are distinct from one another and the predetermined output frequency bands are substantially identical to the predetermined input frequency bands.
  • the predetermined input frequency bands can include a first input frequency band of 950-1450 MHz and a second input frequency band of 1650-2150 MHz.
  • the predetermined output frequency bands can then include a first output frequency band at 950-1450 MHz and a second output frequency band of 1650-2150 MHz, such that the predetermined input and output frequency bands are the same.
  • the frequency translated signal is output from the mixer 332 a and coupled to an output switch 338 a .
  • the output switch 338 a is configured to couple the signal output from the selected signal path to an output of the band translation switch 300 .
  • the output switch 338 a for the first band translation device 330 a is shown as selecting the frequency translation path.
  • the second band translation device 330 b is configured similarly to the first band translation device 336 a .
  • An input switch 336 b is configured to select a frequency translation signal path or a pass through signal path.
  • the frequency translation path uses a mixer 332 b driven by a LO to frequency translate the input signal.
  • An output switch 338 b couples the signal from the selected signal path to an output of the band translation switch 300 .
  • the input switch 336 b of the second band translation device 336 b is shown as selecting the pass through signal path.
  • the output switch 338 b or the second band translation device 330 b is shown as selecting the pass through signal path.
  • the pass through signal path is shown as a direct connection from the input switch 336 b to the output switch 338 b .
  • any number of elements can be present in the pass through signal path. The only limitations are that the elements in the pass through signal path do not result in a frequency translation of the desired input signal to a different frequency at the output of the band translation device 330 b .
  • One or more filters or frequency selective devices placed after the band translation device 330 b can be configured to filter the output of the band translation device 330 b .
  • the filters may have a passband that is greater than, equal to, or less than an input frequency bandwidth.
  • the band translation device for example 330 a or 330 b
  • the output band can be narrower than the input frequency band.
  • a band translation device for example 330 a , having an input switch 336 a and an output switch 338 a configured to select a signal path, typically controls the input switch 336 a and the output switch 338 a to select the same signal path. It can be advantageous to implement a band translation device 330 a with both an input switch 336 a and an output switch 338 a in order to limit the effects the non-selected signal path has on the performance of the selected signal path.
  • a band translation device for example 330 a
  • the band translation device for example 330 a , need not incorporate a pass through path, but instead, can incorporate two or more frequency translation paths.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates a simplified switch diagram of a doubly balanced mixer as known in the art.
  • the mixer 400 includes RF and IF ports 410 and 430 , respectively, each of which is shown differentially, but may be single-ended in another embodiment.
  • the differential RF signal 410 is supplied to the input of SPDT switches 422 , the states of which are switched at a rate determined by an LO signal 425 supplied thereto.
  • the outputs of the switches 422 are coupled to differential IF ports 430 operable to provide the differential IF signal 430 .
  • FIG. 4B illustrates the doubly balanced mixer of FIG. 4A as a Gilbert cell multiplier or mixer circuit known in the art.
  • the mixer circuit includes two cross-coupled differential transistor pairs 422 whose base terminals are coupled to the LO source 425 , collector terminals are coupled to the IF loads 430 , and emitter terminals are coupled to buffer transistors 417 . Responsive to the differential RF signal applied at terminals 410 a and 410 b , a voltage difference is established across resistor 415 , resulting in the corresponding modulation of the quiescently-supplied current driving the transistor pairs 422 that comprise the mixer core.
  • illustrated mixer circuit is only exemplary, and numerous variations of the circuit are also widely used.
  • doubly balanced mixers provide a high level of even order mixing product suppression
  • circuit imperfections lead to degradation in that suppression.
  • a relatively low impedance parasitic 412 e.g., capacitance
  • the LO interferer can then pass through the mixer core and to the output loads.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates one example of such an instance where multiple mixers are supplied by a single VCO.
  • Each mixer is configured to operate in either a mixing mode, whereby the synthesized signal 505 and input signals 510 a and 510 b are provided to respective mixers 520 a and 520 b to produce respective mixed signals 530 a and 530 b , or in a bypass mode, whereby the synthesized signal 505 is not supplied to the mixer 520 c and the input signal 510 c is routed such that it bypasses the mixer 520 c.
  • FIG. 6A illustrates a simplified switch diagram of a mixer circuit 600 in accordance with one embodiment of the invention.
  • the mixer circuit 600 includes a mixer core 620 and a mode select circuit 640 .
  • the mixer core 620 includes two input switches 624 and 628 , each switch having an input 624 a , 628 a , and two outputs 624 b , 624 c , and 628 b , 328 c , respectively.
  • Switches are depicted to convey the component's general function, and those skilled in the art will readily appreciate that each may be realized using an variety of circuit elements, including transistors (BJT and FET types), diodes, and the like. Accordingly, as used herein, the term “switch” or “switches” shall denote any of these circuit elements, or equivalents thereof.
  • Input switches 624 and 628 are operable to accept a signal at a first frequency f 1 in either a differential or single-sided form.
  • the first frequency signal f 1 will consist of a differential signal, wherein separate polarities of the first frequency signal f 1 are supplied to separate switch inputs 410 a and 410 b , respectively.
  • the switches' inputs e.g., 410 a
  • the input of the other switch e.g., 410 b
  • the input of the other switch e.g., 410 b
  • the first and second switches 624 and 628 are further configured to receive a switching signal 425 , which operates to switch the first and second switches between their respective output states at a second frequency f 2 , as will be further described below.
  • the first and second switches 624 and 628 are configured such that both, upon receiving the switching signal 425 , switch to the opposite states (i.e., one to its first output, and the other to its second output).
  • the switching signal 425 may be supplied in anti-phase to configure the first and second switches in opposite output states.
  • the mixer circuit 600 further includes a mode select circuit 640 , implemented in one embodiment as third and fourth switches 644 and 648 .
  • Third switch 640 includes an input 644 a switchable to two outputs 644 b and 644 c
  • fourth switch 648 includes an input 648 a switchable to two outputs 648 b and 648 c .
  • the third switch's input 644 a is coupled to the second output 624 c of the first switch.
  • the third switch's first output 644 b is coupled to the first switch's first output 624 b
  • the third switch's second output 644 c is coupled to the second switch's second output 628 c .
  • the fourth switch's input 648 a is coupled to the second switch's first output 628 b .
  • the fourth switch's first output 648 b is coupled to the first switch's first output 624 b , and a second output 648 c coupled to the second switch's second output 628 c.
  • the third and fourth switches are further configured to receive a mode select signal 650 operable to select the output state of the third and fourth switches 644 and 648 .
  • the third and fourth switches 644 and 648 are collectively configured to operate in one of two states: a bypass state or a mixing state.
  • the bypass state is exemplified in FIG. 6A with the third switch 644 coupled to its first output 644 b and the fourth switch 648 coupled to its second output 648 c as shown in FIG. 6A.
  • the mixing state could be alternatively realized by switching both states of the third and fourth switches, as will be further illustrated below.
  • the resulting bypass or mixed signal is provided in differential form at output ports 430 a and 430 b .
  • IF loads 665 a and 665 b are each coupled to a respective output port and an ac ground, as described below.
  • a single IF load may be coupled between ports 665 a and 665 b .
  • the term “IF” load shall not infer that the loads' frequency of operation is limited to those frequencies below the input signals, and in fact may be a higher operational frequency when the desired mixing product is an upconverted signal.
  • the IF load may comprise active or passive components as known in the art.
  • the switches may be discretely or integrally formed using a variety of fabrication techniques known in the art, including monolithic fabrication in a Bipolar Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (Bi-CMOS) process. Additional circuitry described herein, such as IF loads and oscillator circuitry, as well as other components may be monolithically formed onto an integrated circuit device in accordance with the invention.
  • Bi-CMOS Bipolar Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
  • FIG. 6B illustrates a method for operating the mixer circuit shown in FIG. 6A in accordance with the invention.
  • a first frequency signal is supplied to one or both of the input switches 624 and 628 .
  • the first frequency signal may be in the form of a single-sided signal, in which case the first frequency signal is applied to one of the inputs 410 a or 410 b , the other switch input being coupled to an ac ground.
  • oppositely polarized signals are supplied to respective signal inputs 410 a and 410 b.
  • the input terminal of the first and second switches is switched between each switch's first and second output at a second frequency f 2 .
  • this process is performed by using the second frequency signal as a switch control signal.
  • an oscillator or other frequency source used to generate the second frequency signal may be local/integrated with one or more of the switches, or may be externally located and supplied to the first and second switches via a transmission medium.
  • the first and second outputs of each input switch are coupled to either: (i) a node common to the switch's first and second outputs, or (ii) nodes of opposite polarity. Connecting the two outputs to a common node results in the first frequency signal being output at 430 (bypass mode), and connecting the two outputs to opposite polarity nodes results in a mixing operation of the first and second frequency signals, and accordingly the generation of one or more mixing products therefrom.
  • the process of 676 is performed by the mode select circuit 640 illustrated in FIG.
  • the third switch is configured to connect the first and second outputs of the first switch 624 to a common node 430 a
  • the fourth switch 648 is configured to connect the first and second outputs of the second switch 628 to a common node 430 b
  • the process is performed by switching the states of the third and fourth switches. In this state, the first and second outputs of the first switch 624 will alternately connect to opposite polarity nodes 430 a and 430 b , and the first and second outputs of the second switch 628 will also alternately connect to opposite polarity nodes 430 b and 430 a .
  • the output states of the third and fourth switches 644 and 648 are configurable either in a bypass mode where the outputs of the first and second switches are connected to a common node, or in a mixing mode where the outputs of the first and second switches are connected to opposite polarity nodes.
  • the connection between the mixer core (first and second switches) and the IF loads 665 a and 665 b is maintained during operation in either the bypass mode or mixing mode.
  • the first and second switches are controlled to continuously switch between their respective outputs at the second frequency during operation in either the bypass or mixing modes.
  • a single IF load may be coupled between nodes 430 a and 430 b in an alternative embodiment under the invention.
  • FIG. 6C illustrates the mixer circuit of FIG. 6A as a modified Gilbert cell mixer circuit 680 in accordance with the invention, with previously identified components retaining their reference numerals.
  • each of the switches 624 , 628 , 644 , and 648 are implemented as a differential pair of npn bipolar junction transistors Q 1 -Q 8 .
  • a mixer/bypass control circuit produces a control signal 650 which is supplied differentially to the base terminals of the mode select switches 644 and 648 . The polarity of control signal may be reversed to switch circuit operation between bypass and mixing modes.
  • a signal source e.g., a LO source
  • the input signal f 1 is applied to the input terminals 410 a and 410 b of buffer transistors 417 , or alternatively may be provided as a single-ended signal, in which case one of the input terminals 410 a or 410 b is coupled to an ac ground, as described above.
  • transistors Q 1 -Q 8 are npn bipolar transistors 20 um ⁇ 0.4 um
  • IF loads 665 a and 665 b are 200 ohms
  • resistor 415 is 200 ohms
  • the first frequency signal f 1 operates at 950-2150 MHz
  • the second frequency signal f 2 operates at 3100 MHz
  • the mode select signal 650 is 500 mV DC.
  • the circuit's supply V cc operates at +6 VDC.
  • the illustrated components are integrally formed using a 0.35 um Bi-CMOS photolithographic process. Skilled practitioners will appreciate that the circuit 680 can be alternatively realized using various modifications, e.g., pnp-type bipolar transistors, n or p-type field effect transistors, or other components such as diodes, and the like.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a second embodiment of the mixer circuit in accordance with the invention.
  • the mixer circuit 700 includes a mode select switch 710 having an input 710 a to receive the first frequency signal f 1 , a first output 710 b coupled to a bypass circuit 720 , and a second output 710 c coupled to a mixing core 730 .
  • the bypass circuit 720 may be any transmission medium operable to support the propagation of the first frequency signal therealong, including printed/integrated circuit traces (including ungrounded lines or grounded lines such as microstrip, stripline, coplanar waveguide and the like), wire, twisted pair line, coaxial cable, conductive or dielectric waveguide, and the like.
  • the mixer core 730 has an input coupled to the switch's second output 710 c , a second input operable to receive the second frequency signal 425 , and an output.
  • the mixer core 730 can be of any conventional type (i.e., single-ended, singly-balanced, doubly balanced, etc.) and realized in any of the known forms, such as a Gilbert cell mixer.
  • the mixer circuit further comprises a signal combiner 740 coupled to the bypass circuit 720 and the mixer output.
  • the signal combiner 740 has an output coupled to a common load 750 .
  • the signal combiner may be realized as a commonly connected port, power combiner (active or passive), or similar circuits. Selection of the bypass or mixing mode is provided by a mode select signal 650 , which is supplied by a control circuit.
  • the mixer core 730 is supplied the second frequency signal 425 via a local oscillator.
  • One or more of the described components may be integrally fabricated into a monolithic circuit using semiconductor processing techniques appropriate for the particular material. Preferably, the operation of the mixer core continues and circuit connections between the mixer core 730 and the common load 750 is maintained during operation within or switching between the bypass and mixing modes.
  • FIGS. 8A and 8B illustrate exemplary systems using the improved mixer circuit of FIG. 6A or 7 in accordance with the invention, the exemplary systems comprising a common oscillator, multiple mixer system.
  • the system 820 includes a frequency synthesizer 822 and a VCO 824 coupled to three mixer circuits 680 1-3 , the detailed architecture of each being described in FIGS. 6A and 6C, above.
  • the frequency synthesizer 822 and VCO 824 operate to produce the second signal frequency f 2 , which is supplied to each of the three mixer circuits 680 1-3 .
  • Each mixer circuit 680 1-3 is additionally supplied with a first frequency signal 612 1-3 in differential form.
  • Each first frequency signal 612 1-3 is identified as f 1 for convenience, and the reader will appreciate that each of these frequencies may be different.
  • the mixer circuits 680 1-3 are supplied respective mode select signals 650 1-3 to configure each corresponding mixer circuit to their desired output.
  • the first mixer circuit 680 1 is supplied a “bypass” mode signal 650 1 , resulting in the (differential) output at the first signal frequency f 1 .
  • the second mixer circuit 680 2 is supplied a “mix” mode signal 650 2 , resulting in the output of the mixing product described above.
  • the third mixer circuit 680 3 receives the first and second frequency signals f 1 , f 2 , and the “mix” mode signal 650 3 , resulting in the mixing mode of operation.
  • each mixer circuit 680 1-3 continues to switch at the second frequency f 2 regardless of whether the supplied control signal 650 1-3 sets the mixer circuit to a bypass mode or mixing mode. Additionally, the mixer circuit's coupling to the IF loads 665 a and 665 b (or to a single IF load coupled between differential nodes 430 a and 430 b ) is maintained during and switching between the bypass and mixing modes.
  • FIG. 8B illustrates another embodiment of a common oscillator, multiple mixer system 850 in which the mixer circuit of FIG. 7 is employed.
  • the system 850 similarly employs a frequency synthesizer 822 and a VCO 824 for generating the second frequency signal f 2 which is commonly supplied to the mixer circuits 700 1-3 .
  • the first frequency signal 612 1-3 (identified as f 1 for convenience only) is supplied to the input of each mixer circuit.
  • a corresponding mode select signal 650 1-3 is also supplied to set the switches in the desired bypass or mixing mode enabling the independent control of each mixer circuit in either a bypass or mixing mode.
  • the operation of the mixer continues and circuit connections between the mixer core 730 and the common load 750 can be maintained during operation within or switching between the bypass and mixing modes in order to maintain a substantially constant level of LO even-order interference.
  • FIGS. 9A-9C show functional block diagrams of various embodiments of cascadable buffer amplifiers with switches.
  • FIG. 9A shows a functional block diagram of an embodiment having a single buffer amplifier 910 configured to drive both the input to the crosspoint switch 912 as well as the cascade output. This configuration uses fewer elements than do the embodiments shown in FIG. 9B or 9 C.
  • the design of the buffer amplifier 910 can be more complicated because the buffer amplifier 910 is configured to drive two potentially independent loads. Ideally, changes in the load placed on the cascade output should not affect the signal provided to the crosspoint switch 912 .
  • FIG. 9A can show the fewest elements, but can require a more complex buffer amplifier 910 design.
  • the embodiment of FIG. 9B is equivalent to the buffer amplifier embodiment disclosed in FIG. 2.
  • the buffer amplifier embodiment uses two buffer amplifiers 920 , 924 connected in parallel.
  • the input signal provided, for example, by an LNB is coupled to an internal buffer amplifier 920 and a cascading buffer amplifier 924 .
  • the internal buffer amplifier 920 amplifies the input signal and drives the input to the crosspoint switch 928 .
  • the cascading buffer amplifier 924 amplifies the input signal and drives the cascade output.
  • the cascade output can represent an output from an IC which includes the buffer amplifier embodiment.
  • the internal buffer amplifier isolates load changes and interference at its output from its input.
  • the internal buffer amplifier 920 thus provides signal isolation to the buffer amplifier input and the cascade output.
  • the cascading buffer amplifier 924 isolates load changes and interference at its output from its input, thereby providing signal isolation to the buffer amplifier input and the cascade output.
  • the two amplifier embodiment has the advantages of high isolation between the outputs of the buffer amplifiers and between the outputs of the buffer amplifiers to the input of the buffer amplifiers.
  • the multiple amplifier embodiment can require more active devices, which consume power, generate heat, generate interference, and increase cost.
  • the multiple amplifier configuration may not be the most desirable solution for all applications.
  • FIG. 9C Another buffer amplifier embodiment is shown in the functional block diagram of FIG. 9C.
  • the input signal for example the output from an LNB
  • the power divider 930 can for example, be a passive power divider or an active power divider. Additionally, the power divider 930 can be configured to provide substantially an equal power split or can be configured to provide a majority of the power to one of the output ports.
  • the signals provided at each of the output ports of the power divider 930 can be in-phase or can be out of phase.
  • One of the output signals from the power divider 930 is coupled to a buffer amplifier 934 that is configured to amplify the signal and couple the amplified signal to an input of the crosspoint switch 938 .
  • the other output from the power divider 930 is coupled to the cascade output.
  • the embodiment of FIG. 9C can be advantageous because the power divider 930 can be implemented as a passive device that consumes no power. Additionally, the power divider 930 provides a degree of isolation between the cascade output and the buffer amplifier output. There is also signal isolation between the output ports of the power divider 930 . However, if the power divider 930 is a passive device, the signal isolation between the output ports is typically not as great as is obtainable from the two amplifier configuration. Additionally, a passive device can require considerable area on an integrated circuit or can not be feasible to implement on an integrated circuit. Also, the signal quality can be severely degraded if multiple passive power divider stages are cascaded.
  • FIG. 10 is a functional block diagram of a crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 .
  • a two input and two output version of the receiver 180 of FIG. 1 can be implemented with the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 of FIG. 10 in combination with two LNB's.
  • the receiver of FIG. 1 can include LNB modules connected to an integrated circuit implementation of the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 .
  • This configuration of a receiver allows signal routing and band translation to be performed at a location physically close to the LNBs.
  • the physical proximity of LNBs to the crosspoint switch with band translation 200 minimizes the loss and induced noise experienced by the received signals.
  • the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 is not limited to having only two inputs and two outputs. Other embodiments of the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 can include additional inputs and outputs.
  • the number of inputs can be generalized to any number, N.
  • the number of inputs, N can be, for example, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, or some other number.
  • the number of outputs can be generalized to any number, M.
  • the number of outputs, M can be, for example, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, or some other number.
  • the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 can be located remote from a signal source, such as an antenna or LNB modules.
  • a signal source such as an antenna or LNB modules.
  • one or more coaxial cables can couple the outputs from LNB modules to inputs of the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 .
  • the LNB modules can be a distance of more than 250 feet away from the crosspoint switch and can couple to the LNB modules with coaxial cables.
  • the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 can be configured using differential signal interconnections to improve signal isolation.
  • the device can be implemented with single ended signal interconnections but differential signal interconnections typically provide greater isolation. Signal isolation is of greater concern when the device is implemented in a single integrated circuit.
  • the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 has a first signal path and a second signal path.
  • the first signal path includes a first low noise amplifier (LNA) 1010 a connected to an arrangement of switches, 1022 a , 1024 a , 1026 a , and 1028 a , that can selectively route a signal at the output 1014 a of the LNA 1010 a to a first band translation device 1030 a or a second band translation device 1030 b .
  • LNA low noise amplifier
  • the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 of FIG. 10 is configured to provide voltage-mode switching of the signals.
  • the first LNA 1010 a is configured with a differential input 1012 a and a differential output 1014 a .
  • the differential input 1012 a of the first LNA 1010 a can be, for example, matched to 75 ohm differential.
  • the differential output 1014 a of the first LNA 1010 a is configured to have a low impedance.
  • the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 maximizes signal isolation and minimizes switching transients by connecting a high isolation switch configuration to the output of the first LNA 1010 a .
  • Band translation devices 1030 a , 1030 b having high input impedances are connected to the outputs of the switch configuration.
  • a low output impedance refers to a typical magnitude less than 10 ohms differential.
  • low impedances may refer to other impedance magnitudes that may be higher or lower than 10 ohms, and need not be defined differentially.
  • a low impedance can refer to a magnitude of substantially less than 33 ohms.
  • a high impedance refers to a magnitude of typically greater than 1 kohm differential.
  • high impedances may refer to other impedance magnitudes that may be higher or lower than 1 kohm, and need not be defined differentially.
  • high impedance can refer to a magnitude of typically greater than 330 ohms.
  • low impedance and high impedance are defined relative to one another. That is, high impedance is defined to be greater than or equal to approximately ten times the low impedance value. Thus, for a low impedance value of 33 ohms, a high impedance value is greater than approximately 330 ohms.
  • the in-phase output of the first LNA 1010 a is connected to switches 1022 a and 1024 a that selectively switch the signal to the in-phase inputs of the band translation devices 1030 a , 1030 b based on switch control signals provided by, for example, the controller in the set top box 160 a of FIG. 1.
  • a microprocessor local to, or integrated with the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 can process signals, such as one or more control messages, from an associated set top box or receiver.
  • the inverted phase output of the first LNA 1010 a is connected to switches 1026 a , 1028 a that selectively switch the signal to the inverted inputs of the band translation devices 1030 a , 1030 b .
  • a switch connected to the in-phase output, for example 1022 a is typically paired with a switch on the inverted output, for example 1026 a , such that a differential signal is selectively connected by the switch pair 1022 a , 1026 a.
  • the controller in the set top box can direct a first switch pair 1026 a , 1026 a to selectively connect the differential output of the first LNA 1010 a to the differential input of the first band translation device 1030 a .
  • a second switch pair 1024 a , 1028 a selectively connects the differential output of the first LNA 1010 a to the second band translation device 1030 b.
  • the first band translation device 1030 a can selectively frequency translate the signal at its input to an output frequency band.
  • the first band translation device 1030 a uses a signal from a first Local Oscillator (LO) 1040 a to perform the frequency translation.
  • LO Local Oscillator
  • a second signal path is configured similar to the first signal path.
  • a second LNA 1010 b has a differential input 1012 b and a differential output 1014 b .
  • the signal at the differential output 1014 b of the second LNA 1010 b is selectively connected to the first band translation device 1030 a using a third switch pair 1022 b , 1026 b .
  • the signal at the differential output 1014 b of the second LNA 1010 b is selectively connected to the second band translation device 1030 b using a fourth switch pair 1024 b , 1028 b.
  • the signals from the first LNA 1010 a and the second LNA 1010 b are not switched to the same band translation device, for example 1030 a .
  • the output of a single LNA 1010 a can be switched to both band translation devices 1030 a , 1030 b while the other LNA signal is not provided to any of the band translation devices 1030 a , 1030 b.
  • the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 is configured to provide high signal isolation between the input signals and the output signals from the LNA's 1010 a and 1010 b, and high isolation through the crosspoint switch section 1022 a - 1028 b . Additionally, the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 provides high signal isolation at the input and output of the band translation devices 1030 a and 1030 b . Additionally, the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 has high signal isolation and low switching transients. Low switching transients are achieved through the use of low impedance at the LNA outputs combined with high impedance inputs at the band translation devices 1030 a , 1030 b . High signal isolation is achieved using differential signal configuration and is also achieved through the use of high isolation switches.
  • High signal isolation typically refers to greater than 30 dB of isolation. It may be advantageous to achieve a high signal isolation that is greater than approximately 40 dB. In general, high signal isolation can refer to greater than 20 dB, 25 dB, 30 dB, 35 dB, 40 dB, 45 dB, 50 dB or some other greater level of isolation.
  • FIGS. 11A-11D are embodiments of high isolation switches. Each of the switch embodiments of FIGS. 11A-11D are single-ended configurations. The switch embodiments can be duplicated to allow switching of in-phase and inverted signals of differential signals. Thus, a pair of switches from FIGS. 11A-11D can be used as the switch pairs of FIG. 10.
  • FIG. 11A is a first switch embodiment having a single transistor 1102 controlled to selectively connect a signal from its input to its output based on the signal applied to the control input.
  • the transistor 1102 can be controlled to selectively isolate a signal at its input from its output based on the signal applied to its control input. Signal isolation is controlled by the ability of the transistor 1102 to isolate the input from the output.
  • a pair of transistors 1102 can be used to switch differential signals.
  • FIG. 11B is a second switch embodiment.
  • a signal is input at the base of a first transistor 1110 configured as an emitter follower. Additionally, a bias voltage, which is typically a DC bias voltage, is applied to the base of the first transistor 1110 .
  • the emitter of the first transistor 1110 is selectively biased with a controllable current source 1112 .
  • the first transistor 1110 selectively couples a signal from its base to its emitter when the controllable current source 1112 conducts. Conversely, a signal at the base of the first transistor 110 is isolated from the emitter when the controllable current source 1112 is off.
  • a pull up device 1114 connects the emitter of the first transistor 1110 to a voltage that is greater than the bias voltage, for example (V b +1V) to ensure the first transistor 1110 is cut off when the controllable current source 1112 is off.
  • FIG. 11C is a third switch embodiment having multiple transistors configured to provide increased signal isolation.
  • a signal is provided to a first transistor 1120 .
  • the output of the first transistor 1120 is connected to an input of a second transistor 1122 .
  • the output of the second transistor 1122 is the output of the switch.
  • a third transistor 1124 is connected to the output of the first transistor 1120 and is configured to selectively couple the output of the first transistor 1120 and input of the second transistor 1122 to ground or signal return.
  • a differential control signal is used to control the third switch embodiment.
  • An in-phase control signal controls the first transistor 1120 and second transistor 1122 .
  • An inverted control signal controls the third transistor 1124 .
  • the third transistor 1124 is controlled to be cut off.
  • the third transistor 1124 is controlled to be conducting.
  • FIG. 11D is a fourth switch embodiment.
  • the fourth switch embodiment is similar to the second switch embodiment with additional transistors configured to provide additional signal isolation.
  • a signal is input at the base of a first transistor 1130 configured as an emitter follower. Additionally, a bias voltage, V b , which is typically a DC bias voltage, is applied to the base of the first transistor 1130 .
  • V b bias voltage
  • the emitter of the first transistor 1130 is selectively biased with a controllable current source 1132 .
  • the first transistor 1130 selectively couples a signal from its base to its emitter when the controllable current source 1132 conducts. Conversely, a signal at the base of the first transistor 1130 is isolated from the emitter when the controllable current source 1132 is off.
  • a second transistor 1134 is configured to selectively pull up the emitter of the first transistor 1130 to a voltage that is greater than the bias voltage, for example (V b +1V), to ensure the first transistor 1130 is cut off when the controllable current source 1132 is off. Additionally, the second transistor 1134 can also shunt any signal leakage at the emitter node to AC ground via the bias point, thus improving signal isolation.
  • a third transistor 1136 has an input connected to the emitter of the first transistor 1130 and an output that is the output of the switch. The third transistor 1136 is selectively controlled to couple the signal from the emitter of the first transistor 1130 to the switch output when the controllable current source 1132 is conducting. The third transistor 1136 is selectively controlled to isolate the signal from the emitter of the first transistor 1130 when the controllable current source is off.
  • FIG. 12 is a functional block diagram of a crosspoint switch with band translation 1200 that can also be integrated as a portion of the receiver 180 of FIG. 1.
  • a two input and two output version of the receiver 180 of FIG. 1 can be implemented with the crosspoint switch with band translation 1200 of FIG. 12 in combination with two LNB's.
  • the crosspoint switch with band translation 1200 is similar to the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 of FIG. 10 with the exception that the device of FIG. 12 uses current mode switching while the device of FIG. 10 uses voltage mode switching.
  • the crosspoint switch with band translation 1200 can be used interchangeably with the device of FIG. 10.
  • current mode switching can be advantageous because of the ability to sum currents into a common node.
  • the crosspoint switch with band translation 1200 has a first signal path and a second signal path.
  • the first signal path includes a first LNA 1210 a connected to a pair of transconductance devices, 1222 a and 1224 a that can selectively route a signal at the output 1214 a of the LNA 1210 a to a first band translation device 1230 a or a second band translation device 1230 b .
  • the crosspoint switch with band translation 1200 uses the transconductance devices, for example 1222 a and 1222 b , to provide current-mode switching of the signals.
  • the first LNA 1210 a is configured with a differential input 1212 a and a differential output 1214 a .
  • the differential input 1212 a of the first LNA 1210 a can be matched to 75 ohm differential.
  • the differential output 1214 a of the first LNA 1210 a is configured to have a low impedance.
  • the crosspoint switch with band translation 1200 maximizes signal isolation and minimizes switching transients by connecting high isolation transconductance devices, 1222 a and 1224 a , to the output of the first LNA 1210 a .
  • Band translation devices 1230 a , 1230 b having low input impedances are connected to the outputs of the transconductance devices 1222 a and 1224 a.
  • the differential output 1214 a of the first LNA 1210 a is connected to the high impedance differential inputs of the transconductance devices 1222 a and 1224 a .
  • the first LNA 1210 a can drive both transconductance devices 1222 a and 1224 a because the differential inputs of the transconductance devices 1222 a and 1224 a are high impedance.
  • Each of the transconductance devices 1222 a and 1224 a includes a control input, 1223 a and 1225 a respectively, that is used to switch the transconductance device 1222 a and 1224 a on or off.
  • the first transconductance device 1222 a is controlled to provide a current output to the input of the first and translation device 1230 a .
  • the second transconductance device 1224 a can be controlled to provide a current output to the input of the second band translation device 1230 b .
  • One or more transconductance devices for example 1222 a and 1224 a connected to an LNA 1210 a can simultaneously be enabled such that one input, for example a signal at 1212 a , can be routed to all band translation devices 1230 a and 1230 b.
  • the first band translation device 1230 a can selectively frequency translate the signal at its input to an output frequency band.
  • the first band translation device 1230 a uses a signal from a first LO 1240 a to perform the frequency translation.
  • the first band translation device 1230 a has a low impedance input and thus, operates as a current summing node for the currents from the transconductance devices 1222 a and 1222 b to which its input is connected.
  • a second signal path is configured similar to the first signal path.
  • a second LNA 1210 b has a differential input 1212 b and a differential output 1214 b .
  • the signal at the differential output 1214 b of the second LNA 1210 b is selectively connected to the first band translation device 1230 a using a third transconductance device 1222 b .
  • the signal at the differential output 1214 b of the second LNA 1210 b is selectively connected to the second band translation device 1230 b using a fourth transconductance device 1224 b .
  • the second band translation device 1230 b operates in conjunction with a second LO 1240 b.
  • the transconductance devices 1222 a , 1222 b , 1224 a , and 1224 b can be any type of transconductance devices, such as transistors, FETs, and the like.
  • the transconductance devices 1222 a , 1222 b , 1224 a , and 1224 b have a high output impedance.
  • multiple transconductance devices, for example 1222 a and 1222 b can selectively provide a signal to the same band translation device 1230 a without the output impedance of the first transconductance device 1222 a affecting the performance of the other transconductance device 1222 b .
  • the low input impedance band translation device 1230 a operates as a current summing node.
  • the LNA's 1210 a and 1210 b are omitted and the input signals are directly coupled to the inputs of the transconductance devices 1222 a , 1222 b , 1224 a , and 1224 b .
  • the inputs to the first and second signal paths can be matched to a predetermined impedance using a matching circuit (not shown) which can be as simple as a resistor placed across the differential inputs.
  • FIG. 13 is a functional block diagram of a crosspoint switch with band translation 1300 having LNA/band translation device pairs for each input/output combination and summing the outputs of the band translation devices in the current domain.
  • the crosspoint switch with band translation 1300 can be combined with LNBs in the receiver 180 of FIG. 1.
  • the devices in the crosspoint switch with band translation 1300 utilize differential signals to minimize noise, but single-ended devices can be used in other embodiments.
  • Each LNA/band translation pair can selectively provide a signal to an output or be controlled to isolate the signal at the input from the output.
  • the LNA can be selectively controlled to isolate the signal by removing the bias, or by reversing the bias on the amplifier.
  • the controller in the set top box 160 a of FIG. 1 can receive user input and control the bias control pins, labeled A, B, C, and D, to selectively enable or disable the bias to the LNAs 1310 a - b, 1320 a - b.
  • a first LNA/band translation device pair includes a first LNA 1310 a connected to a first input 1312 a .
  • the first LNA 1310 a is controlled to selectively amplify or isolate the input signal based on a signal provided to its control input 1314 a .
  • the output of the first LNA 1310 a is connected to a first band translation device 1332 having a high output impedance.
  • the output of the first band translation device 1332 is connected to a first signal output 1340 a.
  • a second LNA/band translation device pair includes a second LNA 1320 a having an input connected to the first input 1312 a .
  • the controller in the set top box can control the control input 1324 a of the second LNA 1320 a to selectively amplify or isolate the input signal.
  • the output of the second LNA 1320 a is connected to a second band translation device 1334 having a high output impedance.
  • the output of the second band translation device 1334 is connected to a second signal output 1340 b.
  • the controller in the set top box selectively controls the first LNA 1310 a to amplify the input signal by providing an enable signal to the control input, 1314 a , on the first LNA 1310 a .
  • the first LNA 1310 a is selectively controlled to isolate the signal.
  • a second differential input 1312 b is connected to the inputs of a third LNA 1310 b and a fourth LNA 1320 b .
  • the third LNA 1310 b is controlled to selectively amplify or isolate the input signal based on a signal provided to its control input 1314 b .
  • the output of the third LNA 1310 b is connected to a third band translation device 1336 having a high output impedance.
  • the output of the third band translation device 1336 is connected to a first signal output 1340 a.
  • the fourth LNA 1320 b is controlled to selectively amplify or isolate the input signal based on a signal provided to its control input 1324 b .
  • the output of the fourth LNA 1320 b is connected to a fourth band translation device 1338 having a high output impedance.
  • the output of the fourth band translation device 1338 is connected to a first signal output 1340 b.
  • a signal provided to the second differential input 312 b can selectively be routed to the first or second signal outputs, 1340 a or 1340 b or simultaneously to both signal outputs.
  • a control signal is provided to the control input 1314 b of the third LNA 1310 b to enable the third LNA 1310 b to amplify the second input signal.
  • a control signal is provided to the control input 1324 b of the fourth LNA 1320 b to enable the fourth LNA 1320 b to amplify the second input signal.
  • the outputs of the first and third band translation devices 1332 , 1336 can be summed at the load if both signals are routed to the first signal output 1340 a .
  • the outputs of the second and fourth band translation devices 1334 and 1338 can be summed at the load if both provide signals to the second signal output 1340 b .
  • FIG. 14 is another embodiment of a 2 ⁇ 2 crosspoint switch with band translation 1400 .
  • the specific embodiment is optimized for implementation within a single integrated circuit having impedance matched inputs and outputs. It is evident that the number of inputs or outputs can be expanded to any other number.
  • the embodiment uses current mode switching. LNA's having a matched input, variable gain, and a low impedance output are used. Signals at a first input 1412 a can be routed, using first and second transconductance devices, to one or both outputs 1470 a and 1470 b . Similarly, signals at a second input 1412 b can be routed, using third and fourth transconductance devices, to one or both outputs 1470 a and 1470 b.
  • the 2 ⁇ 2 crosspoint switch with band translation 1400 receives the input signal at a matched signal input of the low noise amplifiers.
  • the low noise amplifiers generate intermediate signals at their low impedance outputs.
  • the intermediate signals are provided to high impedance inputs of current sources configured as transconductance devices.
  • a controller can selectively control the transconductance devices to provide an output current based in part on the intermediate signal. Additionally, the controller can selectively enable or disable each of the transconductance devices.
  • the bias to each of the transconductance device may be controllable to selectively enable or disable the device.
  • the bias current may be varied linearly to control the gain of the transconductance devices.
  • the gain may be varied via other means and the transconductor may be enabled and disabled by other means.
  • the current output of the transconductance devices can then be received at low impedance inputs of band translation devices that can frequency translate the current signals from a first frequency band to a second frequency band.
  • the band translation devices can have matched impedance outputs.
  • a first signal path is configured to amplify, band translate, and route a first signal to one of two outputs.
  • a first LNA 1410 a has a differential input 1412 a configured to accept the first signal.
  • the input 1412 a of the first LNA 1410 a can be a differential input that is matched to a predetermined impedance, such as 75 ⁇ or 50 ⁇ .
  • the differential output of the first LNA 1410 a has an in-phase output 1414 a and an inverted output 1416 a .
  • the differential output of the first LNA 1410 a can be a low output impedance, a matched output impedance, or a high output impedance.
  • the output impedance of the first LNA 1410 a can be, for example, 200 ohms differential.
  • the in-phase output 1414 a of the first LNA 1410 a is connected to a first emitter follower 1422 a that has a low output impedance.
  • the in-phase output 1414 a of the first LNA is connected to the base of the first emitter follower 1422 a .
  • the emitter of the first emitter follower 1424 a is connected to a current source 1424 a that biases the first emitter follower 1424 a .
  • the output of the first emitter follower 1424 a is connected to the in-phase inputs of the differential inputs to first and second transconductance devices.
  • the transconductance devices have high input impedances.
  • the transconductance devices can be bipolar devices that can be selectively enabled or disabled by controlling the bias currents.
  • the inverted output 1416 a of the first LNA is connected to the input of a second emitter follower 1426 a .
  • the second emitter follower 1426 a is biased using a current source 1428 a connected to its emitter.
  • the output of the second emitter follower 1426 a is connected to the inverted inputs of the first and second transconductance devices.
  • the first and second emitter followers, 1422 a and 1426 a with their associated current sources, 1424 a and 1428 a , can be considered the low impedance output stage of the first LNA 1410 a.
  • the first transconductance device includes a first transistor 1432 a with the base of the first transistor 1432 a serving as the in-phase input of the first transconductance device.
  • a first resistor 1433 a connects the emitter of the first transistor 1432 a to a controllable current source 1438 a .
  • the base of a second transistor 1434 a is used as the inverted input of the first transconductance device.
  • a second resistor 1435 a connects the emitter of the second transistor 1434 a to the controllable current source 1438 a.
  • the controllable current source 1438 a provides the bias for the transistors, 1432 a and 1434 a of the first transconductance device.
  • the controllable current source 1438 a can be selectively enabled or disabled based on a control signal.
  • the first transconductance device isolates a signal at its input from its output when the controllable current source 1438 a is disabled, and conversely, provides a current output that can be proportional to the input signal when the controllable current source 1438 a is enabled.
  • a first differential buffer amplifier having two transistors 1452 a and 1454 a is used to sum the currents from multiple transconductance devices and provide a differential signal to the first band translation device 1460 a.
  • the first band translation device 1460 a is configured with a low input impedance and an output impedance matched to a predetermined impedance. For example, the output of the first band translation device 1460 a can be matched to 75 ⁇ .
  • the differential output of the first band translation device 1460 a is connected to the first signal output 1470 a .
  • the first band translation device 1460 a is driven with a first LO 1462 a .
  • the first LO 1462 a frequency can be tunable to allow the frequency translation of the first band translation device 1462 a to be tuned. Alternatively the output frequency of the first LO 1462 a can be fixed.
  • the first band translation device 1462 a can be configured to frequency translate the signal or to pass the signal without frequency translation.
  • the first LNA 1410 a also provides a signal that can be selectively routed to a second output 1470 b .
  • the differential outputs from the first and second emitter followers, 1422 a and 1426 a are connected to the differential inputs of a second transconductance device.
  • the base of a first transistor 1442 a in the second transconductance device is connected to the in-phase output from the first emitter follower 1422 a .
  • the base of a second transistor 1444 a in the second transconductance device is connected to the inverted output from the second emitter follower 1426 a .
  • Resistors 1443 a and 1445 a connect the emitters of the first and second transistors 1442 a and 1444 a to a controllable current source 1448 a that selectively provides bias to the first and second transistors 1442 a and 1444 a .
  • the second transconductance device provides an output current when the controllable current source 1448 a is enabled. Conversely, the second transconductance device does not provide an output current when the controllable current source 1448 a is disabled.
  • the differential output from the second transconductance device is connected to the differential input of a second differential buffer amplifier.
  • the second differential buffer amplifier includes two transistors 1452 b and 1454 b and is used to sum the currents from multiple transconductance devices and provide a differential signal to the second band translation device 1460 b.
  • the output of the second differential buffer amplifier is connected to the differential input of a second band translation device 1460 b .
  • the second band translation device 1460 b has with a low input impedance and an output impedance matched to a predetermined impedance such as 75 ⁇ .
  • the differential output of the second band translation device 1460 b is connected to the second signal output 1470 b .
  • the second band translation device 1460 b is driven with a second LO 1462 b .
  • the second LO 1462 b frequency can be tunable to allow the frequency translation of the second band translation device 1462 b to be tuned. Alternatively the output frequency of the second LO 1462 b can be fixed.
  • the second band translation device 1462 b can be configured to frequency translate the signal or to pass the signal without frequency translation.
  • the second signal input 1412 b is connected to the second LNA 1410 b and through third and fourth transconductance devices to the first and second differential buffer amplifiers in a configuration that is similar to the path from the first signal input 1412 a to the differential buffer amplifiers.
  • the second signal input 1412 b is connected to the input of the second LNA 1410 b .
  • the differential output of the second LNA is connected to a pair of emitter followers, one emitter follower for each of the signal outputs of the second LNA 1410 b.
  • the in-phase LNA output 1414 b is connected to a first emitter follower 1422 b that includes a first current source 1424 b connected to its emitter to provide a bias.
  • the inverted LNA output 1416 b is connected to a second emitter follower 1426 b that includes a second current source 1428 b connected to its emitter to provide a bias.
  • the output of the first emitter follower 1422 b is connected to the in-phase inputs of third and fourth transconductance devices.
  • the output of the second emitter follower 1426 b is connected to the inverted inputs of the third and fourth transconductance devices.
  • the third transconductance device includes first and second transistors 1432 b and 1434 b arranged in a differential configuration.
  • the base of the first transistor 1432 b is the in-phase input of the transconductance device and the base of the second transistor 1434 b is the inverted input of the third transconductance device.
  • the emitters of the first and second transistors, 1432 b and 1434 b are connected via first and second resistors, 1433 b and 1435 b , to a controllable current source 1438 b .
  • the controllable current source selectively enables or disables the third transconductance device.
  • the collectors of the first and second transistors, 1432 b and 1434 b are connected to the differential inputs of the first differential buffer amplifier.
  • the fourth transconductance device includes first and second transistors 1442 b and 1444 b arranged in a differential configuration.
  • the base of the first transistor 1442 b is the in-phase input of the transconductance device and the base of the second transistor 1444 b is the inverted input of the fourth transconductance device.
  • the emitters of the first and second transistors, 1442 b and 1444 b are connected via first and second resistors, 1443 b and 1445 b , to a controllable current source 1448 b .
  • the controllable current source 1448 b selectively enables or disables the fourth transconductance device.
  • the collectors of the first and second transistors, 1442 b and 1444 b are connected to the differential inputs of the second differential buffer amplifier.
  • the transconductance devcies shown in FIG. 6 only represent embodiments of typical transconductance devices. Other embodiments of transconductance devices may be used in other embodiments.
  • FIG. 15 is a functional block diagram of a specific embodiment of signal distribution system 1500 including an integrated crosspoint switch with band translation (band translation switch) 1510 and external components.
  • the band translation switch 1510 includes four inputs for LNB's, a cascadable output corresponding to each of the inputs, and two outputs configured to interface with set top boxes.
  • the band translation switch 1510 is configured to interface with LNB's signals having a dual band-stacked frequency plan.
  • the dual band-stacked frequency plan includes an upper band block and a lower band block.
  • the band translation switch outputs maintain the dual band-stacked frequency plan, but allow the upper or lower band block from any of the LNB signals to be configured as an output upper band block. Similarly, the upper or low band block from any of the LNB signals can be configured as an output lower band block.
  • a more detailed description of the band translation switch 1510 is provided below.
  • the band translation switch 1510 includes four inputs configured to interface with up to four LNB's.
  • Each LNB provides a signal conforming to a dual band-stacking frequency plan having an upper band block and a lower band block.
  • the LNB signals can be satellite downlink signals from selected transponder groups.
  • the lower band block can be 950-1450 MHz and the upper band block can be 1650-2150 MHz.
  • Each of the signal inputs is connected to the input of an amplifier 1520 a - 1520 d .
  • the amplifiers 1520 a - 1520 d are configured as Low Noise Amplifiers (LNA's) that both buffer and amplify the input signals from the LNB's.
  • LNA's Low Noise Amplifiers
  • the output from each of the amplifiers 1520 a - 1520 d is connected to a corresponding input on a crosspoint switch 1530 .
  • the output from each of the amplifiers 1520 a - 1520 d is connected to a corresponding cascade output of the band translation switch 1510 .
  • the crosspoint switch 1530 is configured as a 4 ⁇ 4 switch. Any of the four amplified LNB input signals can be selectively routed to any of the four outputs of the crosspoint switch 1530 independently and simultaneously.
  • the crosspoint switch 1530 can include a two-bit control for each output. The value of the two-bit control can be programmed to selectively route the signal from one of the four inputs.
  • the band translation switch 1510 can, for example, receive the two bit control words from a set top box. Alternatively, the set top box may send one or more control messages to a microprocessor implemented local to the crosspoint switch and the microprocessor can generate the one or more two bit control words.
  • each of the four outputs from the crosspoint switch 1530 is connected to a band translation device 1540 a - 1540 d .
  • One or more outputs from the crosspoint switch 1530 can be coupled to the same band translation device, for example 1540 a.
  • the band translation devices 1540 a - 1540 d are configured to selectively frequency translate the signals or to pass the signals without frequency translation. Each of the band translation devices 1540 a - 1540 d can select frequency translation or pass through independently of the other devices. Because a dual band-stacked frequency plan is used in this embodiment, the band translation devices 1540 a - 1540 d are configured to swap the positions of the upper and lower band blocks when frequency translation is selected.
  • Each of the band translation devices 1540 a - 1540 d includes a mixer.
  • the band translation switch 1510 also includes one or more local oscillators (LO).
  • LO local oscillators
  • a single LO can be routed to all of the band translation devices 1540 a - 1540 d .
  • the local oscillator frequency can be fixed when a dual band-stacked frequency plan is implemented.
  • An LO frequency of 3.1 GHz, or 2 ⁇ (the band center mean), can be used to perform the frequency translation.
  • a plurality of variable frequency LOs can be used with the band translation devices 1540 a - 1540 d .
  • each of the band translation devices 1540 a - 1540 d can have a separate independently controlled LO output frequencies.
  • each of the band translation devices 1540 a - 1540 d can frequency translate its input signal independently of the frequency translation performed by any other band translation device.
  • LO buffer amplifiers (not shown) distribute the signal from the LO output to each of the band translation devices 1540 a - 1540 d .
  • the output of the band translation devices 1540 a - 1540 d are connected to the outputs of the band translation switch 1510 .
  • Each of the outputs of the band translation switch 1510 is a dual band-stacked signal. Each of the outputs of the band translation switch 1510 is connected to a filter 1550 a - 1550 d .
  • the filters 1550 a - 1550 d are configured to pass signals in one of the predetermined frequency bands in the dual band-stacked frequency plan.
  • the filters 1550 a - 1550 d reject signals outside of the passband, including the signals at the undesired frequency band.
  • the filters 1550 a - 1550 d can be configured with tunable passbands or can be configured to have fixed passbands.
  • the filters 1550 a - 1550 d are configured as bandpass filters with fixed passbands.
  • the first filter 1550 a is configured as a bandpass filter that passes the upper band block of the frequency plan.
  • a second filter 1550 b is configured as a bandpass filter that passes the lower band block.
  • a third filter 1550 c is configured to pass the upper band block and a fourth filter 1550 d is configured to pass the lower band block.
  • the outputs of the first and second filters 1550 a - 1550 b are connected to respective first and second inputs of a first signal combiner 1560 a .
  • the outputs of the third and fourth filters 1550 c - 1550 d are connected to first and second inputs of a second signal combiner 1560 b .
  • the filters 1550 a - 1550 d are not limited to bandpass filters, but can be, for example, bandpass filters (BPF), lowpass filters (LPF) or highpass filters (HPF). In other embodiments, other frequency selective devices can be used to limit the frequency response of the outputs.
  • the filters 1550 a - 1550 d can have passbands that are narrower than the frequency bandwidth of the input signals.
  • an input to a filter for example 1550 a , can include multiple carriers. However, the filter 1550 a can be configured to pass a subset of all of the carriers.
  • the signal combiners 1560 a - 1560 b are configured to sum the signals provided at their inputs and to provide the summed signal at an output.
  • the outputs from the signal combiners 1560 a - 1560 b are the band translated outputs of the signal distribution system 1500 .
  • Each of the outputs is connected to a set top box for further processing and for distribution to an end user device.
  • one or more frequency selective devices can be used as the filters 1550 a - 1550 d .
  • a diplexer can be used to filter and to band-stack signals.
  • the diplexer can be used as the filters, for example 1550 a and 1550 b , and signal combiner 1560 a.
  • the band translation switch 1510 is not limited to operating with band stacked input signals.
  • each of the LNB's can provide signals in the same frequency band.
  • the band translation switch 1510 can be configured to frequency translate and combine portions of the single band input signals.
  • the crosspoint switch 1530 can, for example, route the output of the first amplifier 1520 a to a first band translation device 1540 a .
  • An LO in the first band translation device 1540 a can be configured to frequency translate the signal such that one or more channels from the input signal are translated to desired output frequencies.
  • the first filter 1550 a can be configured to pass only those desired channels and reject all undesired frequencies and channels.
  • the crosspoint switch 1530 can be configured to route the output of the second amplifier 1520 b to a second band translation device 1540 b .
  • the second band translation device 1540 b can be configured to frequency translate a portion of the input signal to desired output frequencies.
  • the second filter 1550 b can be configured to pass only those desired channels and reject all undesired frequencies and channels.
  • the first and second band translation devices 1540 a - 1540 b in conjunction with the first and second filters 1550 a - 1550 b can be configured to produce selected channels in mutually exclusive frequency bands.
  • the combiner 1560 a can then sum the filtered outputs to produce a composite output signal from independent single band input signals, where each filter includes one or more channels.
  • each band translation device and filter pair for example 1540 a and 1550 a , is configured to frequency translate one or more channels from each of one or more input signal bands.
  • the frequency translated signals can be combined into a single band signal or a multiple band signal.
  • some embodiments can have multiple band translation devices and multiple filters.
  • Each of the multiple band translation devices can frequency translate one or more channels from one or more input bands.
  • the outputs of the multiple filters can be summed to provide a single composite signal having a desired channel line up.
  • FIG. 16 is a functional block diagram of a signal distribution system 1600 that is typical of a satellite television system that can be implemented at a residence or other building.
  • the signal distribution system 1600 includes an antenna 1620 having antenna feeds 1622 , 1624 coupled to two inputs of a low noise block 1626 .
  • the outputs of the low noise block 1626 are coupled to two inputs of a distribution switch 1630 .
  • the distribution switch outputs are connected to first, second, and third set top boxes 1652 , 1654 , 1656 , using first and second transmission lines 1642 , 1644 .
  • the output of the first set top box 1652 is connected to a first output device 1662 .
  • a signal splitter 1670 splits into two signals the signal coupled from the distribution switch 1630 by the second transmission line 1644 .
  • a first signal splitter 1670 output is coupled to the second set top box 1654 and the second signal splitter 1670 output is coupled to the third set top box 1656 .
  • the output of the second set top box 1654 is connected to a second output device 1664 and the output of the third set top box 1656 is connected to a third output device 1666 .
  • the antenna 1620 includes two antenna feeds 1622 , 1624 . However, multiple antennae can be used. Additionally, each antenna 1620 can have one or more antenna feeds 1622 , 1624 , and each antenna 1620 is not limited to having only two feeds 1622 , 1624 . Alternatively, the antenna 1620 can be a configuration that does not utilize an antenna feed, such as a whip or horn.
  • the antenna 1620 receives one or more signals from a satellite 1610 .
  • the satellite 1610 can provide a signal of a particular polarization and modulation type. Again, there may be more than one satellite 1610 providing signals to the antenna 1620 .
  • the signals from a particular satellite 1610 can be in the same frequency band as signals from another satellite (not shown) or can be in distinct frequency bands.
  • the signals from multiple satellites can each have the same polarity and modulation type or can be different from each other.
  • each of the antenna feeds 1622 , 1624 is connected to an independent input of a low noise block 1626 that outputs signals to the distribution switch 1630 .
  • the distribution switch 1630 is not limited to a 2 ⁇ 2 switch but can have any number of input ports and output ports, for example, the distribution switch 1630 can be, for example, a 2 ⁇ 4 switch, a 4 ⁇ 4 switch, or some other switch arrangement.
  • the distribution switch 1630 is configured to process the received satellite signals.
  • the distribution switch 1630 can, for example, amplify, filter, and frequency downconvert the received satellite signals.
  • the distribution switch 1630 can be configured as a pair of low noise block converters (LNB's) that each block convert the signals from one of the distribution switch 1630 inputs to an intermediate frequency.
  • LNB's low noise block converters
  • the distribution switch 1630 can also be configured to allow each of the input signals provided to the inputs to be connected to any one of multiple switch outputs.
  • the signal provided from the first antenna feed 1622 can be block converted in the distribution switch 1630 and routed to any of the switch outputs.
  • the signal provided from the second antenna feed 1624 can be block converted in the distribution switch 1630 and routed to any of the switch outputs.
  • the distribution switch 1630 is configured such that the signals from only one signal source are routed to a particular switch output. Alternatively, one or more of the block converted signals can be routed to the same distribution switch 1630 output.
  • the outputs of the distribution switch 1630 can be connected to remote locations using cabling when the antenna 1620 and distribution switch 1630 are installed in a geographically remote location from the desired signal destinations.
  • the outputs of the distribution switch 1630 are typically routed to remote destinations with transmission lines, which can be coaxial cables.
  • the distribution switch 1630 can be positioned local to the low noise block 1626 and antenna feeds 1622 and 1624 , or may be positioned remote from the low noise block 1626 and antenna feeds 1622 and 1624 .
  • the distribution switch 1630 is co-located with the antenna 1620 , low noise block 1626 , and antenna feeds 1622 and 1624 .
  • the distribution switch 1630 can be located remote from the antenna 1620 .
  • cables or transmission lines can couple the signals from the low noise block 1626 to a distribution switch 1630 positioned inside a structure near one or more set top boxes 1652 and 1654 .
  • the distribution switch 1630 can be positioned in an intermediate location between the antenna 1620 and the set top boxes 1652 and 1654 .
  • the low noise block 1626 is omitted and signals from the antenna feeds 1622 and 1624 can be coupled to the distribution switch 1630 using cables.
  • output signals from the distribution switch 1630 can be coupled to set top boxes or other destination devices using cables or some other distribution system.
  • the distribution switch is positioned local to the low noise block 1626 and antenna 1620 .
  • a first transmission line 1642 distributes the signal from the first output port of the distribution switch 1630 to a remote location within the signal distribution system 1600 .
  • the end of the first transmission line 1642 is connected to a first set top box 1652 located remote from the distribution switch 1630 .
  • a second transmission line 1644 distributes the signal from the second output port of the distribution switch 1630 to a signal splitter 1670 .
  • a first output of the signal splitter 1670 is coupled to the second set top box 1654 .
  • the second set top box 1654 can be located at a location remote from the distribution switch 1630 and signal splitter 1670 and can also be at a location remote from the first set top box 1652 .
  • a second output of the signal splitter 1670 is coupled to a third set top box 1656 .
  • the output of the third set top box 1656 is coupled to a third output device 1666 .
  • the first and second transmission lines, 1642 and 1644 can be parallel lines, twisted pairs, coaxial line, waveguide, and the like, or any other means for distributing the signal. Additionally, although transmission lines are typically used to minimize signal loss and signal reflections, the system can use other means for distributing the signal that are not transmission lines. For example, wires, wire bundles, and the like, can be used for distributing the signals from the distribution switch 1630 to the set top boxes 1652 , 1654 . However, for signals that can be considered Radio Frequency (RF) signals, the signals are typically distributed using transmission lines.
  • the RF information signals can, for example, be in the range of KHz up to several GHz.
  • the signal distribution system 1600 is not limited to distributing RF signals, but can distribute other signals, such as baseband signals or optical signals.
  • the transmission lines 1642 , 1644 are typically non-ideal passive devices. Thus, the transmission lines attenuate the signal power. However, the attenuation contributed by the transmission lines 1642 , 1644 typically do not attenuate the noise power to the same degree as the signal power. For example, a passive attenuator, such as a length of transmission line may not significantly degrade the thermal noise. Additionally, the transmission lines 1642 , 1644 can contribute other types of cable related signal degradation. For example, the transmission lines can affect flatness, tilt, phase distortion, group delay distortion, reflection, interference, noise pick-up and microphonic noise of the distributed signals. Thus, the losses contributed by the transmission lines 1642 , 1644 typically degrade the SNR of the signal distributed to the set top boxes 1652 , 1654 .
  • the first and second transmission lines 1642 and 1644 are coupled to corresponding inputs of set top boxes 1652 , 1654 , and 1656 .
  • the second transmission line 1644 couples to the second and third set top boxes, 1654 and 1656 , via the signal splitter 1670 .
  • the frequency bands for the signals output from the distribution switch 1630 do not correspond to frequency bands used by the output devices 1662 and 1664 .
  • the set top boxes 1652 , 1654 can further frequency translate the signals to operating bands compatible with the output devices 1662 , 1664 , and 1666 .
  • the output signals from the distribution switch 1630 can be in a format that is not compatible with the format used by the output devices 1662 , 1664 , and 1666 .
  • the set top boxes 1652 , 1654 , and 1656 can then function as signal processing stages.
  • the satellite downlink signals can be digitally modulated in a format that is not compatible with the output devices 1662 , 1664 , and 1666 which can be typical television receivers.
  • the set top boxes 1652 , 1654 , and 1656 can be configured to demodulate the digitally modulated signals, process the demodulated signals, and then modulate television channel carrier frequencies with the signals for delivery to the television output devices 1662 , 1664 , and 1666 .
  • the set top boxes 1652 , 1654 , and 1656 may not be required.
  • one or more of the functions performed by the set top boxes 1652 , 1654 , and 1656 can be integrated into the output devices 1662 , 1664 , 1666 .
  • the signal splitter 1670 can be configured to perform signal processing, such as frequency conversion or demodulation.
  • each of the set top boxes 1652 , 1654 , and 1656 is connected to a single output device 1662 , 1664 , and 1666 .
  • more than one output device e.g. 1662 , 1664 can be connected to the output from a single set top box, for example 1652 .
  • outputs from more than one set top box 1652 , 1654 , and 1656 can be combined or otherwise connected to a single output device, for example 1662 , although such a configuration is not typical.
  • An output device for example 1662
  • the output device 1662 can process the signal from the selected channel to present some media content, such as video or audio, to a user.
  • the output devices, 1662 , 1664 , and 1666 can be television receivers and can display a television signal corresponding to a signal transmitted by the satellite 1610 .
  • the output devices 1662 , 1664 , and 1666 can be other types of devices in other signal distribution systems.
  • the output devices 1662 , 1664 , and 1666 can be telephones, radio receivers, computers, networked devices, and the like, or other means for outputting a signal.
  • the output devices 1662 , 1664 , and 1666 can have a range of signal quality over which the output is considered acceptable.
  • the output devices 1662 , 1664 , and 1666 can provide acceptable outputs for input SNR above a predetermined level, which may represent a desired minimum SNR.
  • the SNR at the input to the output devices, 1662 , 1664 , and 1666 is typically determined by the signal processing performed in the set top boxes 1652 , 1654 and 1656 .
  • the signal quality is typically related to the signal quality at the input of the set top boxes 1652 , 1654 , and 1656 .
  • the signal distribution system 1600 is typically configured to provide a signal at the input to the set top boxes 1652 , 1654 , and 1656 having a SNR greater than the desired minimum.
  • FIG. 16 is a functional block diagram of a satellite signal distribution system
  • cable distribution systems which may distribute television, radio, data, and/or telephony signals
  • the signal from the one access point is then typically split, amplified, distributed, and can be combined with other signals, such as, for example the satellite television signals.
  • Communication systems having wireless communication links can also have similar structures.
  • a terrestrial television or radio system can include a single antenna and distribute the signals received at the single antenna to multiple output devices using a signal distribution system 100 that can amplify, split, distribute, and/or combine the received signals.
  • the signal distribution system is not limited to a residence, but can span many residences, businesses, or locations not associated with dwellings or buildings.
  • the signal distribution system is characterized by its features and is not limited to any particular application.
  • FIG. 16 shows only the signal splitter 1670 interposed between the distribution switch 1630 and set top boxes 1654 and 1656 , elements other than the transmission lines 1642 , 1644 , and signal splitter 1670 can be interposed between the distribution switch 1630 and the set top boxes 1652 , 1654 , and 1656 .
  • the additional distribution devices can include active or passive power dividers, active or passive power combiners, amplifiers, attenuators, filters, switches, crosspoint switches, multiplexers, de-multiplexers, frequency translation devices, encoders, decoders, and the like or any other means for distributing a signal. Each of these additional signal distribution devices can contribute to the noise experienced by the distributed signal.
  • a two-way passive power divider allows a signal at one input to be split equally into two output signals, each having half the original signal power, while maintaining an impedance match at all ports.
  • An ideal two-way passive divider reduces the SNR by 3 dB.
  • the degradation is often higher.
  • Active signal distribution devices can contribute to signal degradation, for example by generating distortion products that degrade SNR.
  • the distortion contributed by an active device typically increases as the input signal power to the device increases.
  • the location of an active device within the signal distribution system 1600 can affect the impact that the device has on SNR.
  • An active device located at an input to the signal distribution system can experience a larger signal power, and thus degrade the SNR more than an identical device located at a the end of a transmission line, e.g. 1642 , where the signal power can be significantly attenuated.
  • a large input signal can be defined as a signal that generates a predetermined level of distortion in an active device.
  • a signal can be large when measured in relation to the input signal level required to generate a 1 dB amplifier output compression.
  • a signal can be large when measured in relation to an input signal level required to generate a particular third order product. That is, a signal can be defined to be large if a two-tone intermodulation test produces a third order intermodulation distortion product that is a predetermined level below the output signal, for example 40 dB.
  • the definition of a large signal is relative to the signal distribution system in which a device is used and the previous definitions are not exhaustive.
  • the uncorrelated noise level may dominate the determination of SNR. Because an attenuator typically degrades signal power and may not degrade the uncorrelated noise power by an equivalent amount, the SNR following the attenuator can degrade.
  • the placement of a passive device can also affect the amount of SNR degradation contributed by the device. Attenuators placed where the signal is large may not affect the SNR while identical attenuators placed where the signal is small may significantly degrade the SNR.
  • the Automatic Gain Control (AGC) amplifier that is detailed below can help the system maintain the optimal operating range and thus help to maintain an optimum SNR in the system.
  • the AGC amplifier can diminish the effects that subsequent distribution devices have on the SNR at the set top boxes 1652 , 1654 , and 1656 . Additionally, the AGC amplifier can minimize adverse effects of adding or removing distribution paths in the signal distribution system 1600 .
  • the AGC amplifier can, for example, be integrated into the distribution switch 1630 or signal splitter 1670 .
  • FIGS. 17A through 17D are functional block diagrams of AGC amplifiers that can be, for example, integrated into the distribution switch 1630 and/or signal splitter 1670 of FIG. 16.
  • the AGC amplifier can also be implemented in an intermediate signal processing device, such as the signal splitter 1670 or some other signal distribution device, alternatively referred to as a distribution device or signal processing device.
  • the AGC amplifiers are not added as stand alone devices, but are implemented in conjunction with other distribution devices.
  • intermediate signal distribution devices may not include AGC amplifiers. Such intermediate signal processing devices lacking an AGC amplifier may be configured for use in particular locations within the signal distribution system. In other embodiments, the intermediate signal distribution devices can, for example, include an AGC amplifier as the initial signal processing element.
  • Implementing the AGC amplifier in the distribution device 1630 immediately following the low noise block 1626 can compensate for gain variations in the low noise block 1626 .
  • embodiments implementing the distribution device 1630 and low noise block 1626 locally or in a single housing may advantageously eliminate a production adjustment of the low noise block 1626 gain.
  • the AGC function implemented in the distribution block 1630 can provide a lowered production cost by eliminating a production tuning step.
  • Each of the AGC amplifier embodiments shown in FIGS. 17A through 17D can be implemented with a signal distribution device as an integrated circuit, as discrete devices, or as a combination of integrated circuits and discrete devices.
  • An integrated circuit can, for example, incorporate multiple independent AGC amplifiers in parallel, with each AGC amplifier controlling the power of a signal received from a satellite downlink.
  • the integrated circuit can be manufactured on a variety of substrate materials such as silicon, germanium, gallium arsenide, indium phosphide, sapphire, diamond, and the like, or any other suitable substrate material. Additionally, the AGC amplifier embodiments can be manufactured using a variety of manufacturing techniques including bipolar, FET, BiCMOS, CMOS, SiGe, and the like.
  • FIG. 17A is a functional block diagram of a first AGC amplifier embodiment.
  • the AGC amplifier includes a variable gain amplifier (VGA) 1710 and a detector 1720 connected to the output of the VGA 1710 .
  • An output of the detector 1720 is connected to a gain control input of the VGA 1710 to control the gain of the amplifier.
  • VGA variable gain amplifier
  • the AGC amplifier implements an output referred AGC function to attempt to maintain the output power of the power amplifier at a predetermined optimal level, also referred to as the AGC set point.
  • the AGC function is a process that attempts to maintain a signal power at the AGC setpoint.
  • the AGC function increases the gain of the amplifier 1710 when the output signal is below the AGC set point.
  • the AGC function can continue to increase the gain of the VGA 210 as required, up to a maximum gain value.
  • the VGA 210 continues to provide the maximum gain value as long as the output signal power remains below the AGC set point.
  • the AGC function decreases the gain of the VGA 1710 when the output signal power is above the AGC set point.
  • the AGC function can continue to decrease the gain of the VGA 1710 as required, down to a minimum value.
  • the AGC function continues to provide the minimum gain value as long as the output signal power remains greater than the AGC set point.
  • the input to the signal distribution system 1600 typically falls within a predetermined range.
  • the input signal from the satellite 1610 may vary over a predetermined range. If the AGC amplifier in the distribution switch 1630 or signal splitter 1670 has an AGC range that is greater than the input signal range, the AGC function may never reach its limits.
  • an input signal having an input signal power, Pin is provided to the input 1715 of the VGA 1710 .
  • the control signal provided to the VGA 1710 can initially be set to control the VGA 1710 to provide the maximum available gain, Gmax.
  • the VGA 1710 then provides an output signal having an output power, Pout, substantially equal to Pin+Gmax, for example, measured in terms of decibels relative to a milliwatt (dBm).
  • the output from the VGA 1710 is connected to an input of a power detector 1720 .
  • the power detector 1720 measures the output signal power and generates a control signal that can correlate with the output signal power.
  • the power detector 1720 can be configured to provide an output voltage that correlates with a given power level.
  • the power detector 1720 can be configured to provide an output current that correlates with a given power level.
  • the power detector 1720 can be configured to measure the power of the composite amplifier output signal, including desired signals, noise, and distortion. Such a power detector 1720 can be a broadband detector and can detect a power level over a broad frequency band. Alternatively, the power detector 1720 can measure the power of only a portion of the output power from the VGA 1710 . For example, the power detector 1720 can measure the power in a predetermined bandwidth, where the predetermined bandwidth represents only a portion of the bandwidth of the signal output from the VGA 1710 . The predetermined bandwidth can, for example, be entirely within a desired signal bandwidth of the output from the VGA 1710 . Alternatively, the predetermined bandwidth can partially overlap or be exclusive of a desired signal bandwidth of the VGA 1710 output.
  • the output of the power detector 1720 is connected to a control input of the VGA 1710 .
  • the AGC amplifier can be configured to provide an output referred AGC function.
  • the power detector 1720 can detect an output power of the VGA 1710 .
  • the power detector 1710 can also include a comparator having an AGC setpoint coupled to one comparator input. The detected output power can be provided to the second input of the comparator and compared to a AGC setpoint.
  • the output of the comparator can be filtered, for example using an integrator.
  • the output of the integrator can be the detector output control signal that controls the gain of the amplifier.
  • a high power signal one that is greater than the AGC set point, at the input to the power detector 1720 produces a control voltage.
  • the control voltage value corresponds with an amplifier gain value that is smaller than the original gain value.
  • the high power detector 1720 output reduces the gain of the VGA 1710 such that the power detected at the output of the VGA 1710 is substantially equal to the AGC set point.
  • the VGA 1710 is shown as an amplifier, the AGC function can be implemented with gain only, a combination of gain and attenuation, or attenuation only. Additionally, the VGA 1710 can be implemented with multiple stages and multiple devices. For example, the VGA 1710 can be configured as multiple cascaded variable gain amplifiers, or as amplifiers cascaded with variable attenuators, or as multiple variable gain amplifiers in parallel, and the like.
  • the power detector 1720 can be a diode detector, a crystal detector, and the like.
  • the power detector 1720 can be configured to sample mean power, peak power, RMS voltage, mean voltage, peak voltage, mean current, RMS current, peak current, or some other value correlated to signal level.
  • the power detector can be a single device or can be constructed of multiple devices.
  • the power detector 1720 can include, for example, a detector, a comparator, and integrator, or some other signal conditioning block.
  • the power detector 1720 can be configured detect the signal power at other locations, such as at the input of the VGA 1710 .
  • the power detector 1720 can be configured to detect the signal power at some other location that is remote from the VGA 1710 , such as at the input to a set top box of FIG. 16.
  • the actual AGC function can be implemented using a variety of techniques, including feedback and feed-forward. Regardless of whether the AGC function is configured as output referred using feedback, or output referred using feed-forward techniques, the AGC function can operate to provide a substantially stable output level over an predetermined AGC range.
  • FIG. 17B is a functional block diagram of an embodiment of an AGC amplifier.
  • the AGC amplifier includes a constant gain amplifier 1732 at the input to the AGC amplifier.
  • the output of the constant gain amplifier 1732 is connected to the input of a VGA 1734 .
  • the output of the VGA 1734 is connected to a power detector 1740 .
  • the output signal from the power detector 1740 is connected to the control input of the VGA 1734 to control the gain of the VGA 1734 .
  • the AGC amplifier embodiment in FIG. 17B is similar to the embodiment of FIG. 17A except that a constant gain amplifier 1732 is implemented before the VGA 1734 .
  • the AGC amplifier of FIG. 17B operates effectively the same as the AGC amplifier of FIG. 17A.
  • the gain of the constant gain amplifier 1732 can set a lower limit on the gain of the AGC amplifier.
  • the gain of the constant gain amplifier 1732 can be negated by attenuation in the VGA 1734 if the VGA is configured to provide attenuation.
  • the constant gain amplifier 1732 can be included in an AGC amplifier, for example, in order to provide a front end amplifier in the AGC amplifier having a low noise figure.
  • FIG. 17C is a functional block diagram of another AGC amplifier embodiment.
  • the AGC amplifier includes a VGA 1752 at the input of the AGC amplifier.
  • the output of the VGA 1752 is connected to a constant gain amplifier 1754 .
  • the output of the constant gain amplifier 1754 is the output of the AGC amplifier.
  • the output of the VGA 1752 is also connected to the input of the power detector 1760 .
  • the detected output is provided to the control input of the VGA 1752 .
  • the power detector 1760 detects the power of an intermediate stage, rather than the input or output of the AGC amplifier.
  • the embodiment of FIG. 17A can be modified to correspond to the embodiment of FIG. 17C by cascading the AGC amplifier with a constant gain amplifier.
  • a constant gain amplifier 1754 is implemented after the VGA 1752 , the composite AGC amplifier can be interpreted as being output referred.
  • FIG. 17D is another embodiment of an AGC amplifier.
  • the AGC amplifier is an embodiment of a VGA coupled with a signal distribution device.
  • the AGC amplifier includes a VGA 1770 at the input of the AGC amplifier.
  • the output of the VGA 1770 is connected to the input of a mixer 1780 .
  • a LO 1784 drives an LO port of the mixer 1780 .
  • the output of the mixer 1780 is the output of the AGC amplifier.
  • the output of the mixer 1780 is also connected to the input of the power detector 1790 .
  • the detected output is provided to the control input of the VGA 1770 .
  • the AGC function is combined with band translation.
  • the AGC amplifier power controls the output to track the AGC set point and can also frequency convert the signal from an input frequency band to an output frequency band.
  • a VGA such as 1770 can be combined with a variety of signal distribution devices.
  • the signal splitter 1670 of FIG. 16 can represent another embodiment of a VGA coupled with a signal distribution device.
  • the VGA 1770 operates in a manner as described above in relation to the other AGC amplifier embodiments.
  • the output of the VGA 1770 is connected to an input port of the mixer 1780 .
  • the mixer 1780 operates to frequency convert the signal from a first frequency band to a second frequency band.
  • An LO 1784 which can be a fixed frequency LO or a variable frequency LO, drives the LO port of the mixer 1780 .
  • the mixer 1780 provides an output signal that includes a frequency component that is at the sum of the input signal frequencies and the LO frequency and a frequency component that is at the difference of the input signal frequencies and the LO frequency.
  • the power detector 1790 can be configured to detect signals within a predetermined frequency band. Thus, the power detector 1790 can detect the signals in the desired frequency band while ignoring signals outside the frequency band of interest.
  • the AGC amplifier can thus be configured to provide a controlled signal amplitude combined with a frequency conversion.
  • FIGS. 18A and 18B show embodiments of cascaded amplifier configurations.
  • the configuration in FIG. 18A includes fixed gain amplifiers while the configuration of FIG. 18B includes the AGC amplifiers.
  • Such cascaded amplifier configurations can be included in the signal distribution switch of FIG. 16, for example, to provide three independent copies of a single input signal destined for three different geographic locations within the signal distribution system.
  • FIG. 18A is an embodiment of a fixed gain signal distribution section 1800 , such as a distribution section that can be implemented in the distribution switch of FIG. 16.
  • the devices in the distribution section 1800 can be distributed at front end, intermediate location, or near a termination of a signal distribution system.
  • the fixed gain distribution section 1800 includes three gain devices 1810 , 1820 , and 1830 connected in series.
  • Each of the gain devices, for example 1810 can be configured as an active power divider having a fixed gain of 0 dB, a noise figure (NF) of 3 dB, and an input third order intercept point (IIP3) of +30 dBm.
  • each of the gain devices can include an amplifier in conjunction with some other type of signal distribution device.
  • a first fixed gain device 1810 includes a fixed gain amplifier 1812 followed by a passive power divider 1814 having a first output 1818 a and a second output 1818 b .
  • the composite gain through the fixed gain amplifier 1812 and passive power divider 1814 to one of the outputs, for example 1818 b can be configured to be 0 dB.
  • the second output 1818 a of the first fixed gain device 1810 is connected to the input of a second fixed gain device 1820 .
  • the second fixed gain device 1820 also contains a fixed gain amplifier 1822 and a passive power divider 1824 having a first output 1828 a and a second output 1828 b .
  • the second output 1828 b of the second fixed gain device 1820 is connected to the input of a third fixed gain device 1830 .
  • the third fixed gain device 1830 is similarly configured with a fixed gain amplifier 1832 followed by a passive power divider 1834 having two outputs 1838 a , 1838 b.
  • FIG. 18B An alternative signal distribution section 1850 including AGC amplifiers is shown in FIG. 18B.
  • the embodiment of the signal distribution section 1850 including the AGC amplifiers, can be implemented in the distribution switch of FIG. 16.
  • Each of the gain devices 1860 , 1870 , and 1880 includes an AGC amplifier followed by a passive power divider.
  • Each of the gain devices, 1860 , 1870 , and 1880 may also include an AGC amplifier in conjunction with one or more other signal distribution devices.
  • Each of the gain devices can have an output referred AGC function with an AGC set point of 0 dBm, an IIP3 of +30 dBm, and a NF of 3 dB at 0 dB of gain.
  • the gain device for example 1860 , can have a gain range of from ⁇ 20 dB to +20 dB.
  • Each of the AGC amplifiers can be, for example, one of the AGC amplifier configurations shown in FIGS. 17A-17C.
  • An input signal is provided to an input of the first gain device 1860 .
  • the input signal is coupled to the input of an AGC amplifier 1862 .
  • the output of the AGC amplifier 1862 is connected to the input of a power detector 1864 .
  • the output of the power detector 1864 is connected to a control input of the AGC amplifier.
  • the output of the AGC amplifier 1862 is also connected to the input of a power divider 1866 that has first and second outputs, 1868 a and 1868 b respectively.
  • the second output 1868 b of the first gain device 1860 is connected to the input of a second gain device 1870 .
  • the output from the first gain device 1860 is coupled to the input of an AGC amplifier 1872 .
  • the output of the AGC amplifier 1872 is connected to the input of a power detector 1874 .
  • the output of the power detector 1874 is connected to a control input of the AGC amplifier.
  • the output of the AGC amplifier 1872 is also connected to the input of a power divider 1876 that has first and second outputs, 1878 a and 1878 b respectively.
  • the second output 1878 b of the second gain device 1870 is connected to the input of a third gain device 1880 .
  • the output from the second gain device 1870 is coupled to the input of an AGC amplifier 1882 in the third gain device 1880 .
  • the output of the AGC amplifier 1882 is connected to the input of a power detector 1884 .
  • the output of the power detector 1884 is connected to a control input of the AGC amplifier.
  • the output of the AGC amplifier 1882 is also connected to the input of a power divider 1886 that has first and second outputs, 1888 a and 1888 b respectively.
  • the performance of the fixed gain distribution section 1800 can be compared against the performance of the variable gain distribution section 1850 for two operating conditions.
  • the input signal In the first operating condition, the input signal is relatively small and uncorrelated noise is a significant factor limiting the SNR.
  • the input signal In the second operating condition, the input signal is relatively large, and distortion products are significant factors limiting the SNR.
  • the input signal is relatively small.
  • the configuration of the fixed gain distribution section 1800 does not change.
  • the variable gain distribution section 1850 automatically configures itself to provide gain, up to a maximum gain level.
  • An active device such as an amplifier, typically has multiple noise sources associated with it.
  • the noise contribution of cascaded amplifiers can be reduced if the front end device has significant gain.
  • the noise contribution of subsequent stages can become insignificant, and thus, the degradation to SNR can be minimized.
  • other noise contributors after the first gain stage, or front end device degrade the SNR less than without the front end gain device.
  • including the front end gain stage reduces the overall system SNR degradation.
  • the performance of the fixed gain distribution section 1800 can be compared to the variable gain distribution section 1850 by examining the noise figures.
  • the noise figure values in the formula are given as ratios, while noise figure specified for the devices are given in dB.
  • the NF for the gain devices for example 1810 or 1870 , needs to be converted from decibels to ratios before application of the formula.
  • Table 1 provides a summary of the cascaded noise figures for the two gain distribution sections, 1800 , 1850 .
  • Psig represents the signal power, in dBm at either the input or output of the gain devices.
  • the gain of the elements is provided in dB.
  • the noise figure, in dB is provided for each gain device and the corresponding cascaded noise figure, in dB, is provided at the output of each gain device.
  • variable gain distribution section 1850 to include gain in an initial amplifier section results in greatly reduced signal degradation due to noise contributed by subsequent stages when compared to the fixed gain distribution section 1800 .
  • the input signal is relatively large.
  • the configuration of the fixed gain distribution section 1800 does not change.
  • the variable gain distribution section 1850 automatically configures itself to provide attenuation, up to a maximum attenuation level.
  • distortion components such as third order intermodulation distortion products, can be the dominant factor in degrading SNR.
  • a cascaded IIP3 for the signal distribution sections, 1800 , 1850 can be calculated and compared to illustrate the advantages of variable gain distribution over fixed gain distribution.
  • the IP3 values in the formula are the linear terms and are not the values in dBm. Similarly, the gain values are provided as ratios and are not in dB.
  • Table 2 provides a summary of the cascaded IIP3 for the two gain distribution sections 1800 , 1850 .
  • Psig represents the signal power, in dBm at either the input or output of the gain devices.
  • the gain of the elements is provided in dB.
  • the IIP3, in dBm is provided for each gain device and the corresponding cascaded IIP3, in dBm, is provided at the output of each gain device.
  • variable gain distribution section 1850 to include attenuation in an initial amplifier section results in greatly reduced signal degradation due to noise contributed by subsequent stages when compared to the fixed gain distribution section 1800 .
  • the overall system degradation of SNR can be reduced with the inclusion of an initial attenuation section.
  • variable gain section can thus improve the quality of the signal compared to a fixed gain configuration.
  • the advantages of the variable gain section over the fixed gain section under the extreme conditions of low input signal power and high input signal power show that the variable gain distribution section has flexibility as to its position within a signal distribution system.
  • the variable gain distribution section need not be placed at the front end or as a final stage in a signal distribution system.
  • One embodiment of the band translation switch 1510 can be used in a signal distribution system designed to provide distribution of satellite television signals in a residence.
  • the AGC amplifiers 1520 a - 1520 d provide variable gain and attenuation based on the power of the input signal.
  • the measurement point for the AGC function is at the output of the AGC amplifiers 1520 a - 1520 d and the gain of the crosspoint switch 1530 and the band translation devices 1540 a - 1540 d are fixed.
  • Each AGC amplifier 1520 a - 1520 d followed by a crosspoint switch 1530 , band translation device 1540 a - 1540 d , filter 1550 a - 1550 d , and signal combiner 1560 a - 1560 b can be configured to provide a total gain that ranges from a minimum of ⁇ 7 dB to a maximum of +7 dB.
  • the corresponding NF of a path through the band translation switch 1510 from the AGC amplifier, for example 1520 a , through to the output of a band translation device, for example 1540 a can vary from, for example, a high of 24 dB to a low of 10 dB.
  • the IIP3 associated with the signal path can range from a minimum of ⁇ 7 dBm to a maximum of +7 dBm.
  • the IIP3 of the signal path can be ⁇ 15, ⁇ 10, ⁇ 7, ⁇ 6, ⁇ 5, ⁇ 4, ⁇ 3, ⁇ 2, ⁇ 1, 0, +1, +2, +3, +4, +5, +6, +7, +10, +15, +20, +25, or +30 dBm.
  • the IIP3 of the AGC amplifier 1520 a is typically higher when the amplifier is configured to provide attenuation, which contributes to the composite IIP3 of the signal path.
  • the IIP3 of the AGC amplifier 1520 a can vary in proportion to the gain of the amplifier.
  • the AGC amplifier 1520 a also provides the signal to a cascade output, the characteristics of the AGC function at the cascade output are substantially the same as the characteristics of the AGC amplifier 1520 a . Also because the AGC function is provided before the cascade output, the benefits of the AGC function are experienced in the main signal path as well as the signal path through the cascade output.
  • This band translation switch 1510 configuration can be used in a signal distribution system where the input to the band translation switch 1510 can be expected to vary over the range of ⁇ 50 dBm through ⁇ 10 dBm.
  • the AGC amplifiers 1520 a - 1520 d can be configured to have an output referred AGC setpoint of ⁇ 17 dBm, where the output refers to the output signal of the switch 1500 .
  • the band translation switch 1510 need not actually measure the power at the output of the switch 1500 . Because the devices following the band translation switch 1510 have fixed gains, the AGC output can be interpreted as being output referred to any point past an AGC amplifier where the gain or attenuation is fixed.
  • the AGC amplifier for example 1520 a , provides a gain of 7 dB when the input signal is ⁇ 24 dBm or below. Additionally, the AGC amplifier 1520 a provides ⁇ 7 dB of gain, or 7 dB of attenuation, when the input signal is ⁇ 10 dBm or greater. Thus, within the input power range of ⁇ 24 dBm through ⁇ 10 dBm the AGC amplifier 1520 a provides a constant output power of ⁇ 17 dBm.
  • FIG. 19 is a functional block diagram of multiple band translation switches 1910 , 1920 , 1930 , 1940 , and 1950 , connected in a signal distribution system.
  • the band translation switches 1910 , 1920 , 1930 , 1940 , and 1950 can be configured with LNBs to provide the distribution switch of FIG. 16.
  • one or more of the band translation switches 1910 , 1920 , 1930 , 1940 , and 1950 can be positioned at other locations within the signal distribution system.
  • one or more of the band translation devices can be positioned near the signal input, at an intermediate position within the signal distribution system, or near a termination or destination device of the signal distribution system.
  • a first band translation switch 1910 includes an LNA input that can be connected to an LNB that block converts a satellite downlink transmission.
  • the output of the first band translation switch 1910 is connected to an input of a second band translation switch 1920 that, in turn, has an output connected to a third band translation switch 1930 .
  • a cascade output of the first band translation switch 1910 is connected to the input of a fourth band translation switch 1940 .
  • the output of the fourth band translation switch 1940 is connected to the input of a fifth band translation switch 1950 .
  • Each of the band translation switches, 1910 , 1920 , 1930 , 1940 , and 1950 can be the band translation switch of FIG. 15 and can include one of the AGC amplifiers of FIGS. 17A-17C.
  • Each of the band translation switches, 1910 , 1920 , 1930 , 1940 , and 1950 can be configured similarly to the first band translation switch 1910 .
  • an input VGA 1912 receives the input signal from the LNB's.
  • the VGA 1912 typically has a low noise figure, such that the noise figure of the band translation switch 1910 from the input to a band translation output is below 3 dB, 4 dB, 5 dB, 6 dB, 8 dB, 10 dB, 12 dB, 14 dB, 15 dB, 20 dB, 25 dB, 30 dB, 35 dB or 40 dB.
  • the noise figure of the band translation switch 1910 from an input to the cascade output is typically closer to the value of noise figure of the VGA 1912 and can be, for example less than 3 dB, 4 dB, 5 dB, 6 dB, 8 dB, 9 dB, 10 dB, 12 dB, 14 dB, 15 dB, 20 dB, 24 dB, 25 dB, 30 dB, 35 dB or 40 dB.
  • the VGA 1912 contributes to the IIP3 of the band translation switch 510 .
  • the band translation switch 1910 typically has an IIP3, measured from an input to an output of a band translation device, of greater than ⁇ 40, ⁇ 30, ⁇ 20, ⁇ 10, ⁇ 8, ⁇ 7, ⁇ 6, ⁇ 5, ⁇ 4, ⁇ 3, ⁇ 2, ⁇ 1, 0, +1, +2, +3, +4, +5, +6, +7, or +8, +15, +20, +22, +25, +26, +27, +28, +29, or +30 dBm.
  • the band translation switch 1910 typically has an IIP3, measured from an input to the cascade output of greater than ⁇ 10, ⁇ 5, +1, +2, +3, +4, +5, +6, +7, +8, +9, +10, +15, +20, +25, or +30 dBm.
  • the output of the VGA 1912 is connected to a detector 1914 and N ⁇ M crosspoint switch 1916 .
  • the detector 1914 detects the power output by the VGA 1912 and provides a detected output that is connected to the control input of the VGA 1912 . Additionally, the output of the VGA 1912 drives the cascade output of the first band translation switch 1910 .
  • the output of the N ⁇ M crosspoint switch 1916 is connected to a band translation device 1918 .
  • VGA 1912 and detector 1914 are shown in the first band translation switch 1910 , more than one VGA 1912 and cascade output can be included in a band translation switch, as shown in FIG. 19.
  • the benefits of having an AGC function in line with a signal distribution path can be provided to two signal paths originating from a single VGA, for example 1912 , in a single band translation switch, 1910 .
  • Each of the subsequent band translation switches 1920 , 1930 , 1940 and 1950 can also be connected to signal paths at their cascade outputs and can likewise control the signal level and minimize the subsequent noise contributions by utilizing an input AGC stage.
  • the fourth band translation switch 1940 connected to a cascade output of the first band translation switch 1910 does not contribute noise to the originating signal path and further controls noise contributions from subsequent stages.
  • FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a signal distribution method 2000 for use in a signal communication system, such as the satellite communication system shown in FIG. 16.
  • the method 2000 begins at block 2002 where the distribution signals are received.
  • the signals can be received from a satellite, as in FIG. 16, or can be received from an antenna configured to receive terrestrial signals, a cable, or an optical link. Additionally, the signals can be received from a combination of sources.
  • the signals are amplified, typically by a low noise amplifier, as shown in block 2010 . Because the gain can be varied from a positive gain value to a negative value, the amplifier may not be a low noise amplifier under all operating conditions and can be an attenuator under some operating conditions. In this context, a negative gain value refers to attenuation.
  • the output power is measured, block 2012 . Because output power is measured after the gain stage, the subsequent AGC function based on the measured output power can be referred to as output referred AGC. The measured output power is then used as a factor for varying the gain, block 2014 . As previously discussed, the gain can typically be varied over a range spanning positive gain to attenuation.
  • a cascade output is also provided, block 2020 , and can be provided after the AGC function.
  • the gain controlled signal can be provided as a cascade output, as is shown in FIGS. 15 and 19.
  • the signal is routed to a destination path, block 2030 , such as by the N ⁇ M crosspoint switch shown in FIG. 15.
  • the signal that is routed to the destination by the N ⁇ M crosspoint switch is typically independent of the signal provided to the cascade output.
  • the output of the AGC section is provided as a cascade output and is also provided to the input of the N ⁇ M crosspoint switch to be routed to one of M possible distribution paths.
  • a band translation block can include a mixer to selectively translate the signal from a first frequency block to a second frequency block. Additionally, the band translation block can be configured to have a pass through path where the signal is not frequency translated.
  • the signal output from the band translation block can be filtered, block 2050 , to remove noise and unwanted frequency components that are outside of a band of interest.
  • Two or more of the filtered signals can be combined to produce a composite signal, block 2060 .
  • the two or more filtered signals can originate from one or more independent signal distribution paths.
  • Each of the filtered signals can be in a distinct frequency band.
  • one or more of the filtered signals can be in a frequency band that overlaps the frequency band of another of the filtered signals.
  • FIG. 21 is a functional block diagram of a band extraction system 2100 for a dual band-stacked frequency plan.
  • the band extraction system 2100 is configured to position input signals from either an upper or lower band block into the upper band block.
  • the band extraction system 2100 is also configured to bandpass the upper band block and reject signals from the lower band block.
  • the band extraction system 2100 implements a band translation device 2118 and a bandpass filter 2150 .
  • the band translation device 618 includes a pass through signal path 2122 and a frequency translation signal path.
  • the frequency translation signal path includes a mixer 2120 and a LO 2130 .
  • one embodiment of a dual band-stacked frequency plan has a lower band block at 950-1450 MHz and an upper band block at 1650-2150 MHz.
  • the filter 2150 is configured as a bandpass filter that passes 1650-2150 MHz and rejects signals in at least the 950-1450 MHz band.
  • the input signal is a band stacked signal having an input lower band signal 2110 and an input upper band signal 2112 .
  • Band extraction for the pass through configuration is trivial.
  • the pass through signal path 2122 of the band translation device 2118 is selected.
  • the input signal is pass through the band translation device 2118 without frequency translation.
  • the upper band block is then extracted using the filter 2150 to produce an output signal.
  • the frequency translation signal path is used when the input lower band signal 2110 is to be frequency translated to the upper band block.
  • the input signals are directed to an input of the mixer 2120 for frequency translation.
  • a LO 2130 is connected to a LO port of the mixer 2130 .
  • a LO 2130 tuned to a frequency of 2 ⁇ the band block center mean will result in a frequency translation of signals in the upper band block to the lower band block and frequency translation of signals in the lower band block to the upper band block.
  • the LO frequency for the frequency plan shown in FIG. 21 is 3.1 GHz. Thus, this LO frequency can be used when extracting either the upper band block or the lower band block. Only the bandpass filter needs to be changed to extract the desired band block.
  • the mixer 2130 provides output signals that are at the sum of the input signal frequency and the LO frequency and output signals that are at the difference of the input signal frequency and the LO frequency.
  • An input lower band signal is frequency translated by the mixer 2130 to an upper difference band 2142 and a lower sum band 2146 .
  • An input upper band signal 2112 is frequency translated by the mixer 2130 to a lower difference band 2140 and an upper sum band 2148 .
  • the sum and difference signals, 2140 , 2142 , 2146 and 2148 are provided to the filter 2150 which passes only the desired output upper band signal 2160 and rejects at least the other mixer products as well as the LO frequency.
  • the input lower band signal in the 950-1450 MHZ band, is frequency translated to an output upper band signal in the 1650-2150 MHz band.
  • the sum and difference bands are symmetric about the LO frequency 2144 .
  • this LO frequency swaps the positions of the input upper and lower signal.
  • the difference bands are frequency inverted.
  • a signal that is in the upper sideband of the input lower band 2110 is translated to the lower sideband of the upper difference signal.
  • Frequency inversion does not pose any problems for double sideband signals.
  • spectral inversion does not pose problems for digitally modulated signals that are processed by a demodulator with built in spectral inversion.
  • the frequency inverted signals can be further processed if the system designer requires, or desires, a particular frequency relationship.
  • the two band-stacked configuration allows for a single LO to simultaneously rearrange the band stack.
  • each frequency component in the final composite output signal may be translated through a different band translation device.
  • a first band translation device may frequency translate a first signal to a first output signal band.
  • a second band translation device can frequency translate a second signal to a second output frequency band, and so on up to M frequency bands.
  • Multiple output frequency bands can then be combined in one or more combiners.
  • Each output frequency band can be one or more channels corresponding to signals from one or more transponders.
  • a single frequency translation device can be a mixer, sampled switch, switching mixer such as diode ring, Gilbert cell, FET ring mixers, or nonlinear mixers such as diodes, linear multipliers such as translinear bipolar devices, variable resistors, or the like.
  • the frequency translation device can perform multiple frequency translations.
  • the input band blocks can be upconverted to a high Intermediate Frequency (IF) that is at a frequency greater than the highest frequency in the input band blocks.
  • IF signal can then be filtered to extract the band block of interest, where the desired band block can correspond to one or more channels from one or more transponders.
  • IF Intermediate Frequency
  • the desired band block can then be downconverted to the desired output band block.
  • the high IF can be a common IF or can be different for different band translation devices. Each high IF signal can be downconverted to a portion of an output frequency band. Multiple downconverted signals can be combined into a composite output signal.
  • the input band blocks can be downconverted to a low IF that is lower than the lowest frequency component of the input band blocks.
  • the low IF signal can then be filtered to select the desired band block.
  • the filtered band block is then upconverted to the desired output band block.
  • independent input signals can each be downconverted to a common IF where one or more channels are passed in a filter.
  • the low IF can be a common IF or can be different for different band translation devices.
  • Each of the filtered signals at the IF can then be upconverted to a desired frequency band. Multiple upconverted signals can then be combined to form a composite signal.
  • the composite signal can then be output to a set top box or boxes.
  • the desired input band block can be downconverted to a baseband signal.
  • the baseband signal can then be filtered, for example with a lowpass filter, before being upconverted to the desired output band block.
  • the input signals are quadrature modulated or if the two sidebands have different information, the input signal can be downconverted into two baseband channels in quadrature.
  • a quadrature downconverter can frequency translate the signals to baseband In-phase (I) and Quadrature (Q) channels.
  • the baseband I and Q channels can then be filtered, such as by a LPF, and the filtered signals I and Q upconverted to the desired band block.
  • multiple signals can be frequency translated to baseband signals in a corresponding number of band translation devices.
  • Each of the baseband signals can be upconverted to a portion of an output frequency band.
  • the multiple upconverted signals can be combined to form a composite signal.
  • more than two frequency translations can be used with various combinations of simple mixers, image reject mixers, IQ down converters, Single Side-Band upconverters, and filters to provide the frequency translation and filtering functions.
  • FIG. 22 is a functional block diagram of an embodiment a portion of a band translation switch configured to switch and frequency translate signals from two sources to a single output. The functional elements are shown along with a depiction of the signal spectrum output from the element.
  • a crosspoint switch 2210 can be configured to have N inputs and M outputs, where N and M can be the same or different integers.
  • FIG. 7 shows two of the outputs from the crosspoint switch 2210 .
  • a first crosspoint switch 2210 output provides a first composite signal.
  • the first composite signal includes a first lower input band signal 2212 a and a first upper input band signal 2212 b .
  • a second crosspoint switch 2210 output provides a second composite input signal.
  • the second composite signal includes a second lower input band signal 2214 and a second upper input band 2214 b signal.
  • the first composite signal is band translated in a band translation device 2220 , such as a mixer having an LO tuned to 2 ⁇ (block center mean).
  • the output of the band translation device 2220 includes signals at a lower input band 2232 a , an upper band 2232 b , a lower sum band 2234 a , and an upper sum band 2234 b .
  • the output of the band translation device 2220 is connected to a first filter 2240 that is configured to pass the upper band and substantially reject all other signals.
  • the output of the first filter 2240 includes the upper band 2252 with the remaining signal components substantially rejected.
  • the output of the first filter 2252 is connected to a first input of a signal combiner 2260 .
  • the second output of the crosspoint switch 2210 is connected to a band translation device 2222 configured for pass through.
  • the output of the band translation device 2222 appears substantially the same as the output from the crosspoint switch 2210 .
  • the signal includes a lower band 2236 a and an upper band 2236 b .
  • the output of the band translation device 2222 is connected to a second filter 2242 .
  • the second filter 2242 is configured to pass the lower band and substantially reject all other signals.
  • the output of the second filter 2242 is connected to a second input of the signal combiner 2260 .
  • the signal combiner 2260 is configured to combine the signals provided to its first and second inputs.
  • the output of the signal combiner is thus a band-stacked signal having a lower band signal 2272 and an upper band signal 2274 .
  • the lower band signal 2272 is provided by the second crosspoint switch output and the upper band signal 2274 is provided by the first crosspoint switch output.
  • FIG. 23 shows a flowchart of an embodiment of a method 2300 of frequency translating input frequency bands using an integrated band translation switch.
  • An initial function performed is receiving satellite transponder signals 2310 .
  • the satellite transponder signals can be received from one or more satellite transponder groups located on one or more satellites.
  • the satellite transponder signals are typically received in an antenna.
  • satellite transponder signals can be received from signal distribution devices, such as a cable television headend, that use an antenna to directly receive the satellite transponder signals.
  • the received signals are block converted to first predetermined bands 2320 .
  • the first predetermined bands can also be referred to as predetermined input bands.
  • One or more block converters can be used to convert the transponder signals to the first predetermined bands.
  • the block converters can be low noise block converters configured to block convert signals from multiple transponder groups and band-stack the converted transponder group signals into one or more of the first predetermined bands.
  • Each of the band-stacked signals can then be provided to an input to a routing device or assembly.
  • the block converted signals are then routed to destinations 2330 .
  • the routing can be a selective routing that is controlled using one or more control lines communicating one or more control signals. Additionally, the routing can be performed by a switch, such as a crosspoint switch, that is configured to route any of the LNB signals to one or more outputs.
  • a switch such as a crosspoint switch
  • the crosspoint switch can be configured to have N inputs corresponding to the N LNB's.
  • the crosspoint switch can also be configured to have M outputs, where the number of outputs M can be the same, or different, from the number of inputs N.
  • the crosspoint switch can be configured to route a signal from any one of the crosspoint switch inputs to any one or more of the crosspoint switch outputs.
  • the signals are band translated from the first predetermined frequency band to a second predetermined frequency band.
  • Each of the band-stacked signals are translated independently of the others.
  • the first predetermined band can be the same, or different, from the second predetermined band.
  • the band translated signals in the second predetermined frequency bands are then filtered 2350 .
  • filtering can occur prior to band translation.
  • the filter is configured to pass the desired signal in the desired band and reject substantially the remaining frequency components.
  • the filtered signals are then combined 2360 .
  • One or more of the filtered signals can be combined to produce a band-stacked output signal.
  • a combiner can be configured to combine any number of filtered signals. Additionally, more than one combiner can be used to provide more than one band-stacked output signal.
  • a diplexer can be used to filter and combine signals.
  • One or more of the method steps can be performed by a single integrated circuit.
  • the block conversion can be performed by an integrated circuit.
  • routing the signals to destinations can be performed by an integrated circuit that can be the same, or different from the integrated circuit that performs the block conversion.
  • band translating the signals is performed on an integrated circuit that can be the same, or different from, the integrated circuit used for routing the signals or block converting the signals.
  • filtering and combining the signals can be performed on one or more integrated circuits that are the same as, or different from, any of the other integrated circuits.
  • One or more of the integrated circuits can include a semiconductor substrate such as a silicon substrate.
  • the integrated circuit substrate can include germanium, gallium arsenide, indium phosphide, sapphire, diamond, and the like, or any other suitable substrate material.
  • the integrated circuit can be manufactured using any suitable technology, such as Silicon Germanium (SiGe), bipolar, FET, and the like.
  • Input band-stacked signals from one or more satellite transponder groups can be reconfigured to provide band-stacked output signals having a signal band from any transponder group positioned in any of the predetermined output bands.
  • a LNB can receive one or more transponder group signals to create an band-stacked input signal.
  • a low noise amplifier in an integrated circuit can amplify the LNB output and also provide a cascade output signal. The output from the low noise amplifier can be connected to a crosspoint switch on the same integrated circuit.
  • the crosspoint switch can be configured to route signals from any one of its signal inputs to any one of its signal outputs. Each of the crosspoint signal outputs is connected to a band translation device.
  • the band translation device can also be configured on the same integrated circuit. Each of the band translation devices is configured to frequency translate or pass through an input signal.
  • the band translation device can frequency translate a predetermined input band to a predetermined output band.
  • the output from one or more band translation devices can be combined to produce a band-stacked output signal.
  • connections, couplings, and connections have been described with respect to various devices or elements.
  • the connections and couplings can be direct or indirect.
  • a connection between a first and second device can be a direct connection or can be an indirect connection.
  • An indirect connection can include interposed elements that can process the signals from the first device to the second device.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • a general-purpose processor can be a microprocessor, but in the alternative, the processor can be any processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine.
  • a processor can also be implemented as a combination of computing devices, for example, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, a plurality of microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core, or any other such configuration.
  • a software module can reside in RAM memory, flash memory, ROM memory, EPROM memory, EEPROM memory, registers, hard disk, a removable disk, a CD-ROM, or any other form of storage medium.
  • An exemplary storage medium can be coupled to the processor such the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can be integral to the processor.
  • the processor and the storage medium can reside in an ASIC.

Abstract

Multiple input signal sources in predetermined frequency bands are each applied to block frequency converters. Each block frequency converter frequency converts an input signal to one of a plurality of predetermined frequency bands. A crosspoint switch is configured to route the frequency converted input signals at one of the plurality of predetermined frequency bands to any one of a plurality of available band translation devices. Each of the band translation devices is configured to frequency convert the signal from a first predetermined frequency band to a second predetermined frequency band. Output signals from one or more band translation devices can be combined into a composite signal.

Description

    RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application claims priority to, and hereby incorporates by reference in their entirety, the following patent applications: [0001]
  • U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/433,066, filed on Dec. 11, 2002, entitled INTEGRATED CROSSPOINT SWITCH WITH BAND TRANSLATION; [0002]
  • U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/433,061, filed on Dec. 11, 2002, entitled IN-LINE CASCADABLE DEVICE IN SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM WITH AGC FUNCTION; [0003]
  • U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/43,067, filed on Dec. 11, 2002, entitled N×M CROSSPOINT SWITCH WITH BAND TRANSLATION; [0004]
  • U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/433,063, filed on Dec. 11, 2002, entitled MIXER WITH PASS-THROUGH MODE WITH CONSTANT EVEN ORDER GENERATION. [0005]
  • This application is related to, and hereby incorporates by reference in their entirety, the following patent applications: [0006]
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/xxx,xxx, filed concurrently herewith, entitled IN-LINE CASCADABLE DEVICE IN SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM WITH AGC FUNCTION; [0007]
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/xxx,xxx, filed concurrently herewith, entitled N×M CROSSPOINT SWITCH WITH BAND TRANSLATION; [0008]
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/xxx,xxx, filed concurrently herewith, entitled MIXER CIRCUIT WITH BYPASS AND MIXING MODES HAVING CONSTANT EVEN ORDER GENERATION AND METHOD OF OPERATION.[0009]
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • 1. Field of the Invention [0010]
  • The invention relates to electronic signal processing. More particularly, the invention relates to Radio Frequency (RF) signal distribution and frequency conversion. [0011]
  • 2. Description of the Related Art [0012]
  • Communication systems are designed to provide information from a source to a destination using a communication channel. Electronic communication channels can be implemented in a variety of ways. An electronic communication system can implement a communication channel as point to point channels, broadcast channels, or a combination of the two. The communication channels can be implemented using optical communication links or electronic communication links. Optical communication links include, but are not limited to, free space optical links and fiber optic links. Electronic communication links similarly include, but are not limited to, wireless links and wired links. [0013]
  • The amount of information that can be carried on a particular link is limited by the usable bandwidth in the link. Some communication links can be band limited due to a physical characteristic, while other communication links can be band limited due to artificial factors, which can include system design limitations and regulatory restrictions. Regulatory restrictions are particularly prevalent in wireless communication systems in order to minimize interference that can result if the radio spectrum was unregulated. A signal that occupies the same bandwidth as another uncorrelated signal, whether occurring in a wired system or a wireless system, appears as interference to the uncorrelated signal. Similarly, the uncorrelated signal appears as interference to the first signal. Wireless communication systems commonly operate in regulated bands because of the difficulty in isolating a signal from interfering signals in a wireless environment. [0014]
  • Common communication systems that are band limited by regulations, such as those imposed by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) in the United States, or the International Telecommunications Union (ITU), include broadcast radio and television systems. Regulation and standardization of the frequency bands used in broadcast radio and television enable consumer electronics to standardize their frequency bands of operation. [0015]
  • Numerous techniques are known and available to more efficiently utilize a particular frequency band. The more common techniques employ some form of signal multiplexing. Common multiplexing techniques include Time Division Multiplexing (TDM), Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM), Code Division Multiplexing (CDM), Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM), and the like. [0016]
  • In TDM systems, independent users are allocated time slots that do not overlap. Thus, at any particular time, one user is allowed to occupy the entire allocated bandwidth. Similarly, in FDM systems, users are allocated portions of the entire allocated frequency band and the portion of the frequency band allocated to one user does not overlap those portions allocated to another user. In CDM systems each user is allocated the entire frequency band for the entire time, but each user communicates in the frequency band using an orthogonal code. Because the user codes are orthogonal, each user can recover their respective signal from the other signals occupying the frequency band. However, in a CDM system, each user appears as an interfering signal to every other user in the frequency band. In order to minimize the interference contributed by any one user to all other users in the frequency band, the power transmitted by each user in a CDM system is tightly controlled to the minimum power that is required to achieve a particular signal quality. In an OFDM system, the frequency band is divided into a number of distinct frequency bands. Each user can communicate over the entire band, but the information from each user is divided up into a number of parallel streams that are broadcast as orthogonal waveforms in each of a predetermined number of sub-bands. Of course, this discussion of multiplexing techniques is not exhaustive and some communication systems can implement other multiplexing techniques or a combination of more than one multiplexing technique. [0017]
  • One consequence of regulated frequency bands and communication channels within the regulated frequency bands is compatibility. Communication systems operating in a first communication band can desire to provide information to second communication system operating in second communication band. One manner of interfacing two otherwise compatible signals at different frequency bands is frequency translation. A signal from a first communication system at a first frequency can be translated to a second frequency in order to make the signal available in the second communication system. Communication systems can incorporate a number of frequency translations in providing a signal from a source to its ultimate destination. [0018]
  • Additionally, signals from a first communication system can be frequency translated to be compatible with a second communication system. One example of the use of frequency translation is in cable television systems. Televisions are typically produced to be compatible with a particular television standard. In the United States, most televisions are compatible with the National Television System Committee (NTSC) standard and the frequency allocation for television channels regulated by the FCC. However, cable television providers are, to some extent, able to provide the same content on practically any channel. Additionally, the number of signals to which a cable operator has can be far in excess of the number of channels that a typical television receiver can tune. Thus, at a head end or cable television signal source, a cable operator can receive a desired number of signals and frequency translate each signal to a desired television channel. [0019]
  • The system design implemented by the cable operator determines frequency translation and the majority of the contributors to inter-channel interference such that these issues are typically of no concern to the end user. However, with the increased availability of content from different sources, receivers that are local to the end user are incorporating the ability to interface to multiple sources and combine those multiple sources into a signal that is presented to the end user. [0020]
  • For example, a single household can have access to over-the-air television broadcast channels, cable television channels, satellite television channels, microwave television channels, closed circuit television channels, and television channels from other sources. These multiple channels from multiple signal sources can easily provide more channels to which a typical television may be tuned. Additionally, some of the channels from one or more of the signal sources can appear on the same channel such that direct signal combination can not be feasible. For example, signals from a satellite transponder can be downconverted to a particular block of channels that can coincide with channels provided by the cable television source. The channels from the two signal sources cannot be directly combined without channels from the satellite television source interfering with the coincident channels from the cable television source. Thus, typically, a switch can be provided to allow an end user to choose one signal source and eliminate interfering signals from all other sources. [0021]
  • To further compound the problems associated with distributing signals from multiple sources to an end user, signals from a source such as a satellite television source, do not arrive from a single source but rather from multiple sources. A satellite television receiver is typically capable of simultaneously receiving signals from multiple satellite transponders positioned on one or more satellites. The signals received from the multiple satellite transponders can exceed the channel tuning capability of a typical television tuner. Thus, only a subset of all available satellite television signals can be simultaneously made available to a particular television receiver. [0022]
  • Although a source switch can be a viable solution for a single receiver, the use of a source switch quickly becomes unfeasible when multiple receivers, such as televisions, interface to the same sources via a common distribution mechanism, such as a shared coaxial cable. It is typically unfeasible to provide every signal source to each television location and provide a source switch at the television. However, it is desirable for each television receiver to independently have the ability to control the signal source. Additionally, where signals from a particular source, such as satellite television, can be provided on the same channels, it is desirable to have the ability to frequency translate some of the signals such that they are provided at different channels. [0023]
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • Signal distribution systems, apparatus, and methods are disclosed herein. In broad overview the system allows signals from any one of a first number of input signals to be directed to any one of a number of destinations. Additionally, each of the first number of input signals can comprise signals in at least one frequency band from a number of predetermined input frequency bands. The system also allows signals from each of the number of predetermined input frequency bands to be frequency translated to one of a number of predetermined output frequency bands. The predetermined input frequency bands can coincide with the predetermined output frequency bands. Additionally, an input signal in an input frequency band can be output to an output frequency band that is substantially the same as the input frequency band. Amplifiers within the system allow a signal from one signal source to be provided to any number of independent frequency translation blocks. Some or all of the system can be implemented in a single integrated circuit. [0024]
  • Desired signals can be received from multiple distinct signal sources. The communication link from the signal sources to local receivers can be wired or wireless. Each of the signal sources provides one or more source signals that can be frequency translated to one of a number of predetermined input frequency bands, such as, for example, by a low noise block converter. Alternatively, one or more of the source signals can be provided in one or more of the predetermined input frequency bands. The input frequency bands are typically distinct and define a contiguous composite frequency band. However, the input frequency bands can overlap or define a disjoint composite frequency band. The input and output frequency bands may carry data for one or more channels originating on one or more transponders.[0025]
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • The features, objects, and advantages of the invention will become more apparent from the detailed description set forth below when taken in conjunction with the drawings in which like reference characters identify correspondingly throughout and wherein: [0026]
  • FIG. 1 is a functional block diagram of a satellite communication system configured to provide signals from multiple satellites to multiple user devices. [0027]
  • FIG. 2 is a functional block diagram of cascaded band translation switches. [0028]
  • FIG. 3 is a functional block diagram of a band translation switch having one band translation device configured to provide pass through and one band translation device configured to provide translation. [0029]
  • FIG. 4A illustrates a simplified switch diagram of a doubly balanced mixer as known in the art. [0030]
  • FIG. 4B illustrates the doubly balanced mixer of FIG. 4A as a Gilbert cell mixer circuit. [0031]
  • FIG. 5 illustrates a common oscillator, multiple mixer system in which the mixer circuit could be employed. [0032]
  • FIG. 6A illustrates a simplified switch diagram of a mixer circuit in accordance with one embodiment of the invention. [0033]
  • FIG. 6B illustrates a method of operating the mixer circuit shown in FIG. 6A. [0034]
  • FIG. 6C illustrates the mixer circuit of FIG. 6A as a modified Gilbert cell mixer circuit. [0035]
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a second embodiment of the mixer circuit. [0036]
  • FIGS. 8A and 8B illustrates common oscillator, multiple mixer systems utilizing the mixer circuits of FIGS. 3A and 4 in accordance with embodiments of the invention. [0037]
  • FIGS. 9A-9C are functional block diagrams of cascadable buffer amplifiers with switches. [0038]
  • FIG. 10 is a functional block diagram of an integrated crosspoint switch with band translation. [0039]
  • FIGS. 11A-11D are functional block diagrams of switches. [0040]
  • FIG. 12 is a functional block diagram of an integrated crosspoint switch with band translation. [0041]
  • FIG. 13 is a functional block diagram of an integrated crosspoint switch with band translation. [0042]
  • FIG. 14 is a functional block diagram of an integrated crosspoint switch with band translation. [0043]
  • FIG. 15 is a functional block diagram of an integrated band translation switch interfacing with additional components to provide two signal outputs. [0044]
  • FIG. 16 is a functional block diagram of a signal distribution system configured to receive signals from satellites and distribute them to multiple user devices. [0045]
  • FIGS. 17A-17D are functional block diagrams of AGC amplifiers. [0046]
  • FIGS. 18A-18B are functional block diagrams of cascaded amplifier configurations. [0047]
  • FIG. 19 is a functional block diagram of cascaded integrated band translation switches. [0048]
  • FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a method of distributing signals using cascadable AGC amplifiers. [0049]
  • FIG. 21 is a functional block diagram of a band translation switch configured to frequency convert an input signal having a predetermined bandwidth. [0050]
  • FIG. 22 is a functional block diagram of a band translation switch configured to switch and frequency translate signals from two sources to a single output. [0051]
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a method of frequency translating input frequency bands using an integrated band translation switch.[0052]
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT
  • FIG. 1 is a functional block diagram of one embodiment of a satellite based communication system, such as a [0053] satellite television system 100. However, the invention is not limited to application in a satellite based communication system, nor is the invention limited to use in a television system. The invention is applicable to any communication system where multiple signals in one or more input frequency bands can be distributed as signals in one or more output frequency bands to one or more receivers.
  • The [0054] satellite television system 100 includes one or more satellites 110 a-110 c that are set at various different orbital slots. Although three satellites 110 a-110 c are shown in FIG. 1, any number of satellites can exist in a particular satellite television system 100. The satellites can operate at different carrier frequencies and polarizations. The different carrier frequencies and polarizations that can be used by the satellites 110 a-110 c provide a degree of isolation of one satellite transmission from another. Additionally, the satellites 110 a-110 c can implement a directional antenna to provide further signal selectivity. Thus, a receiver can select the signals from a desired satellite, for example 110 a, by receiving the broadcast signals with a corresponding polarized antenna oriented in the general direction of the desired satellite 110 a and tuning to the desired satellite frequency. Because each satellite 110 a-110 c is configured in a similar manner, a more detailed description is provided for only one of the satellites 110 a.
  • A [0055] satellite 110 a in a satellite television system 100 can include a single transponder (not shown), but typically includes multiple transponders. Each of the transponders typically transmits at a different frequency and has an associated polarization. Two different transponders on the same satellite 110 a can transmit on the same frequency but with different polarities if the selectivity provided by the difference in polarities is sufficient for the system. If each transponder transmits at a different frequency, the different transponders on a single satellite 110 a can all transmit with the same polarity, or can use different polarities.
  • Additionally, some transponders can be configured with multiple carrier frequencies having various channel offsets. Other transponders may multiplex numerous digital channels on a single carrier. The integrated crosspoint switch with band translation described below can be configured to operate over one or more frequency bands with any transponder modulation type. [0056]
  • For example, a [0057] satellite 110 a can include a first transponder that provides information on multiple carrier frequencies, with the carrier frequency spacing corresponding to a channel spacing for a television receiver. The transponders in a satellite 110 a are typically arranged as transponder groups. For example, the transponder group can be configured to provide a contiguous group of channels. Alternatively, the signals in a particular transponder group can have varied channel offsets, with one or more channels having different carrier bandwidths or symbol rates. Additionally, the transponders in a satellite group can be configured to all transmit using the same polarization. A typical satellite 110 a configured for a satellite television system 100 can include two transponder groups having sixteen transponders in each transponder group, with each group having a different polarity. Of course, the satellite 110 a is not limited to any particular transponder configuration, nor are transponder groups necessarily limited to sixteen transponders.
  • A [0058] satellite 110 a configured to operate in a satellite television system 100 typically transmits downlink signals in one of two frequency bands. Each frequency band can include one or more channels corresponding to one or more transponders. A first downlink frequency band is in the C-band and typically spans 3.6-4.2 GHz. A second downlink frequency band is in the Ku-band and typically spans 10.7-12.75 GHz. Of course, each satellite or some other signal source may transmit signals over one or more frequency bands. The frequency bands are not limited to the two listed frequency bands, and may be any suitable frequency bands, including one or more frequency bands that have yet to be defined and allocated by regulating bodies.
  • Of course, the upper and lower band edges for the one or more downlink frequency bands are not absolutes because of the practical limitations on constructing a brick wall filter. Rather, the frequency bands typically represent passbands and the operating transponder downlink frequency band typically comprises a frequency band that includes a frequency band having the upper and lower band edges within the passband. Alternatively, the band edges can define stop band edges and the transponder can transmit a substantially diminished energy outside of the band edge frequencies. Thus, practically, the downlink frequency bands can span about, or substantially, 3.6-4.2 GHz and 10.7-12.75 GHz. Additionally, while a [0059] satellite 110 a can be configured to use a particular downlink frequency band, the satellite 110 a may not actually transmit signals at all frequencies within the downlink frequency band. A satellite 110 a is not limited to transmitting a downlink signal in these two frequency bands, and there can be additional downlink frequency bands implemented by the satellite 110 a. These additional downlink frequency bands can be distinct from the previously described downlink frequency bands or can overlap some or all of the previously described downlink frequency bands.
  • The downlink signals transmitted by the satellites [0060] 110-110 c can be received by a terrestrial television system and displayed to one or more televisions 170 a-170 c. An antenna 120 is typically used to receive the signals from the satellites 110 a-110 c. The antenna 120 is shown in FIG. 1 as a dish antenna but other antenna 120 configurations can also be used. In the embodiment implementing a dish antenna 120, a reflector can direct the downlink signals to an antenna feed 122. Although the antenna 120 is shown with only one antenna feed 122, one or more antenna feeds 122 can be implemented on a single antenna 120. Some antenna configurations suitable for operation within the system can not include an antenna feed 122. The antenna 120 or antenna feed 122 can be configured to receive signals from a particular downlink frequency band or a particular polarization. For example, the antenna 120 and antenna feed 122 can be configured to receive the 10.7-12.75 GHz frequency band having a left hand circular polarization. Another antenna feed (not shown) included as part of the antenna 120 can be configured to receive another downlink frequency band having the same or different polarization. Additionally, although one antenna 120 is shown in FIG. 1, multiple antennae can be implemented in a location or multiple locations as part of a single system.
  • The output from the [0061] antenna 120 is connected to a receiver 180 that is used to process the received signals. In a typical satellite television system 100 the receiver 180 includes low noise amplifiers that amplify the signals while minimizing the associated noise contribution. Additionally, the signals received at the satellite downlink frequencies are typically frequency translated to one or more predetermined frequency bands, or common Intermediate Frequency (IF) bands. The received downlink signals can also be filtered to remove out of band signals that can contribute interference.
  • In one embodiment the carrier frequency spacing of the downlink signals transmitted by the satellites [0062] 110 a-110 c typically corresponds to a channel spacing used by a television receiver or a set top box. In this embodiment, it can be advantageous to frequency convert the entire received downlink frequency band to one of the predetermined frequency bands used by television receivers or set top boxes. Alternatively, the received downlink frequency band can be frequency converted to predetermined frequency bands at intermediate frequencies for further processing prior to conversion to frequencies compatible with television receivers or set top boxes. In another embodiment, several channels may be multiplexed using a single carrier. In this embodiment, one or more multiplexed carriers can be frequency converted to input frequencies of a set top box.
  • The process of low noise amplification, filtering, and initial frequency conversion can be performed by low noise block converters (LNB) [0063] 130 a-130 c. Three LNB's are shown in FIG. 1, though fewer or more can be used. A LNB, for example 130 a, can be configured to receive signals from one or more antennae, for example 120, amplify, filter, and block frequency convert the signals to a common IF band. A first set of downlink signals, such as those from a first transponder group, can be block converted to a first common IF band and a second set of downlink signals, such as those from a second transponder group, can be block converted to a second common IF band. For example, the LNB 130 a can receive downlink signals from two transponder groups. The multiple signals from two transponder groups can be received at one or more antennae 120, or one or more antenna feeds 122. Additionally, the downlink signals can originate from one satellite, for example 110 a, or more than one satellite 110 a-110 c.
  • For example, the [0064] LNB 130 a can block convert the signals from the first transponder group to a common IF band of 950-1450 MHz. Similarly, the LNB 130 a can simultaneously block convert the signals from the second transponder group to a common IF band of 1650-2150 MHz. The block converted signals at the two common IF bands can be combined prior to being output from the LNB 130 a. This process of block converting two transponder groups to different predetermined frequency bands and then combining the signals from the predetermined frequency bands is commonly referred to as band-stacking. In the previous example, the band stacked output from the LNB 130 comprises block converted transponder signals in a first common IF band at 950-1450 MHz and block converted transponder signals in a second common IF band at 1650-2150 MHz. Conceivably, based on the channel spacing and carrier bandwidths employed in particular transponder groups, signals from two transponder groups can be block converted to the same common IF band and combined without having two channels assigned to the same carrier frequency. Typically, two independent signals would not be combined at the same IF carrier frequency because each would appear as an interference source for the other, potentially making both signals unresolvable. In systems such as TDM or CDM systems, two signals can occupy the same frequency space and still be independently resolvable provided they occupy different spaces in other dimensions, such as time or code.
  • If the number of transponder groups exceeds the number of predetermined frequency bands, or common IF bands, it may not be possible to band-stack the signals from all of the transponder groups. In such a situation, the band-stacked output from a [0065] particular LNB 130 a may constitute only a subset of all available transponder groups. Additional LNB's 130 b-130 c can be used to ensure that signals from all of the transponder groups are represented in one of the band-stacked outputs of the LNB's 130 a-130 c. However, the band-stacked outputs of the LNB's 130 a-130 c are not limited to having signals from distinct transponder groups. Thus, one or more of the band-stacked LNB outputs can have signals in common with another of the band-stacked LNB outputs. In other embodiments, band-stacking is not used, and each transponder group is outputted from the LNB independently.
  • The outputs from the LNB's [0066] 130 a-130 c are connected to the input of a switch configuration, referred to herein as an N×M crosspoint switch 140. The N×M crosspoint switch 140 includes N inputs and M outputs. Signals from each of the N inputs can be selectively routed to any of the M outputs. Thus, the band-stacked output from a first LNB 130 a can be connected to a first input of the crosspoint switch 140 and can be selectively routed to any of the outputs of the crosspoint switch 140.
  • The [0067] crosspoint switch 140 can be configured such that only one input can be selectively routed to an output. Alternatively, the crosspoint switch 140 can be configured to selectively route more than one input to the same output. Additionally, the crosspoint switch 140 can also be configured such that an input signal can be selectively routed to only one output. Alternatively, the crosspoint switch 140 can be configured to selectively route an input signal to more than one output. Typically, the crosspoint switch 140 is configured to selectively route an input to a single output and only one input can be routed to the particular output. Where the crosspoint switch 140 configuration limits one output to one input, there can be some inputs that cannot be routed to outputs if the number if inputs, N, is greater than the number of outputs, M. Similarly, some input signals can not be able to be routed to an output if the crosspoint switch 140 configuration limits an output to a signal from only one input, and one input can be routed to multiple outputs.
  • Conversely, some outputs can not have any signals routed to them if the [0068] crosspoint switch 140 configuration only allows one input to be routed to one output and the number of inputs, N, is less than the number of outputs, M. Similarly, some outputs may not have any signals routed to them if multiple inputs can be routed to the same output and an input can only be routed to one output. The crosspoint switches in each of the embodiments can be configured in the various alternatives discussed above.
  • Each of the outputs of the [0069] crosspoint switch 140 is coupled to a corresponding input to a band translation section 150. The band translation section 150 can represent an integrated device that is configured to independently provide frequency band translation to signals at each of its inputs. Alternatively, the band translation section 150 can represent a collection of one or more band translation devices that are configured to frequency band translate signals at each of the inputs. In one embodiment, the band translation section 150 can include one or more band translation devices configured to frequency band translate one or more signals using a common local oscillator. In another embodiment, the band translation section can include one or more band translation devices configured to independently frequency band translate each of the input signals.
  • In one embodiment, a band translation device within the [0070] band translation section 150 has an input connected to an output of the crosspoint switch 140. An output of the band translation device represents an output of the band translation section 150. The band translation device can be configured to selectively couple an input signal directly to the output with no frequency translation, or alternatively to frequency translate the input signal to an output signal at a frequency band that differs from the input frequency band. The frequency translation device can further be configured, such that when frequency translation is selected, to selectively frequency translate the input signal from a first one of the predetermined frequency bands to a second one of the predetermined frequency bands.
  • In the satellite television embodiment described above, there are two predetermined frequency bands. A first predetermined frequency band spans 950-1450 MHz and the second predetermined frequency band spans 1650-2150 MHz. In this embodiment, a band translation device can frequency translate an input signal at one of the two predetermined frequency bands to an output signal at one of the same two predetermined frequency bands. It can be seen that there are four distinct possibilities. An input signal in the lower of the two predetermined frequency bands, 950-1450 MHz, can be frequency translated by the band translation device to either the lower, or the upper, of the two predetermined frequency bands. Thus, in the example, the signal output from the band translation device can be in the lower predetermined frequency band, 950-1450 MHz, or the upper predetermined frequency band, 1650-2150 MHz. Of course, in one of the conditions, there is no frequency translation, but rather, the input signal is coupled directly from the input of the band translation device to the output of the band translation device. The direct coupling from input to output without frequency translation can be referred to as a pass through state. [0071]
  • Similarly, an input signal provided to the band translation device at the upper frequency band can be output from the band translation device at the upper frequency band or the lower frequency band. In one state the band translation device is configured in pass through and in the other state the frequency translation device is configured to frequency translate the input signal. [0072]
  • The [0073] band translation section 150 can be configured to combine the outputs from one or more band translation section. Alternatively, external components (not shown) can combine one or more band translation device outputs.
  • Thus, a [0074] receiver 180 can implement the LNB's 130 a-130 c, the crosspoint switch 140, and the band translation section 150. The receiver 180 can implement all of these elements in a single integrated circuit or can implement one or more of the elements on separate integrated circuits or stand-alone devices. For example, the LNB's 130 a-130 c can each be implemented as stand-alone devices and the crosspoint switch 140 with the band translation section 150 can be implemented on a single integrated circuit. The LNB's 130 a-130 c, crosspoint switch 140 and band translation section 150 can be implemented in a single housing. This arrangement can be particularly advantageous where size of the components is of concern. Additionally, combining the crosspoint switch 140 with the band translation section 150 onto a single integrated circuit can greatly reduce the power requirements over a discrete configuration. Reducing the power requirements can result in additional advantages. For example, an integrated circuit crosspoint switch 140 and band translation section 150 having reduced power requirements may allow a system with a smaller power supply. Additionally, reduced power consumption typically corresponds to reduced heat dissipation. A system having reduced heat dissipation requirements can often use smaller heatsinks or may eliminate heatsinks. The use of smaller heatsinks can further reduce the size of the system. Additionally, an integrated circuit embodiment can advantageously have reduced cost as compared to a discrete system. The cost savings can be attributable to savings in components and materials that can be minimized or eliminated when the crosspoint switch 140 and band translation section 150 are configured as an integrated circuit.
  • In another [0075] receiver 180 embodiment, portions of the crosspoint switch 140 and portions of the band translation section 150 can be implemented on separate integrated circuits and one of the integrated circuits can be packaged within a LNB, for example 130 a. In still another receiver 180 embodiment, the LNBs 130 a-130 c can be housed in a device that is remote from the crosspoint switch 140 and band translation section 150.
  • The outputs of the [0076] band translation section 150, and thus, the outputs of the receiver 180, are coupled to corresponding inputs of set top boxes 160 a-160 c. In the embodiment described, the predetermined frequency bands do not correspond to typical television receiver bands. Thus, the set top boxes 160 a-160 c can further frequency translate the signals to television receiver operating bands. Additionally, the output signals from the band translation section 150 can be in a format that is not compatible with standard television receivers 170 a-170 c. The set top boxes 160 a-160 c can then function as signal processing stages. For example, the satellite downlink signals can be digitally modulated in a format that is not compatible with a typical television receiver 170 a-170 c. The set top boxes 160 a-160 c can be configured to demodulate the digitally modulated signals, process the demodulated signals, and then modulate a television channel carrier frequencies with the signals for delivery to television receivers 170 a-170 c.
  • Alternatively, if the signals output from the [0077] band translation section 150 are in a format and are at a frequency band that is compatible with television receivers 170 a-170 c, the set top boxes 160 a-160 c may not be required. In still another alternative, one or more of the functions performed by the set top boxes 160 a-160 c can be integrated into the television receivers 170 a-170 c.
  • In the embodiment described in FIG. 1 and in the embodiments described in the other figures, each of the television receivers [0078] 170 a-170 c can be connected to an output from one of the set top boxes 160 a-160 c. Each of the set top boxes 160 a-160 c can have one or more individually programmable outputs. However, more than one television receiver 170 a-170 c can be connected to an output from a single set top box, for example 160 a. Alternatively, outputs from more than one set top box 160 a-160 c, or multiple outputs from one set top box such as 160 a, can be combined or otherwise connected to a single television receiver, for example 170 a, although such a configuration is not typical. A television receiver, for example 170 a, can be configured to tune to a particular channel within the one or more frequency bands provided by the set top box, such as 160 a. The television receiver 170 a can process the signal from the selected channel to present some media content, such as video or audio, to the user.
  • A user is typically provided control, such as through a remote control for the [0079] television 170 a or set top box 160 a, to selectively configure the crosspoint switch 140 or band translation section 150. For example, a user can be allowed to select, using a remote control configured to operate with the set top box 160 a, to receive signals from two distinct satellite transponder groups.
  • One of the satellite transponder groups can be received and frequency converted to a common IF band using the [0080] first LNB 130 a. The first LNB 130 a can be configured to frequency convert the signals to the upper IF band, 1650-2150 MHz. The second of the satellite transponder groups can be received and frequency converted to a common IF band using the Nth LNB 130 c. The Nth LNB 130 c can also be configured to frequency convert the signals to the upper IF band, 1650-2150 MHz. The LNB's of the other embodiments can be similarly configured. Thus, the block converted signals from the two transponder groups would ordinarily not be combinable if any two channels in the two transponder groups share signal bandwidths in the common IF bands.
  • However, in this example, the [0081] crosspoint switch 140 can be configured by control signals to output the signals from the first LNB 130 a to a first crosspoint switch output and to output the signals from the Nth LNB 130 c to a second crosspoint switch output. The band translation section 150 can then be configured, using the control signals provided by the set top box 160 a, to pass frequency translate the signals from the first switch output from the upper IF band to the lower IF band. The band translation section 150 can also be configured to pass through the signals from the second switch output without frequency translation. A combiner within the band translation section can be configured to combine the output signals from the first and second band translation outputs. The composite signal then includes the signals from the first transponder group, located at the upper common IF band, and the signals from the second transponder group, located at the lower common IF band.
  • Thus, the example can be generalized to allow signals from any N signal sources, which can be satellite transponder groups, to be combined to M distinct band stacked signals. The band stacked signals can each include from one to M distinct frequency bands. Each of the band stacked signals can then be delivered to a set top box, multiple set top boxes, or one or more other receivers for presentation to one or more users. [0082]
  • For example, an output from a first output of the [0083] receiver 180 can be coupled to one or more set top boxes, for example 160 a and 160 b. Alternatively, multiple receiver 180 outputs that have information in mutually exclusive bands can be power combined and coupled to a single cable or distribution system for delivering the signal to one or more set top boxes or receivers. In still another embodiment, the crosspoint switch 140 may direct the same input signal to two separate inputs of the band translation section 150. The band translation section 150 may then frequency translate a portion of the input to a first frequency band and may also frequency translate a second portion of the input signal to a second frequency band. The two frequency bands can be combined into a signal that is directed to a single cable or distribution system. In still other embodiments, two separate LNB's with their own crosspoint switch with band translation section 150 having output signals in separate frequency bands can have their signals power combined at the LNB outside the house. In some embodiments, the LNBs 130 a-130 c, crosspoint swtich 140 and band translation section 150 are implemented as a single device that may be placed, for example, at the antenna 120. In other embodiments, the LNBs 130 a-130 c may be implemented in a first device and the crosspoint switch 140 and band translation section can be implemented as one or more devices that can be located locally or remotely from the LNBs.
  • The LNB's [0084] 130 a-130 c, crosspoint switch 140, band translation section 150, and set top boxes 160 a-160 c can be assembled in many different configurations. In each configuration, multiple independent users can each select different channels from one or more independent signals without affecting other users or devices.
  • Other receiver embodiments can be assembled with multiple crosspoint switches connected to the same LNB's. FIG. 2 is a functional block diagram of an embodiment of a [0085] receiver 200 having cascaded band translation switches 220, 221 that can be implemented as integrated circuits (IC). In this embodiment of a receiver 200, each of the band translation switches 220, 221 is configured with two inputs and a single output. As discussed earlier with respect to FIG. 1, the band translation switches 220, 221 are not limited to any particular input and output configuration, but rather, can implement any number of inputs and outputs. Additionally, the first band translation switch 220 need not be configured the same as a second band translation switch 221, although the similar configurations are shown in FIG. 2.
  • Two LNB's [0086] 210 a, 210 b are configured to provide the input signals to the first band translation switch 220. Each of the LNB's 210 a, 210 b can provide one or more signals in one or more frequency bands. A first LNB 210 a is connected to a first set of buffer amplifiers 222 a and 222 b. The two buffer amplifiers 222 a and 222 b are configured in parallel. Various alternative buffer amplifier configurations can be used, as will be discussed in greater detail below. A first internal buffer amplifier 222 a connects the first input of the first band translation switch 220 to an input of a crosspoint switch 226. A first cascading buffer amplifier 222 b connects the first input of the first band translation switch 220 to a first cascaded output. The first internal buffer amplifier 222 a and the first cascading buffer amplifier 222 b can be configured similarly or can be configured differently. Each of the first set of buffer amplifiers 222 a, 222 b, can be configured to provide gain or attenuation. The buffer amplifiers 222 a, 222 b can be unity gain amplifiers or can provide significant signal gain. Alternatively, the buffer amplifiers 222 a, 222 b can provide attenuation rather than gain.
  • The [0087] buffer amplifiers 222 a, 222 b can be configured such that changes at the output of one of the amplifiers, for example 222 a, do not affect the other amplifier 222 b. For example, the output of the internal buffer amplifier 222 a is connected to an input of the crosspoint switch 226. The load that the input of the crosspoint switch 226 provides to the output of the internal buffer amplifier 222 a can vary depending on various factors. For example, the impedance of the crosspoint switch 226 input can vary as a function of frequency. Alternatively, the impedance of the crosspoint switch 226 input can vary depending on the switch output selected or on the configuration of devices that can be connected to the selected crosspoint switch 226 output. Additionally, signals, such as local oscillator signals can be present at the output of the buffer amplifiers. Theoretically, the input of the crosspoint switch 226 can present any load from a short circuit to an open circuit, although in an actual configuration the actual variation in the load will not likely span the entire range. Ideally, the internal buffer amplifier 222 a is configured such that its effect on the input of the band translation switch 220 does not vary for any load or signal presented at its output. Typically, the internal buffer amplifier 222 a provides a level of signal isolation that is not infinite, but is great enough such that effects experienced at its input are minimal. Similarly, input load variation is not zero, but is minimal.
  • Similarly, the cascading [0088] buffer amplifier 222 b can experience a load variation spanning from an open circuit to a short circuit because the output of the cascading buffer amplifier 222 b is connected to an output of the first band translation switch 220. The cascading buffer amplifier 222 b can likewise be configured to minimize the effect of load variations on the input of the amplifier.
  • The second input to the first [0089] band translation switch 220 is configured similarly to the first input. A second set of buffer amplifiers 224 a, 224 b have inputs connected to the second input. A second internal buffer amplifier 224 a connects the second input to a second input of the crosspoint switch 226. A second cascading buffer amplifier 224 b connects the second input to a second cascaded output of the first band translation switch 220. The second set of buffer amplifiers 224 a, 224 b are also configured to be insensitive to load variations and signals present at their outputs.
  • The [0090] crosspoint switch 226 in the first band translation switch 220 is configured to selectively couple each of the two internal buffer amplifier, 222 a, 224 a, outputs to one of two switch outputs. Although only two switch outputs are shown in the first band translation switch 220, any number of switch outputs can be incorporated into the crosspoint switch 226.
  • A first switch output is connected to a first [0091] band translation device 228 a and a second switch output is similarly connected to a second band translation device 228 b. As discussed earlier with respect to FIG. 1, each of the band translation devices 228 a-228 b can be configured to frequency translate a signal or pass the signal to its output without frequency translation.
  • The outputs of the band translation devices [0092] 228 a-228 b are connected to inputs of a signal combiner 230, here represented as a signal summer. The output of the first band translation device 228 a is connected to a first input of the signal combiner 230 and the output of the second band translation device 228 b is connected to a second input of the signal combiner 230.
  • The [0093] signal combiner 230 is configured to combine the signals provided at its inputs and output a combined composite signal. The signal combiner 230 is shown as a signal summer, which is configured to sum the input signals and provide the composite signal at its output. Typically, the signal provided by the first band translation device 228 a occupies a frequency band that is distinct from frequency band occupied by the signal provided by the second band translation device 228 b. Because the signals from the two band translation devices 228 a-228 b are effectively frequency multiplexed, the input signals can be combined to provide a composite signal without experiencing destructive interference. Of course, the input signals are not required to occupy distinct frequency bands. The first input signal can occupy a band that overlaps some or all of the frequency band occupied by the second input signal. The resulting combined composite signal can experience some destructive signal interference if desired signals in the input signals occupy the same signal space. Alternatively, no signal interference can occur in the combined signal if the signal components in the input signals do not occupy the same signal space, for example frequency, time, or code space.
  • The composite output from the [0094] signal combiner 230 is connected to a first set top box 240 a. Alternatively, the output from the signal combiner 230 can be coupled to more than one set top box, or to a signal distribution system (not shown) that can be coupled to one or more set top boxes and one or more receivers. As explained earlier with respect to FIG. 1, the set top box 240 a can be configured to further process the composite signal in order for the signals to be compatible with an end user device (not shown), such as a television.
  • A second [0095] band translation switch 221 is configured similarly to the first band translation switch 220. A first set of buffer amplifiers 223 a, 223 b receives a first input signal and a second set of buffer amplifiers 225 a, 225 b receives a second input signal. The first set of input buffers 223 a, 223 b includes an internal input buffer amplifier 223 a that amplifies the first input signal and provides the amplified signal to an input of a crosspoint switch 227. The first set of input buffers 223 a, 223 b also includes a cascading buffer amplifier 223 b that amplifies the first input signal and provides the amplified signal to an output of the second band translation switch 221.
  • The second set of input buffers [0096] 225 a, 225 b is similarly configured. The crosspoint switch 227, band translation devices 229 a, 229 b, and signal combiner 231 for the second band translation switch 221 are configured similarly to the corresponding element from the first band translation switch 220. The output of the second band translation switch 221 similarly is connected to a second set top box 240 b and can be coupled to more than one set top box.
  • However, the input signals provided to the second [0097] band translation switch 221 are provided from the cascading buffer amplifiers 222 b, 224 b of the first band translation switch 220. Thus, by providing a cascading buffer amplifiers on the band translation switches 220, 221 the signals from LNB's 210 a-210 b can be provided to any number of band translation switches 220, 221 and ultimately to any number of set top boxes 240 a-240 b.
  • The LNB [0098] 210 a-210 b outputs can provide signals to multiple set top boxes 240 a-240 b without the number of set top boxes 240 a-240 b significantly affecting the quality of the signals to any other set top box, for example 240 a. Thus, the signal quality from a particular LNB, for example 210 a, at a particular set top box, for example 240 a, is not significantly affected by the number of set top boxes 240 a-240 b that are ultimately connected to the LNB 210 a. Additionally, connections from an LNB 210 a to set top boxes 240 a-240 b can be added or subtracted, either through changes in the number of band translation switches 220, 221 cascaded or through selection at one of the crosspoint switches 226, 227, without substantially affecting the signal quality at a particular set top box 210 a. The ability of the end user device to present the information, and the end users' ability to perceive differences in signal quality are factors that contribute to the amount of signal degradation that can occur in a signal to a set top box without there being a substantial affect on the signal quality at the set top box.
  • In addition to providing cascade outputs, a band translation switch can be configured to provide a pass through signal path in the band translation devices. The band translation switch FIG. 3 shows a functional block diagram of an embodiment of a [0099] band translation switch 300 having band translation devices 330 a-330 b configured to selectively provide frequency translation or pass through. The band translation switch 300 can be implemented as a single integrated circuit.
  • A series of signal inputs are each coupled to the input of a corresponding buffer amplifier [0100] 310 a-310 d. In one embodiment, each of the signal inputs can receive a frequency multiplexed signal, such as an output from a LNB (not shown). The frequency multiplexed signal can be a band-stacked signal including signals from one or more predetermined frequency bands. In another embodiment, one or more of the signal inputs can receive information corresponding to a single channel. In still another embodiment, one or more of the signal inputs can receive a multiplexed signal containing several channels. The multiplexed signal can be, for example, a digitally modulated signal that is multiplexed to carry several channels.
  • Each of the buffer amplifiers [0101] 310 a-310 d amplifies the received signal and couples the amplified output to a corresponding input of a crosspoint switch 320. The buffer amplifiers 310 a-310 d can be configured to couple the amplified signals solely to the respective crosspoint switch 320 inputs. Alternatively, one or more of the buffer amplifiers 310 a-310 d can be configured to also couple the amplified signals to corresponding cascade outputs (not shown) as will be disclosed in further detail below with respect to FIGS. 4A-4C.
  • As previously disclosed, the [0102] crosspoint switch 320 can be configured to selectively couple any one of its inputs to any one of its outputs. Thus, the amplified signals output from the buffer amplifiers 310 a-310 d and provided to the inputs of the crosspoint switch 320 can be selectively coupled to any of the outputs of the crosspoint switch 320. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the crosspoint switch 320 has two outputs, although the crosspoint switch 320 can typically implement any number of outputs.
  • A first output from the [0103] crosspoint switch 320 is coupled to a first band translation device 330 a. Similarly, a second output of the crosspoint switch 320 is coupled to a second band translation device 330 b. Although the two band translation devices 330 a, 330 b are typically similar structures, this is not a requirement. Each of the band translation devices 330 a-330 b can, for example, have a different structure.
  • The first [0104] band translation device 330 a is configured with an input switch 336 a which selectively routes an input signal to one of a frequency translation path or a pass through path in the band translation device 330 a. The input switch 336 a for the first band translation device 330 a is shown in the frequency translation position.
  • When the [0105] input switch 336 a is configured to route an input signal to a frequency translation path, the input signal is routed to an input of a frequency translation device, such as a mixer 332 a. A signal from a local oscillator (LO) is coupled to a LO port on the mixer 332 a. The LO can be integrated onto the same integrated circuit as other components of the band translation switch 300 or can be implemented externally to an integrated circuit band translation switch 300.
  • The band translated output frequency from the [0106] mixer 332 a is a function of the input signal to the mixer and the LO frequency. As discussed above, the signals provided to the buffer amplifiers 310 a-310 d, and thus to the band translation devices 330 a-330 b, can be signals in predetermined frequency bands. The LO frequency can be programmable, or otherwise tunable, in order to allow an any one of the predetermined input frequency bands to be frequency translated to any one of the predetermined output frequency bands. Typically, the mixer 332 a is configured such that the frequency translated output from the mixer 332 a is optimized for ideal multiplier products. The desirable multiplier products can include the sum and difference frequency components or only one of the sum or difference frequency components. Typically, the input signal and the LO signal are undesirable signals at the output of the mixer. The mixer 332 a can be configured such that higher order mixer products are negligible, that is, the higher order mixer products are below the desired mixer products by a predetermined amount, such as 40 dB. Alternatively, higher order mixer products can be lower than 10 dB, 15 dB, 20 dB, 30 dB, 50 dB, 60 dB or some other level. Alternatively, the mixer 332 a can be configured such that significant higher order mixer products appear at the output of the mixer 332 a. Some or all of the higher order mixer products can be determined to not adversely affect the system. Alternatively, some or all of the higher order mixer products can be substantially reduced through filtering in subsequent stages (not shown). Filtering can be performed by implementing filters or can be accomplished as a result of the frequency response of elements that appear after the mixer 332 a output. The filters can be implemented on the same substrate as the buffers 310 a-310 d, crosspoint switch 320, and mixers 332 a and 332 b. Alternatively, the filters can be implemented separate from the buffers 310 a-310 d, crosspoint switch 320, and mixers 332 a and 332 b and need not even be implemented locally to the other devices. The filters may have a passband that is greater than, equal to, or less than an input frequency bandwidth.
  • Some or all of the predetermined input frequency bands can be the same as, or different from, some or all of the predetermined output frequency bands. In one embodiment, the predetermined input frequency bands are distinct from one another and the predetermined output frequency bands are substantially identical to the predetermined input frequency bands. For example, the predetermined input frequency bands can include a first input frequency band of 950-1450 MHz and a second input frequency band of 1650-2150 MHz. The predetermined output frequency bands can then include a first output frequency band at 950-1450 MHz and a second output frequency band of 1650-2150 MHz, such that the predetermined input and output frequency bands are the same. [0107]
  • The frequency translated signal is output from the [0108] mixer 332 a and coupled to an output switch 338 a. The output switch 338 a is configured to couple the signal output from the selected signal path to an output of the band translation switch 300. The output switch 338 a for the first band translation device 330 a is shown as selecting the frequency translation path.
  • The second [0109] band translation device 330 b is configured similarly to the first band translation device 336 a. An input switch 336 b is configured to select a frequency translation signal path or a pass through signal path. The frequency translation path uses a mixer 332 b driven by a LO to frequency translate the input signal. An output switch 338 b couples the signal from the selected signal path to an output of the band translation switch 300.
  • The [0110] input switch 336 b of the second band translation device 336 b is shown as selecting the pass through signal path. Similarly, the output switch 338 b or the second band translation device 330 b is shown as selecting the pass through signal path. The pass through signal path is shown as a direct connection from the input switch 336 b to the output switch 338 b. However, any number of elements can be present in the pass through signal path. The only limitations are that the elements in the pass through signal path do not result in a frequency translation of the desired input signal to a different frequency at the output of the band translation device 330 b. One or more filters or frequency selective devices placed after the band translation device 330 b can be configured to filter the output of the band translation device 330 b. The filters may have a passband that is greater than, equal to, or less than an input frequency bandwidth. Thus, even if the band translation device, for example 330 a or 330 b, is configured in pass through mode, the output band can be narrower than the input frequency band.
  • A band translation device, for example [0111] 330 a, having an input switch 336 a and an output switch 338 a configured to select a signal path, typically controls the input switch 336 a and the output switch 338 a to select the same signal path. It can be advantageous to implement a band translation device 330 a with both an input switch 336 a and an output switch 338 a in order to limit the effects the non-selected signal path has on the performance of the selected signal path. Of course, a band translation device, for example 330 a, is not limited to any particular configuration, and need not incorporate two switches. Additionally, the band translation device, for example 330 a, need not incorporate a pass through path, but instead, can incorporate two or more frequency translation paths.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates a simplified switch diagram of a doubly balanced mixer as known in the art. The [0112] mixer 400 includes RF and IF ports 410 and 430, respectively, each of which is shown differentially, but may be single-ended in another embodiment. The differential RF signal 410 is supplied to the input of SPDT switches 422, the states of which are switched at a rate determined by an LO signal 425 supplied thereto. The outputs of the switches 422 are coupled to differential IF ports 430 operable to provide the differential IF signal 430.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates the doubly balanced mixer of FIG. 4A as a Gilbert cell multiplier or mixer circuit known in the art. The mixer circuit includes two cross-coupled differential transistor pairs [0113] 422 whose base terminals are coupled to the LO source 425, collector terminals are coupled to the IF loads 430, and emitter terminals are coupled to buffer transistors 417. Responsive to the differential RF signal applied at terminals 410 a and 410 b, a voltage difference is established across resistor 415, resulting in the corresponding modulation of the quiescently-supplied current driving the transistor pairs 422 that comprise the mixer core. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that illustrated mixer circuit is only exemplary, and numerous variations of the circuit are also widely used.
  • While doubly balanced mixers provide a high level of even order mixing product suppression, circuit imperfections lead to degradation in that suppression. For example, a relatively low impedance parasitic [0114] 412 (e.g., capacitance) can load the emitter nodes of the mixers, the impedance operating to convert the rectified LO voltage into a common mode even order LO interferer current. The LO interferer can then pass through the mixer core and to the output loads.
  • Reduced mixer even-order suppression can be especially problematic when the mixer is integrated with other circuitry. FIG. 5 illustrates one example of such an instance where multiple mixers are supplied by a single VCO. Each mixer is configured to operate in either a mixing mode, whereby the [0115] synthesized signal 505 and input signals 510 a and 510 b are provided to respective mixers 520 a and 520 b to produce respective mixed signals 530 a and 530 b, or in a bypass mode, whereby the synthesized signal 505 is not supplied to the mixer 520 c and the input signal 510 c is routed such that it bypasses the mixer 520 c.
  • FIG. 6A illustrates a simplified switch diagram of a [0116] mixer circuit 600 in accordance with one embodiment of the invention. The mixer circuit 600 includes a mixer core 620 and a mode select circuit 640. The mixer core 620 includes two input switches 624 and 628, each switch having an input 624 a, 628 a, and two outputs 624 b, 624 c, and 628 b, 328 c, respectively. Switches are depicted to convey the component's general function, and those skilled in the art will readily appreciate that each may be realized using an variety of circuit elements, including transistors (BJT and FET types), diodes, and the like. Accordingly, as used herein, the term “switch” or “switches” shall denote any of these circuit elements, or equivalents thereof.
  • Input switches [0117] 624 and 628 are operable to accept a signal at a first frequency f1 in either a differential or single-sided form. In a differential form, the first frequency signal f1 will consist of a differential signal, wherein separate polarities of the first frequency signal f1 are supplied to separate switch inputs 410 a and 410 b, respectively. During single-sided operation, only one of the switches' inputs (e.g., 410 a) is needed to receive the first frequency signal f1. In this embodiment, the input of the other switch (e.g., 410 b) is coupled to an ac ground.
  • The first and [0118] second switches 624 and 628 are further configured to receive a switching signal 425, which operates to switch the first and second switches between their respective output states at a second frequency f2, as will be further described below. In a particular embodiment shown, the first and second switches 624 and 628 are configured such that both, upon receiving the switching signal 425, switch to the opposite states (i.e., one to its first output, and the other to its second output). In such an embodiment, the switching signal 425 may be supplied in anti-phase to configure the first and second switches in opposite output states.
  • The [0119] mixer circuit 600 further includes a mode select circuit 640, implemented in one embodiment as third and fourth switches 644 and 648. Third switch 640 includes an input 644 a switchable to two outputs 644 b and 644 c, and fourth switch 648 includes an input 648 a switchable to two outputs 648 b and 648 c. As shown, the third switch's input 644 a is coupled to the second output 624 c of the first switch. The third switch's first output 644 b is coupled to the first switch's first output 624 b, and the third switch's second output 644 c is coupled to the second switch's second output 628 c. The fourth switch's input 648 a is coupled to the second switch's first output 628 b. The fourth switch's first output 648 b is coupled to the first switch's first output 624 b, and a second output 648 c coupled to the second switch's second output 628 c.
  • The third and fourth switches are further configured to receive a mode [0120] select signal 650 operable to select the output state of the third and fourth switches 644 and 648. In a specific embodiment, the third and fourth switches 644 and 648 are collectively configured to operate in one of two states: a bypass state or a mixing state. The bypass state is exemplified in FIG. 6A with the third switch 644 coupled to its first output 644 b and the fourth switch 648 coupled to its second output 648 c as shown in FIG. 6A. The mixing state could be alternatively realized by switching both states of the third and fourth switches, as will be further illustrated below. The resulting bypass or mixed signal is provided in differential form at output ports 430 a and 430 b. IF loads 665 a and 665 b are each coupled to a respective output port and an ac ground, as described below. In an alternative embodiment, a single IF load may be coupled between ports 665 a and 665 b. The term “IF” load shall not infer that the loads' frequency of operation is limited to those frequencies below the input signals, and in fact may be a higher operational frequency when the desired mixing product is an upconverted signal. Further, the IF load may comprise active or passive components as known in the art.
  • The switches (or their corresponding implementation in transistors, diodes, or other components) may be discretely or integrally formed using a variety of fabrication techniques known in the art, including monolithic fabrication in a Bipolar Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (Bi-CMOS) process. Additional circuitry described herein, such as IF loads and oscillator circuitry, as well as other components may be monolithically formed onto an integrated circuit device in accordance with the invention. [0121]
  • FIG. 6B illustrates a method for operating the mixer circuit shown in FIG. 6A in accordance with the invention. Initially at [0122] 672, a first frequency signal is supplied to one or both of the input switches 624 and 628. As explained above, the first frequency signal may be in the form of a single-sided signal, in which case the first frequency signal is applied to one of the inputs 410 a or 410 b, the other switch input being coupled to an ac ground. In the case of an applied differential signal, oppositely polarized signals are supplied to respective signal inputs 410 a and 410 b.
  • Next at [0123] 674, the input terminal of the first and second switches is switched between each switch's first and second output at a second frequency f2. In a specific embodiment, this process is performed by using the second frequency signal as a switch control signal. In such an embodiment, an oscillator or other frequency source used to generate the second frequency signal may be local/integrated with one or more of the switches, or may be externally located and supplied to the first and second switches via a transmission medium.
  • Next at [0124] 676, the first and second outputs of each input switch are coupled to either: (i) a node common to the switch's first and second outputs, or (ii) nodes of opposite polarity. Connecting the two outputs to a common node results in the first frequency signal being output at 430 (bypass mode), and connecting the two outputs to opposite polarity nodes results in a mixing operation of the first and second frequency signals, and accordingly the generation of one or more mixing products therefrom. The process of 676 is performed by the mode select circuit 640 illustrated in FIG. 6A, whereby in the bypass mode of operation the third switch is configured to connect the first and second outputs of the first switch 624 to a common node 430 a, and the fourth switch 648 is configured to connect the first and second outputs of the second switch 628 to a common node 430 b. To operate in the alternate mixing mode, the process is performed by switching the states of the third and fourth switches. In this state, the first and second outputs of the first switch 624 will alternately connect to opposite polarity nodes 430 a and 430 b, and the first and second outputs of the second switch 628 will also alternately connect to opposite polarity nodes 430 b and 430 a. In this manner, the output states of the third and fourth switches 644 and 648 are configurable either in a bypass mode where the outputs of the first and second switches are connected to a common node, or in a mixing mode where the outputs of the first and second switches are connected to opposite polarity nodes. Further preferably, the connection between the mixer core (first and second switches) and the IF loads 665 a and 665 b is maintained during operation in either the bypass mode or mixing mode. Additionally, the first and second switches are controlled to continuously switch between their respective outputs at the second frequency during operation in either the bypass or mixing modes. As noted above, a single IF load may be coupled between nodes 430 a and 430 b in an alternative embodiment under the invention.
  • FIG. 6C illustrates the mixer circuit of FIG. 6A as a modified Gilbert [0125] cell mixer circuit 680 in accordance with the invention, with previously identified components retaining their reference numerals. As depicted, each of the switches 624, 628, 644, and 648 are implemented as a differential pair of npn bipolar junction transistors Q1-Q8. A mixer/bypass control circuit produces a control signal 650 which is supplied differentially to the base terminals of the mode select switches 644 and 648. The polarity of control signal may be reversed to switch circuit operation between bypass and mixing modes. A signal source (e.g., a LO source) is operable to provide the second frequency signal 425 to the mixer core switches 624 and 628. The input signal f1 is applied to the input terminals 410 a and 410 b of buffer transistors 417, or alternatively may be provided as a single-ended signal, in which case one of the input terminals 410 a or 410 b is coupled to an ac ground, as described above.
  • In a specific embodiment of the [0126] mixer circuit 680, transistors Q1-Q8 are npn bipolar transistors 20 um×0.4 um, IF loads 665 a and 665 b are 200 ohms, resistor 415 is 200 ohms, the first frequency signal f1 operates at 950-2150 MHz, the second frequency signal f2 operates at 3100 MHz, and the mode select signal 650 is 500 mV DC. The circuit's supply Vcc operates at +6 VDC. Further specifically, the illustrated components are integrally formed using a 0.35 um Bi-CMOS photolithographic process. Skilled practitioners will appreciate that that the circuit 680 can be alternatively realized using various modifications, e.g., pnp-type bipolar transistors, n or p-type field effect transistors, or other components such as diodes, and the like.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a second embodiment of the mixer circuit in accordance with the invention. The [0127] mixer circuit 700 includes a mode select switch 710 having an input 710 a to receive the first frequency signal f1, a first output 710 b coupled to a bypass circuit 720, and a second output 710 c coupled to a mixing core 730. The bypass circuit 720 may be any transmission medium operable to support the propagation of the first frequency signal therealong, including printed/integrated circuit traces (including ungrounded lines or grounded lines such as microstrip, stripline, coplanar waveguide and the like), wire, twisted pair line, coaxial cable, conductive or dielectric waveguide, and the like. The mixer core 730 has an input coupled to the switch's second output 710 c, a second input operable to receive the second frequency signal 425, and an output. The mixer core 730 can be of any conventional type (i.e., single-ended, singly-balanced, doubly balanced, etc.) and realized in any of the known forms, such as a Gilbert cell mixer.
  • The mixer circuit further comprises a [0128] signal combiner 740 coupled to the bypass circuit 720 and the mixer output. The signal combiner 740 has an output coupled to a common load 750. The signal combiner may be realized as a commonly connected port, power combiner (active or passive), or similar circuits. Selection of the bypass or mixing mode is provided by a mode select signal 650, which is supplied by a control circuit. The mixer core 730 is supplied the second frequency signal 425 via a local oscillator. One or more of the described components may be integrally fabricated into a monolithic circuit using semiconductor processing techniques appropriate for the particular material. Preferably, the operation of the mixer core continues and circuit connections between the mixer core 730 and the common load 750 is maintained during operation within or switching between the bypass and mixing modes.
  • FIGS. 8A and 8B illustrate exemplary systems using the improved mixer circuit of FIG. 6A or [0129] 7 in accordance with the invention, the exemplary systems comprising a common oscillator, multiple mixer system. Referring first to FIG. 8A, the system 820 includes a frequency synthesizer 822 and a VCO 824 coupled to three mixer circuits 680 1-3, the detailed architecture of each being described in FIGS. 6A and 6C, above. The frequency synthesizer 822 and VCO 824 operate to produce the second signal frequency f2, which is supplied to each of the three mixer circuits 680 1-3. Each mixer circuit 680 1-3 is additionally supplied with a first frequency signal 612 1-3 in differential form. Each first frequency signal 612 1-3 is identified as f1 for convenience, and the reader will appreciate that each of these frequencies may be different.
  • The [0130] mixer circuits 680 1-3 are supplied respective mode select signals 650 1-3 to configure each corresponding mixer circuit to their desired output. In the shown embodiment, the first mixer circuit 680 1 is supplied a “bypass” mode signal 650 1, resulting in the (differential) output at the first signal frequency f1. The second mixer circuit 680 2 is supplied a “mix” mode signal 650 2, resulting in the output of the mixing product described above. Similarly, the third mixer circuit 680 3 receives the first and second frequency signals f1, f2, and the “mix” mode signal 650 3, resulting in the mixing mode of operation. Preferably, the first and second switches of each mixer circuit 680 1-3 continues to switch at the second frequency f2 regardless of whether the supplied control signal 650 1-3 sets the mixer circuit to a bypass mode or mixing mode. Additionally, the mixer circuit's coupling to the IF loads 665 a and 665 b (or to a single IF load coupled between differential nodes 430 a and 430 b) is maintained during and switching between the bypass and mixing modes.
  • FIG. 8B illustrates another embodiment of a common oscillator, [0131] multiple mixer system 850 in which the mixer circuit of FIG. 7 is employed. The system 850 similarly employs a frequency synthesizer 822 and a VCO 824 for generating the second frequency signal f2 which is commonly supplied to the mixer circuits 700 1-3. In this system, the first frequency signal 612 1-3 (identified as f1 for convenience only) is supplied to the input of each mixer circuit. A corresponding mode select signal 650 1-3 is also supplied to set the switches in the desired bypass or mixing mode enabling the independent control of each mixer circuit in either a bypass or mixing mode. As described above with respect to the mixer embodiment of FIG. 7, the operation of the mixer continues and circuit connections between the mixer core 730 and the common load 750 can be maintained during operation within or switching between the bypass and mixing modes in order to maintain a substantially constant level of LO even-order interference.
  • Just as there are various embodiments for the band translation devices, there are also various embodiments for cascadeable buffer amplifiers. FIGS. 9A-9C show functional block diagrams of various embodiments of cascadable buffer amplifiers with switches. FIG. 9A shows a functional block diagram of an embodiment having a [0132] single buffer amplifier 910 configured to drive both the input to the crosspoint switch 912 as well as the cascade output. This configuration uses fewer elements than do the embodiments shown in FIG. 9B or 9C. However, the design of the buffer amplifier 910 can be more complicated because the buffer amplifier 910 is configured to drive two potentially independent loads. Ideally, changes in the load placed on the cascade output should not affect the signal provided to the crosspoint switch 912. Similarly, changes in the configuration of the crosspoint switch 912 and devices (not shown) connected to the output of the crosspoint switch 912 should not affect the signal provided to the cascade output. Thus, the embodiment shown in FIG. 9A can show the fewest elements, but can require a more complex buffer amplifier 910 design.
  • The embodiment of FIG. 9B is equivalent to the buffer amplifier embodiment disclosed in FIG. 2. The buffer amplifier embodiment uses two [0133] buffer amplifiers 920, 924 connected in parallel. The input signal provided, for example, by an LNB is coupled to an internal buffer amplifier 920 and a cascading buffer amplifier 924. The internal buffer amplifier 920 amplifies the input signal and drives the input to the crosspoint switch 928. The cascading buffer amplifier 924 amplifies the input signal and drives the cascade output. The cascade output can represent an output from an IC which includes the buffer amplifier embodiment. As discussed previously with respect to FIG. 2, the internal buffer amplifier isolates load changes and interference at its output from its input. The internal buffer amplifier 920 thus provides signal isolation to the buffer amplifier input and the cascade output. Similarly, the cascading buffer amplifier 924 isolates load changes and interference at its output from its input, thereby providing signal isolation to the buffer amplifier input and the cascade output.
  • The two amplifier embodiment has the advantages of high isolation between the outputs of the buffer amplifiers and between the outputs of the buffer amplifiers to the input of the buffer amplifiers. However, the multiple amplifier embodiment can require more active devices, which consume power, generate heat, generate interference, and increase cost. Thus, the multiple amplifier configuration may not be the most desirable solution for all applications. [0134]
  • Another buffer amplifier embodiment is shown in the functional block diagram of FIG. 9C. In the embodiment of FIG. 9C, the input signal, for example the output from an LNB, is provided to the input of a [0135] power divider 930. The power divider 930 can for example, be a passive power divider or an active power divider. Additionally, the power divider 930 can be configured to provide substantially an equal power split or can be configured to provide a majority of the power to one of the output ports. The signals provided at each of the output ports of the power divider 930 can be in-phase or can be out of phase.
  • One of the output signals from the [0136] power divider 930 is coupled to a buffer amplifier 934 that is configured to amplify the signal and couple the amplified signal to an input of the crosspoint switch 938. The other output from the power divider 930 is coupled to the cascade output.
  • The embodiment of FIG. 9C can be advantageous because the [0137] power divider 930 can be implemented as a passive device that consumes no power. Additionally, the power divider 930 provides a degree of isolation between the cascade output and the buffer amplifier output. There is also signal isolation between the output ports of the power divider 930. However, if the power divider 930 is a passive device, the signal isolation between the output ports is typically not as great as is obtainable from the two amplifier configuration. Additionally, a passive device can require considerable area on an integrated circuit or can not be feasible to implement on an integrated circuit. Also, the signal quality can be severely degraded if multiple passive power divider stages are cascaded.
  • Thus, various buffer amplifier embodiments have been shown. However, each of the embodiments has advantages and disadvantages and the optimal configuration will depend on the requirements of the system. Additionally, the embodiments disclosed are only examples and are not meant to be an exhaustive list of available configurations. Other configurations can be implemented. [0138]
  • FIG. 10 is a functional block diagram of a crosspoint switch with [0139] band translation 1000. A two input and two output version of the receiver 180 of FIG. 1 can be implemented with the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 of FIG. 10 in combination with two LNB's. For example, the receiver of FIG. 1 can include LNB modules connected to an integrated circuit implementation of the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000. This configuration of a receiver allows signal routing and band translation to be performed at a location physically close to the LNBs. The physical proximity of LNBs to the crosspoint switch with band translation 200 minimizes the loss and induced noise experienced by the received signals.
  • The crosspoint switch with [0140] band translation 1000 is not limited to having only two inputs and two outputs. Other embodiments of the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 can include additional inputs and outputs. The number of inputs can be generalized to any number, N. The number of inputs, N, can be, for example, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, or some other number. Similarly, the number of outputs can be generalized to any number, M. The number of outputs, M, can be, for example, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, or some other number.
  • Additionally, the crosspoint switch with [0141] band translation 1000 can be located remote from a signal source, such as an antenna or LNB modules. For example, one or more coaxial cables can couple the outputs from LNB modules to inputs of the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000. In an example environment such as signal distribution within a residence, the LNB modules can be a distance of more than 250 feet away from the crosspoint switch and can couple to the LNB modules with coaxial cables.
  • The crosspoint switch with [0142] band translation 1000 can be configured using differential signal interconnections to improve signal isolation. The device can be implemented with single ended signal interconnections but differential signal interconnections typically provide greater isolation. Signal isolation is of greater concern when the device is implemented in a single integrated circuit.
  • The crosspoint switch with [0143] band translation 1000 has a first signal path and a second signal path. The first signal path includes a first low noise amplifier (LNA) 1010 a connected to an arrangement of switches, 1022 a, 1024 a, 1026 a, and 1028 a, that can selectively route a signal at the output 1014 a of the LNA 1010 a to a first band translation device 1030 a or a second band translation device 1030 b. The crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 of FIG. 10 is configured to provide voltage-mode switching of the signals.
  • The [0144] first LNA 1010 a is configured with a differential input 1012 a and a differential output 1014 a. The differential input 1012 a of the first LNA 1010 a can be, for example, matched to 75 ohm differential. The differential output 1014 a of the first LNA 1010 a is configured to have a low impedance. The crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 maximizes signal isolation and minimizes switching transients by connecting a high isolation switch configuration to the output of the first LNA 1010 a. Band translation devices 1030 a, 1030 b having high input impedances are connected to the outputs of the switch configuration.
  • In one embodiment, a low output impedance refers to a typical magnitude less than 10 ohms differential. In other embodiments, low impedances may refer to other impedance magnitudes that may be higher or lower than 10 ohms, and need not be defined differentially. For example, a low impedance can refer to a magnitude of substantially less than 33 ohms. In another embodiment, a high impedance refers to a magnitude of typically greater than 1 kohm differential. In other embodiments, high impedances may refer to other impedance magnitudes that may be higher or lower than 1 kohm, and need not be defined differentially. For example, in another embodiment, high impedance can refer to a magnitude of typically greater than 330 ohms. In general the terms low impedance and high impedance are defined relative to one another. That is, high impedance is defined to be greater than or equal to approximately ten times the low impedance value. Thus, for a low impedance value of 33 ohms, a high impedance value is greater than approximately 330 ohms. [0145]
  • The in-phase output of the [0146] first LNA 1010 a is connected to switches 1022 a and 1024 a that selectively switch the signal to the in-phase inputs of the band translation devices 1030 a, 1030 b based on switch control signals provided by, for example, the controller in the set top box 160 a of FIG. 1. In an alternative embodiment, a microprocessor local to, or integrated with the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 can process signals, such as one or more control messages, from an associated set top box or receiver. The inverted phase output of the first LNA 1010 a is connected to switches 1026 a, 1028 a that selectively switch the signal to the inverted inputs of the band translation devices 1030 a, 1030 b. A switch connected to the in-phase output, for example 1022 a, is typically paired with a switch on the inverted output, for example 1026 a, such that a differential signal is selectively connected by the switch pair 1022 a, 1026 a.
  • Thus, the controller in the set top box can direct a [0147] first switch pair 1026 a, 1026 a to selectively connect the differential output of the first LNA 1010 a to the differential input of the first band translation device 1030 a. A second switch pair 1024 a, 1028 a selectively connects the differential output of the first LNA 1010 a to the second band translation device 1030 b.
  • The first [0148] band translation device 1030 a can selectively frequency translate the signal at its input to an output frequency band. The first band translation device 1030 a uses a signal from a first Local Oscillator (LO) 1040 a to perform the frequency translation.
  • A second signal path is configured similar to the first signal path. A [0149] second LNA 1010 b has a differential input 1012 b and a differential output 1014 b. The signal at the differential output 1014 b of the second LNA 1010 b is selectively connected to the first band translation device 1030 a using a third switch pair 1022 b, 1026 b. The signal at the differential output 1014 b of the second LNA 1010 b is selectively connected to the second band translation device 1030 b using a fourth switch pair 1024 b, 1028 b.
  • Typically, the signals from the [0150] first LNA 1010 a and the second LNA 1010 b are not switched to the same band translation device, for example 1030 a. The output of a single LNA 1010 a can be switched to both band translation devices 1030 a, 1030 b while the other LNA signal is not provided to any of the band translation devices 1030 a, 1030 b.
  • The crosspoint switch with [0151] band translation 1000 is configured to provide high signal isolation between the input signals and the output signals from the LNA's 1010 a and 1010 b, and high isolation through the crosspoint switch section 1022 a-1028 b. Additionally, the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 provides high signal isolation at the input and output of the band translation devices 1030 a and 1030 b. Additionally, the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 has high signal isolation and low switching transients. Low switching transients are achieved through the use of low impedance at the LNA outputs combined with high impedance inputs at the band translation devices 1030 a, 1030 b. High signal isolation is achieved using differential signal configuration and is also achieved through the use of high isolation switches.
  • High signal isolation typically refers to greater than 30 dB of isolation. It may be advantageous to achieve a high signal isolation that is greater than approximately 40 dB. In general, high signal isolation can refer to greater than 20 dB, 25 dB, 30 dB, 35 dB, 40 dB, 45 dB, 50 dB or some other greater level of isolation. [0152]
  • FIGS. 11A-11D are embodiments of high isolation switches. Each of the switch embodiments of FIGS. 11A-11D are single-ended configurations. The switch embodiments can be duplicated to allow switching of in-phase and inverted signals of differential signals. Thus, a pair of switches from FIGS. 11A-11D can be used as the switch pairs of FIG. 10. [0153]
  • FIG. 11A is a first switch embodiment having a [0154] single transistor 1102 controlled to selectively connect a signal from its input to its output based on the signal applied to the control input. The transistor 1102 can be controlled to selectively isolate a signal at its input from its output based on the signal applied to its control input. Signal isolation is controlled by the ability of the transistor 1102 to isolate the input from the output. A pair of transistors 1102 can be used to switch differential signals.
  • FIG. 11B is a second switch embodiment. A signal is input at the base of a [0155] first transistor 1110 configured as an emitter follower. Additionally, a bias voltage, which is typically a DC bias voltage, is applied to the base of the first transistor 1110. The emitter of the first transistor 1110 is selectively biased with a controllable current source 1112. The first transistor 1110 selectively couples a signal from its base to its emitter when the controllable current source 1112 conducts. Conversely, a signal at the base of the first transistor 110 is isolated from the emitter when the controllable current source 1112 is off. A pull up device 1114 connects the emitter of the first transistor 1110 to a voltage that is greater than the bias voltage, for example (Vb+1V) to ensure the first transistor 1110 is cut off when the controllable current source 1112 is off.
  • FIG. 11C is a third switch embodiment having multiple transistors configured to provide increased signal isolation. A signal is provided to a [0156] first transistor 1120. The output of the first transistor 1120 is connected to an input of a second transistor 1122. The output of the second transistor 1122 is the output of the switch. A third transistor 1124 is connected to the output of the first transistor 1120 and is configured to selectively couple the output of the first transistor 1120 and input of the second transistor 1122 to ground or signal return.
  • A differential control signal is used to control the third switch embodiment. An in-phase control signal controls the [0157] first transistor 1120 and second transistor 1122. An inverted control signal controls the third transistor 1124. Thus, when the first and second transistors 1120, 1122 are controlled to be conducting, the third transistor 1124 is controlled to be cut off. Conversely, when the first and second transistors 1120, 1122 are controlled to be cut off, the third transistor 1124 is controlled to be conducting.
  • FIG. 11D is a fourth switch embodiment. The fourth switch embodiment is similar to the second switch embodiment with additional transistors configured to provide additional signal isolation. [0158]
  • A signal is input at the base of a [0159] first transistor 1130 configured as an emitter follower. Additionally, a bias voltage, Vb, which is typically a DC bias voltage, is applied to the base of the first transistor 1130. The emitter of the first transistor 1130 is selectively biased with a controllable current source 1132. The first transistor 1130 selectively couples a signal from its base to its emitter when the controllable current source 1132 conducts. Conversely, a signal at the base of the first transistor 1130 is isolated from the emitter when the controllable current source 1132 is off.
  • A second transistor [0160] 1134 is configured to selectively pull up the emitter of the first transistor 1130 to a voltage that is greater than the bias voltage, for example (Vb+1V), to ensure the first transistor 1130 is cut off when the controllable current source 1132 is off. Additionally, the second transistor 1134 can also shunt any signal leakage at the emitter node to AC ground via the bias point, thus improving signal isolation. A third transistor 1136 has an input connected to the emitter of the first transistor 1130 and an output that is the output of the switch. The third transistor 1136 is selectively controlled to couple the signal from the emitter of the first transistor 1130 to the switch output when the controllable current source 1132 is conducting. The third transistor 1136 is selectively controlled to isolate the signal from the emitter of the first transistor 1130 when the controllable current source is off.
  • FIG. 12 is a functional block diagram of a crosspoint switch with [0161] band translation 1200 that can also be integrated as a portion of the receiver 180 of FIG. 1. A two input and two output version of the receiver 180 of FIG. 1 can be implemented with the crosspoint switch with band translation 1200 of FIG. 12 in combination with two LNB's.
  • The crosspoint switch with [0162] band translation 1200 is similar to the crosspoint switch with band translation 1000 of FIG. 10 with the exception that the device of FIG. 12 uses current mode switching while the device of FIG. 10 uses voltage mode switching. Thus, the crosspoint switch with band translation 1200 can be used interchangeably with the device of FIG. 10. However, in some instances, current mode switching can be advantageous because of the ability to sum currents into a common node.
  • The crosspoint switch with [0163] band translation 1200 has a first signal path and a second signal path. The first signal path includes a first LNA 1210 a connected to a pair of transconductance devices, 1222 a and 1224 a that can selectively route a signal at the output 1214 a of the LNA 1210 a to a first band translation device 1230 a or a second band translation device 1230 b. The crosspoint switch with band translation 1200 uses the transconductance devices, for example 1222 a and 1222 b, to provide current-mode switching of the signals.
  • The [0164] first LNA 1210 a is configured with a differential input 1212 a and a differential output 1214 a. The differential input 1212 a of the first LNA 1210 a can be matched to 75 ohm differential. The differential output 1214 a of the first LNA 1210 a is configured to have a low impedance. The crosspoint switch with band translation 1200 maximizes signal isolation and minimizes switching transients by connecting high isolation transconductance devices, 1222 a and 1224 a, to the output of the first LNA 1210 a. Band translation devices 1230 a, 1230 b having low input impedances are connected to the outputs of the transconductance devices 1222 a and 1224 a.
  • The [0165] differential output 1214 a of the first LNA 1210 a is connected to the high impedance differential inputs of the transconductance devices 1222 a and 1224 a. The first LNA 1210 a can drive both transconductance devices 1222 a and 1224 a because the differential inputs of the transconductance devices 1222 a and 1224 a are high impedance.
  • Each of the [0166] transconductance devices 1222 a and 1224 a includes a control input, 1223 a and 1225 a respectively, that is used to switch the transconductance device 1222 a and 1224 a on or off. When the signal from the first LNA 1210 a is to be routed to the first band translation device 1230 a, the first transconductance device 1222 a is controlled to provide a current output to the input of the first and translation device 1230 a. Similarly, the second transconductance device 1224 a can be controlled to provide a current output to the input of the second band translation device 1230 b. One or more transconductance devices, for example 1222 a and 1224 a connected to an LNA 1210 a can simultaneously be enabled such that one input, for example a signal at 1212 a, can be routed to all band translation devices 1230 a and 1230 b.
  • The first [0167] band translation device 1230 a can selectively frequency translate the signal at its input to an output frequency band. The first band translation device 1230 a uses a signal from a first LO 1240 a to perform the frequency translation. The first band translation device 1230 a has a low impedance input and thus, operates as a current summing node for the currents from the transconductance devices 1222 a and 1222 b to which its input is connected.
  • A second signal path is configured similar to the first signal path. A [0168] second LNA 1210 b has a differential input 1212 b and a differential output 1214 b. The signal at the differential output 1214 b of the second LNA 1210 b is selectively connected to the first band translation device 1230 a using a third transconductance device 1222 b. The signal at the differential output 1214 b of the second LNA 1210 b is selectively connected to the second band translation device 1230 b using a fourth transconductance device 1224 b. The second band translation device 1230 b operates in conjunction with a second LO 1240 b.
  • The [0169] transconductance devices 1222 a, 1222 b, 1224 a, and 1224 b can be any type of transconductance devices, such as transistors, FETs, and the like. The transconductance devices 1222 a, 1222 b, 1224 a, and 1224 b have a high output impedance. Thus, multiple transconductance devices, for example 1222 a and 1222 b can selectively provide a signal to the same band translation device 1230 a without the output impedance of the first transconductance device 1222 a affecting the performance of the other transconductance device 1222 b. The low input impedance band translation device 1230 a operates as a current summing node.
  • In an alternative embodiment of the crosspoint switch with [0170] band translation 1200, the LNA's 1210 a and 1210 b are omitted and the input signals are directly coupled to the inputs of the transconductance devices 1222 a, 1222 b, 1224 a, and 1224 b. The inputs to the first and second signal paths can be matched to a predetermined impedance using a matching circuit (not shown) which can be as simple as a resistor placed across the differential inputs.
  • FIG. 13 is a functional block diagram of a crosspoint switch with [0171] band translation 1300 having LNA/band translation device pairs for each input/output combination and summing the outputs of the band translation devices in the current domain. As with the crosspoint switch with band translation devices of FIGS. 10 and 12, the crosspoint switch with band translation 1300 can be combined with LNBs in the receiver 180 of FIG. 1. The devices in the crosspoint switch with band translation 1300 utilize differential signals to minimize noise, but single-ended devices can be used in other embodiments.
  • Each LNA/band translation pair can selectively provide a signal to an output or be controlled to isolate the signal at the input from the output. The LNA can be selectively controlled to isolate the signal by removing the bias, or by reversing the bias on the amplifier. For example, the controller in the set [0172] top box 160 a of FIG. 1 can receive user input and control the bias control pins, labeled A, B, C, and D, to selectively enable or disable the bias to the LNAs 1310 a-b, 1320 a-b.
  • A first LNA/band translation device pair includes a [0173] first LNA 1310 a connected to a first input 1312 a. The first LNA 1310 a is controlled to selectively amplify or isolate the input signal based on a signal provided to its control input 1314 a. The output of the first LNA 1310 a is connected to a first band translation device 1332 having a high output impedance. The output of the first band translation device 1332 is connected to a first signal output 1340 a.
  • A second LNA/band translation device pair includes a [0174] second LNA 1320 a having an input connected to the first input 1312 a. The controller in the set top box can control the control input 1324 a of the second LNA 1320 a to selectively amplify or isolate the input signal. The output of the second LNA 1320 a is connected to a second band translation device 1334 having a high output impedance. The output of the second band translation device 1334 is connected to a second signal output 1340 b.
  • Thus, in order to selectively route a signal from the [0175] first input 1312 a to the first signal output 1340 a, the controller in the set top box selectively controls the first LNA 1310 a to amplify the input signal by providing an enable signal to the control input, 1314 a, on the first LNA 1310 a. In order to isolate a signal at the first input 1312 a from the first output 1340 a, the first LNA 1310 a is selectively controlled to isolate the signal.
  • A second [0176] differential input 1312 b is connected to the inputs of a third LNA 1310 b and a fourth LNA 1320 b. The third LNA 1310 b is controlled to selectively amplify or isolate the input signal based on a signal provided to its control input 1314 b. The output of the third LNA 1310 b is connected to a third band translation device 1336 having a high output impedance. The output of the third band translation device 1336 is connected to a first signal output 1340 a.
  • Similarly, the [0177] fourth LNA 1320 b is controlled to selectively amplify or isolate the input signal based on a signal provided to its control input 1324 b. The output of the fourth LNA 1320 b is connected to a fourth band translation device 1338 having a high output impedance. The output of the fourth band translation device 1338 is connected to a first signal output 1340 b.
  • Thus, a signal provided to the second differential input [0178] 312 b can selectively be routed to the first or second signal outputs, 1340 a or 1340 b or simultaneously to both signal outputs. In order to route the signal from the second input 1312 b to the first signal output 1340 a, a control signal is provided to the control input 1314 b of the third LNA 1310 b to enable the third LNA 1310 b to amplify the second input signal. In order to route the signal from the second input 1312 b to the second signal output 1340 b, a control signal is provided to the control input 1324 b of the fourth LNA 1320 b to enable the fourth LNA 1320 b to amplify the second input signal.
  • The outputs of the first and third [0179] band translation devices 1332, 1336 can be summed at the load if both signals are routed to the first signal output 1340 a. Similarly, the outputs of the second and fourth band translation devices 1334 and 1338 can be summed at the load if both provide signals to the second signal output 1340 b. Thus, by using current outputs from high impedance devices driving matched impedance loads, multiple signals can be summed in a common node.
  • FIG. 14 is another embodiment of a 2×2 crosspoint switch with [0180] band translation 1400. The specific embodiment is optimized for implementation within a single integrated circuit having impedance matched inputs and outputs. It is evident that the number of inputs or outputs can be expanded to any other number. The embodiment uses current mode switching. LNA's having a matched input, variable gain, and a low impedance output are used. Signals at a first input 1412 a can be routed, using first and second transconductance devices, to one or both outputs 1470 a and 1470 b. Similarly, signals at a second input 1412 b can be routed, using third and fourth transconductance devices, to one or both outputs 1470 a and 1470 b.
  • The 2×2 crosspoint switch with [0181] band translation 1400 receives the input signal at a matched signal input of the low noise amplifiers. The low noise amplifiers generate intermediate signals at their low impedance outputs. The intermediate signals are provided to high impedance inputs of current sources configured as transconductance devices. A controller can selectively control the transconductance devices to provide an output current based in part on the intermediate signal. Additionally, the controller can selectively enable or disable each of the transconductance devices. For example, the bias to each of the transconductance device may be controllable to selectively enable or disable the device. Alternatively, the bias current may be varied linearly to control the gain of the transconductance devices. Alternatively, the gain may be varied via other means and the transconductor may be enabled and disabled by other means.
  • The current output of the transconductance devices can then be received at low impedance inputs of band translation devices that can frequency translate the current signals from a first frequency band to a second frequency band. The band translation devices can have matched impedance outputs. [0182]
  • A first signal path is configured to amplify, band translate, and route a first signal to one of two outputs. A [0183] first LNA 1410 a has a differential input 1412 a configured to accept the first signal. The input 1412 a of the first LNA 1410 a can be a differential input that is matched to a predetermined impedance, such as 75 Ω or 50 Ω. The differential output of the first LNA 1410 a has an in-phase output 1414 a and an inverted output 1416 a. The differential output of the first LNA 1410 a can be a low output impedance, a matched output impedance, or a high output impedance. The output impedance of the first LNA 1410 a can be, for example, 200 ohms differential.
  • The in-[0184] phase output 1414 a of the first LNA 1410 a is connected to a first emitter follower 1422 a that has a low output impedance. The in-phase output 1414 a of the first LNA is connected to the base of the first emitter follower 1422 a. The emitter of the first emitter follower 1424 a is connected to a current source 1424 a that biases the first emitter follower 1424 a. The output of the first emitter follower 1424 a is connected to the in-phase inputs of the differential inputs to first and second transconductance devices. The transconductance devices have high input impedances. The transconductance devices can be bipolar devices that can be selectively enabled or disabled by controlling the bias currents.
  • Similarly, the [0185] inverted output 1416 a of the first LNA is connected to the input of a second emitter follower 1426 a. The second emitter follower 1426 a is biased using a current source 1428 a connected to its emitter. The output of the second emitter follower 1426 a is connected to the inverted inputs of the first and second transconductance devices.
  • Alternatively, the first and second emitter followers, [0186] 1422 a and 1426 a, with their associated current sources, 1424 a and 1428 a, can be considered the low impedance output stage of the first LNA 1410 a.
  • The first transconductance device includes a [0187] first transistor 1432 a with the base of the first transistor 1432 a serving as the in-phase input of the first transconductance device. A first resistor 1433 a connects the emitter of the first transistor 1432 a to a controllable current source 1438 a. The base of a second transistor 1434 a is used as the inverted input of the first transconductance device. A second resistor 1435 a connects the emitter of the second transistor 1434 a to the controllable current source 1438 a.
  • The controllable [0188] current source 1438 a provides the bias for the transistors, 1432 a and 1434 a of the first transconductance device. The controllable current source 1438 a can be selectively enabled or disabled based on a control signal. The first transconductance device isolates a signal at its input from its output when the controllable current source 1438 a is disabled, and conversely, provides a current output that can be proportional to the input signal when the controllable current source 1438 a is enabled.
  • A first differential buffer amplifier having two [0189] transistors 1452 a and 1454 a is used to sum the currents from multiple transconductance devices and provide a differential signal to the first band translation device 1460 a.
  • The first [0190] band translation device 1460 a is configured with a low input impedance and an output impedance matched to a predetermined impedance. For example, the output of the first band translation device 1460 a can be matched to 75 Ω. The differential output of the first band translation device 1460 a is connected to the first signal output 1470 a. The first band translation device 1460 a is driven with a first LO 1462 a. The first LO 1462 a frequency can be tunable to allow the frequency translation of the first band translation device 1462 a to be tuned. Alternatively the output frequency of the first LO 1462 a can be fixed. The first band translation device 1462 a can be configured to frequency translate the signal or to pass the signal without frequency translation.
  • The [0191] first LNA 1410 a also provides a signal that can be selectively routed to a second output 1470 b. The differential outputs from the first and second emitter followers, 1422 a and 1426 a are connected to the differential inputs of a second transconductance device.
  • The base of a [0192] first transistor 1442 a in the second transconductance device is connected to the in-phase output from the first emitter follower 1422 a. The base of a second transistor 1444 a in the second transconductance device is connected to the inverted output from the second emitter follower 1426 a. Resistors 1443 a and 1445 a connect the emitters of the first and second transistors 1442 a and 1444 a to a controllable current source 1448 a that selectively provides bias to the first and second transistors 1442 a and 1444 a. The second transconductance device provides an output current when the controllable current source 1448 a is enabled. Conversely, the second transconductance device does not provide an output current when the controllable current source 1448 a is disabled.
  • The differential output from the second transconductance device is connected to the differential input of a second differential buffer amplifier. The second differential buffer amplifier includes two [0193] transistors 1452 b and 1454 b and is used to sum the currents from multiple transconductance devices and provide a differential signal to the second band translation device 1460 b.
  • The output of the second differential buffer amplifier is connected to the differential input of a second [0194] band translation device 1460 b. The second band translation device 1460 b has with a low input impedance and an output impedance matched to a predetermined impedance such as 75 Ω. The differential output of the second band translation device 1460 b is connected to the second signal output 1470 b. The second band translation device 1460 b is driven with a second LO 1462 b. The second LO 1462 b frequency can be tunable to allow the frequency translation of the second band translation device 1462 b to be tuned. Alternatively the output frequency of the second LO 1462 b can be fixed. The second band translation device 1462 b can be configured to frequency translate the signal or to pass the signal without frequency translation.
  • The [0195] second signal input 1412 b is connected to the second LNA 1410 b and through third and fourth transconductance devices to the first and second differential buffer amplifiers in a configuration that is similar to the path from the first signal input 1412 a to the differential buffer amplifiers.
  • The [0196] second signal input 1412 b is connected to the input of the second LNA 1410 b. The differential output of the second LNA is connected to a pair of emitter followers, one emitter follower for each of the signal outputs of the second LNA 1410 b.
  • The in-phase LNA output [0197] 1414 b is connected to a first emitter follower 1422 b that includes a first current source 1424 b connected to its emitter to provide a bias. The inverted LNA output 1416 b is connected to a second emitter follower 1426 b that includes a second current source 1428 b connected to its emitter to provide a bias.
  • The output of the [0198] first emitter follower 1422 b is connected to the in-phase inputs of third and fourth transconductance devices. The output of the second emitter follower 1426 b is connected to the inverted inputs of the third and fourth transconductance devices.
  • The third transconductance device includes first and second transistors [0199] 1432 b and 1434 b arranged in a differential configuration. The base of the first transistor 1432 b is the in-phase input of the transconductance device and the base of the second transistor 1434 b is the inverted input of the third transconductance device. The emitters of the first and second transistors, 1432 b and 1434 b, are connected via first and second resistors, 1433 b and 1435 b, to a controllable current source 1438 b. The controllable current source selectively enables or disables the third transconductance device. The collectors of the first and second transistors, 1432 b and 1434 b, are connected to the differential inputs of the first differential buffer amplifier.
  • Similarly, the fourth transconductance device includes first and [0200] second transistors 1442 b and 1444 b arranged in a differential configuration. The base of the first transistor 1442 b is the in-phase input of the transconductance device and the base of the second transistor 1444 b is the inverted input of the fourth transconductance device. The emitters of the first and second transistors, 1442 b and 1444 b, are connected via first and second resistors, 1443 b and 1445 b, to a controllable current source 1448 b. The controllable current source 1448 b selectively enables or disables the fourth transconductance device. The collectors of the first and second transistors, 1442 b and 1444 b, are connected to the differential inputs of the second differential buffer amplifier. Of course, the transconductance devcies shown in FIG. 6 only represent embodiments of typical transconductance devices. Other embodiments of transconductance devices may be used in other embodiments.
  • Thus, a designer can choose between many buffer amplifier embodiments, crosspoint switch embodiments, and band translation device embodiments in designing a band translation switch. FIG. 15 is a functional block diagram of a specific embodiment of [0201] signal distribution system 1500 including an integrated crosspoint switch with band translation (band translation switch) 1510 and external components. The band translation switch 1510 includes four inputs for LNB's, a cascadable output corresponding to each of the inputs, and two outputs configured to interface with set top boxes. The band translation switch 1510 is configured to interface with LNB's signals having a dual band-stacked frequency plan. The dual band-stacked frequency plan includes an upper band block and a lower band block. The band translation switch outputs maintain the dual band-stacked frequency plan, but allow the upper or lower band block from any of the LNB signals to be configured as an output upper band block. Similarly, the upper or low band block from any of the LNB signals can be configured as an output lower band block. A more detailed description of the band translation switch 1510 is provided below.
  • The [0202] band translation switch 1510 includes four inputs configured to interface with up to four LNB's. Each LNB provides a signal conforming to a dual band-stacking frequency plan having an upper band block and a lower band block. For example, the LNB signals can be satellite downlink signals from selected transponder groups. The lower band block can be 950-1450 MHz and the upper band block can be 1650-2150 MHz.
  • Each of the signal inputs is connected to the input of an amplifier [0203] 1520 a-1520 d. The amplifiers 1520 a-1520 d are configured as Low Noise Amplifiers (LNA's) that both buffer and amplify the input signals from the LNB's. The output from each of the amplifiers 1520 a-1520 d is connected to a corresponding input on a crosspoint switch 1530. Additionally, the output from each of the amplifiers 1520 a-1520 d is connected to a corresponding cascade output of the band translation switch 1510.
  • The [0204] crosspoint switch 1530 is configured as a 4×4 switch. Any of the four amplified LNB input signals can be selectively routed to any of the four outputs of the crosspoint switch 1530 independently and simultaneously. For example, the crosspoint switch 1530 can include a two-bit control for each output. The value of the two-bit control can be programmed to selectively route the signal from one of the four inputs. The band translation switch 1510 can, for example, receive the two bit control words from a set top box. Alternatively, the set top box may send one or more control messages to a microprocessor implemented local to the crosspoint switch and the microprocessor can generate the one or more two bit control words. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 15, each of the four outputs from the crosspoint switch 1530 is connected to a band translation device 1540 a-1540 d. One or more outputs from the crosspoint switch 1530 can be coupled to the same band translation device, for example 1540 a.
  • The band translation devices [0205] 1540 a-1540 d are configured to selectively frequency translate the signals or to pass the signals without frequency translation. Each of the band translation devices 1540 a-1540 d can select frequency translation or pass through independently of the other devices. Because a dual band-stacked frequency plan is used in this embodiment, the band translation devices 1540 a-1540 d are configured to swap the positions of the upper and lower band blocks when frequency translation is selected.
  • Each of the band translation devices [0206] 1540 a-1540 d includes a mixer. The band translation switch 1510 also includes one or more local oscillators (LO). In one embodiment with a dual band-stacked frequency plan, a single LO can be routed to all of the band translation devices 1540 a-1540 d. In another embodiment, the local oscillator frequency can be fixed when a dual band-stacked frequency plan is implemented. An LO frequency of 3.1 GHz, or 2×(the band center mean), can be used to perform the frequency translation.
  • In another embodiment, a plurality of variable frequency LOs can be used with the band translation devices [0207] 1540 a-1540 d. For example, each of the band translation devices 1540 a-1540 d can have a separate independently controlled LO output frequencies. Thus, each of the band translation devices 1540 a-1540 d can frequency translate its input signal independently of the frequency translation performed by any other band translation device.
  • LO buffer amplifiers (not shown) distribute the signal from the LO output to each of the band translation devices [0208] 1540 a-1540 d. The output of the band translation devices 1540 a-1540 d are connected to the outputs of the band translation switch 1510.
  • Each of the outputs of the [0209] band translation switch 1510 is a dual band-stacked signal. Each of the outputs of the band translation switch 1510 is connected to a filter 1550 a-1550 d. The filters 1550 a-1550 d are configured to pass signals in one of the predetermined frequency bands in the dual band-stacked frequency plan. The filters 1550 a-1550 d reject signals outside of the passband, including the signals at the undesired frequency band. The filters 1550 a-1550 d can be configured with tunable passbands or can be configured to have fixed passbands.
  • In the present embodiment, the filters [0210] 1550 a-1550 d are configured as bandpass filters with fixed passbands. The first filter 1550 a is configured as a bandpass filter that passes the upper band block of the frequency plan. A second filter 1550 b is configured as a bandpass filter that passes the lower band block. Similarly, a third filter 1550 c is configured to pass the upper band block and a fourth filter 1550 d is configured to pass the lower band block. The outputs of the first and second filters 1550 a-1550 b are connected to respective first and second inputs of a first signal combiner 1560 a. Similarly, the outputs of the third and fourth filters 1550 c-1550 d are connected to first and second inputs of a second signal combiner 1560 b. The filters 1550 a-1550 d are not limited to bandpass filters, but can be, for example, bandpass filters (BPF), lowpass filters (LPF) or highpass filters (HPF). In other embodiments, other frequency selective devices can be used to limit the frequency response of the outputs. The filters 1550 a-1550 d can have passbands that are narrower than the frequency bandwidth of the input signals. For example, an input to a filter, for example 1550 a, can include multiple carriers. However, the filter 1550 a can be configured to pass a subset of all of the carriers.
  • The signal combiners [0211] 1560 a-1560 b are configured to sum the signals provided at their inputs and to provide the summed signal at an output. The outputs from the signal combiners 1560 a-1560 b are the band translated outputs of the signal distribution system 1500. Each of the outputs is connected to a set top box for further processing and for distribution to an end user device.
  • As discussed above, one or more frequency selective devices can be used as the filters [0212] 1550 a-1550 d. For example, a diplexer can be used to filter and to band-stack signals. The diplexer can be used as the filters, for example 1550 a and 1550 b, and signal combiner 1560 a.
  • Of course, the [0213] band translation switch 1510 is not limited to operating with band stacked input signals. For example, each of the LNB's can provide signals in the same frequency band. The band translation switch 1510 can be configured to frequency translate and combine portions of the single band input signals. The crosspoint switch 1530 can, for example, route the output of the first amplifier 1520 a to a first band translation device 1540 a. An LO in the first band translation device 1540 a can be configured to frequency translate the signal such that one or more channels from the input signal are translated to desired output frequencies. The first filter 1550 a can be configured to pass only those desired channels and reject all undesired frequencies and channels.
  • Similarly, the [0214] crosspoint switch 1530 can be configured to route the output of the second amplifier 1520 b to a second band translation device 1540 b. The second band translation device 1540 b can be configured to frequency translate a portion of the input signal to desired output frequencies. The second filter 1550 b can be configured to pass only those desired channels and reject all undesired frequencies and channels.
  • The first and second band translation devices [0215] 1540 a-1540 b in conjunction with the first and second filters 1550 a-1550 b can be configured to produce selected channels in mutually exclusive frequency bands. The combiner 1560 a can then sum the filtered outputs to produce a composite output signal from independent single band input signals, where each filter includes one or more channels. In one embodiment of the single band input signal configuration, each band translation device and filter pair, for example 1540 a and 1550 a, is configured to frequency translate one or more channels from each of one or more input signal bands. The frequency translated signals can be combined into a single band signal or a multiple band signal.
  • Similarly, some embodiments can have multiple band translation devices and multiple filters. Each of the multiple band translation devices can frequency translate one or more channels from one or more input bands. The outputs of the multiple filters can be summed to provide a single composite signal having a desired channel line up. [0216]
  • FIG. 16 is a functional block diagram of a [0217] signal distribution system 1600 that is typical of a satellite television system that can be implemented at a residence or other building. The signal distribution system 1600 includes an antenna 1620 having antenna feeds 1622, 1624 coupled to two inputs of a low noise block 1626. The outputs of the low noise block 1626 are coupled to two inputs of a distribution switch 1630. The distribution switch outputs are connected to first, second, and third set top boxes 1652, 1654, 1656, using first and second transmission lines 1642, 1644. The output of the first set top box 1652 is connected to a first output device 1662. A signal splitter 1670 splits into two signals the signal coupled from the distribution switch 1630 by the second transmission line 1644. A first signal splitter 1670 output is coupled to the second set top box 1654 and the second signal splitter 1670 output is coupled to the third set top box 1656. The output of the second set top box 1654 is connected to a second output device 1664 and the output of the third set top box 1656 is connected to a third output device 1666.
  • The [0218] antenna 1620 includes two antenna feeds 1622, 1624. However, multiple antennae can be used. Additionally, each antenna 1620 can have one or more antenna feeds 1622, 1624, and each antenna 1620 is not limited to having only two feeds 1622, 1624. Alternatively, the antenna 1620 can be a configuration that does not utilize an antenna feed, such as a whip or horn.
  • The [0219] antenna 1620 receives one or more signals from a satellite 1610. Additionally, the satellite 1610 can provide a signal of a particular polarization and modulation type. Again, there may be more than one satellite 1610 providing signals to the antenna 1620. The signals from a particular satellite 1610 can be in the same frequency band as signals from another satellite (not shown) or can be in distinct frequency bands. The signals from multiple satellites can each have the same polarity and modulation type or can be different from each other.
  • In the [0220] signal distribution system 1600 of FIG. 16, each of the antenna feeds 1622, 1624 is connected to an independent input of a low noise block 1626 that outputs signals to the distribution switch 1630. Of course, the distribution switch 1630 is not limited to a 2×2 switch but can have any number of input ports and output ports, for example, the distribution switch 1630 can be, for example, a 2×4 switch, a 4×4 switch, or some other switch arrangement.
  • The [0221] distribution switch 1630 is configured to process the received satellite signals. The distribution switch 1630 can, for example, amplify, filter, and frequency downconvert the received satellite signals. The distribution switch 1630 can be configured as a pair of low noise block converters (LNB's) that each block convert the signals from one of the distribution switch 1630 inputs to an intermediate frequency. The distribution switch 1630 can also be configured to allow each of the input signals provided to the inputs to be connected to any one of multiple switch outputs. Thus, the signal provided from the first antenna feed 1622 can be block converted in the distribution switch 1630 and routed to any of the switch outputs. Similarly, the signal provided from the second antenna feed 1624 can be block converted in the distribution switch 1630 and routed to any of the switch outputs. Typically, the distribution switch 1630 is configured such that the signals from only one signal source are routed to a particular switch output. Alternatively, one or more of the block converted signals can be routed to the same distribution switch 1630 output.
  • The outputs of the [0222] distribution switch 1630 can be connected to remote locations using cabling when the antenna 1620 and distribution switch 1630 are installed in a geographically remote location from the desired signal destinations. The outputs of the distribution switch 1630 are typically routed to remote destinations with transmission lines, which can be coaxial cables. The distribution switch 1630 can be positioned local to the low noise block 1626 and antenna feeds 1622 and 1624, or may be positioned remote from the low noise block 1626 and antenna feeds 1622 and 1624.
  • In one embodiment, the [0223] distribution switch 1630 is co-located with the antenna 1620, low noise block 1626, and antenna feeds 1622 and 1624. In another embodiment, the distribution switch 1630 can be located remote from the antenna 1620. For example, cables or transmission lines can couple the signals from the low noise block 1626 to a distribution switch 1630 positioned inside a structure near one or more set top boxes 1652 and 1654. Similarly, in other embodiments, the distribution switch 1630 can be positioned in an intermediate location between the antenna 1620 and the set top boxes 1652 and 1654. In some embodiments, the low noise block 1626 is omitted and signals from the antenna feeds 1622 and 1624 can be coupled to the distribution switch 1630 using cables. Similarly, output signals from the distribution switch 1630 can be coupled to set top boxes or other destination devices using cables or some other distribution system.
  • In a first embodiment, the distribution switch is positioned local to the [0224] low noise block 1626 and antenna 1620. A first transmission line 1642 distributes the signal from the first output port of the distribution switch 1630 to a remote location within the signal distribution system 1600. The end of the first transmission line 1642 is connected to a first set top box 1652 located remote from the distribution switch 1630.
  • A [0225] second transmission line 1644 distributes the signal from the second output port of the distribution switch 1630 to a signal splitter 1670. A first output of the signal splitter 1670 is coupled to the second set top box 1654. The second set top box 1654 can be located at a location remote from the distribution switch 1630 and signal splitter 1670 and can also be at a location remote from the first set top box 1652. A second output of the signal splitter 1670 is coupled to a third set top box 1656. The output of the third set top box 1656 is coupled to a third output device 1666.
  • The first and second transmission lines, [0226] 1642 and 1644, can be parallel lines, twisted pairs, coaxial line, waveguide, and the like, or any other means for distributing the signal. Additionally, although transmission lines are typically used to minimize signal loss and signal reflections, the system can use other means for distributing the signal that are not transmission lines. For example, wires, wire bundles, and the like, can be used for distributing the signals from the distribution switch 1630 to the set top boxes 1652, 1654. However, for signals that can be considered Radio Frequency (RF) signals, the signals are typically distributed using transmission lines. The RF information signals can, for example, be in the range of KHz up to several GHz. Of course, the signal distribution system 1600 is not limited to distributing RF signals, but can distribute other signals, such as baseband signals or optical signals.
  • The [0227] transmission lines 1642, 1644, are typically non-ideal passive devices. Thus, the transmission lines attenuate the signal power. However, the attenuation contributed by the transmission lines 1642, 1644 typically do not attenuate the noise power to the same degree as the signal power. For example, a passive attenuator, such as a length of transmission line may not significantly degrade the thermal noise. Additionally, the transmission lines 1642, 1644 can contribute other types of cable related signal degradation. For example, the transmission lines can affect flatness, tilt, phase distortion, group delay distortion, reflection, interference, noise pick-up and microphonic noise of the distributed signals. Thus, the losses contributed by the transmission lines 1642, 1644 typically degrade the SNR of the signal distributed to the set top boxes 1652, 1654.
  • The first and [0228] second transmission lines 1642 and 1644 are coupled to corresponding inputs of set top boxes 1652, 1654, and 1656. The second transmission line 1644 couples to the second and third set top boxes, 1654 and 1656, via the signal splitter 1670. In one embodiment, the frequency bands for the signals output from the distribution switch 1630 do not correspond to frequency bands used by the output devices 1662 and 1664. Thus, the set top boxes 1652, 1654 can further frequency translate the signals to operating bands compatible with the output devices 1662, 1664, and 1666. Additionally, the output signals from the distribution switch 1630 can be in a format that is not compatible with the format used by the output devices 1662, 1664, and 1666. The set top boxes 1652, 1654, and 1656 can then function as signal processing stages. For example, the satellite downlink signals can be digitally modulated in a format that is not compatible with the output devices 1662, 1664, and 1666 which can be typical television receivers. The set top boxes 1652, 1654, and 1656 can be configured to demodulate the digitally modulated signals, process the demodulated signals, and then modulate television channel carrier frequencies with the signals for delivery to the television output devices 1662, 1664, and 1666.
  • Alternatively, if the signals output from the [0229] distribution switch 1630 are in a format and are at a frequency band that is compatible with the output devices 1662, 1664, and 1666 the set top boxes 1652, 1654, and 1656 may not be required. In still another alternative, one or more of the functions performed by the set top boxes 1652, 1654, and 1656 can be integrated into the output devices 1662, 1664, 1666. In still another embodiment, the signal splitter 1670 can be configured to perform signal processing, such as frequency conversion or demodulation.
  • In the embodiment described in FIG. 16, each of the set [0230] top boxes 1652, 1654, and 1656 is connected to a single output device 1662, 1664, and 1666. However, more than one output device e.g. 1662, 1664 can be connected to the output from a single set top box, for example 1652. Alternatively, outputs from more than one set top box 1652, 1654, and 1656 can be combined or otherwise connected to a single output device, for example 1662, although such a configuration is not typical.
  • An output device, for example [0231] 1662, can be configured to tune to a particular channel within the one or more frequency bands provided by the set top box, such as 1652. The output device 1662 can process the signal from the selected channel to present some media content, such as video or audio, to a user.
  • For example, the output devices, [0232] 1662, 1664, and 1666 can be television receivers and can display a television signal corresponding to a signal transmitted by the satellite 1610. The output devices 1662, 1664, and 1666 can be other types of devices in other signal distribution systems. For example the output devices 1662, 1664, and 1666 can be telephones, radio receivers, computers, networked devices, and the like, or other means for outputting a signal.
  • The [0233] output devices 1662, 1664, and 1666 can have a range of signal quality over which the output is considered acceptable. For example, the output devices 1662, 1664, and 1666 can provide acceptable outputs for input SNR above a predetermined level, which may represent a desired minimum SNR. However, the SNR at the input to the output devices, 1662, 1664, and 1666 is typically determined by the signal processing performed in the set top boxes 1652, 1654 and 1656. Thus, the signal quality is typically related to the signal quality at the input of the set top boxes 1652, 1654, and 1656. Thus, the signal distribution system 1600 is typically configured to provide a signal at the input to the set top boxes 1652, 1654, and 1656 having a SNR greater than the desired minimum.
  • Although FIG. 16 is a functional block diagram of a satellite signal distribution system, other signal distribution systems have similar structures. For example, cable distribution systems, which may distribute television, radio, data, and/or telephony signals, typically provide a single access point to a geographic area, such as a residence. The signal from the one access point is then typically split, amplified, distributed, and can be combined with other signals, such as, for example the satellite television signals. Communication systems having wireless communication links can also have similar structures. For example, a terrestrial television or radio system can include a single antenna and distribute the signals received at the single antenna to multiple output devices using a [0234] signal distribution system 100 that can amplify, split, distribute, and/or combine the received signals.
  • The signal distribution system is not limited to a residence, but can span many residences, businesses, or locations not associated with dwellings or buildings. The signal distribution system is characterized by its features and is not limited to any particular application. [0235]
  • Additionally, although FIG. 16 shows only the [0236] signal splitter 1670 interposed between the distribution switch 1630 and set top boxes 1654 and 1656, elements other than the transmission lines 1642, 1644, and signal splitter 1670 can be interposed between the distribution switch 1630 and the set top boxes 1652, 1654, and 1656. The additional distribution devices can include active or passive power dividers, active or passive power combiners, amplifiers, attenuators, filters, switches, crosspoint switches, multiplexers, de-multiplexers, frequency translation devices, encoders, decoders, and the like or any other means for distributing a signal. Each of these additional signal distribution devices can contribute to the noise experienced by the distributed signal.
  • For example, a two-way passive power divider allows a signal at one input to be split equally into two output signals, each having half the original signal power, while maintaining an impedance match at all ports. An ideal two-way passive divider reduces the SNR by 3 dB. However, in practice, the degradation is often higher. [0237]
  • Active signal distribution devices can contribute to signal degradation, for example by generating distortion products that degrade SNR. The distortion contributed by an active device typically increases as the input signal power to the device increases. Additionally, the location of an active device within the [0238] signal distribution system 1600 can affect the impact that the device has on SNR. An active device located at an input to the signal distribution system can experience a larger signal power, and thus degrade the SNR more than an identical device located at a the end of a transmission line, e.g. 1642, where the signal power can be significantly attenuated.
  • Because the distortion typically increases at a rate greater than the rate of increase in signal power, the SNR degrades for input signals that are large in relation to the device capabilities. A large input signal can be defined as a signal that generates a predetermined level of distortion in an active device. For example, a signal can be large when measured in relation to the input signal level required to generate a 1 dB amplifier output compression. Alternatively, a signal can be large when measured in relation to an input signal level required to generate a particular third order product. That is, a signal can be defined to be large if a two-tone intermodulation test produces a third order intermodulation distortion product that is a predetermined level below the output signal, for example 40 dB. The definition of a large signal is relative to the signal distribution system in which a device is used and the previous definitions are not exhaustive. [0239]
  • Conversely, when the signal is small, the uncorrelated noise level may dominate the determination of SNR. Because an attenuator typically degrades signal power and may not degrade the uncorrelated noise power by an equivalent amount, the SNR following the attenuator can degrade. The placement of a passive device can also affect the amount of SNR degradation contributed by the device. Attenuators placed where the signal is large may not affect the SNR while identical attenuators placed where the signal is small may significantly degrade the SNR. [0240]
  • Thus, there exists an optimum signal range that maximizes SNR in the system. The optimum depends on the precise signal distribution system and the nature of the information signal distributed. The Automatic Gain Control (AGC) amplifier that is detailed below can help the system maintain the optimal operating range and thus help to maintain an optimum SNR in the system. The AGC amplifier can diminish the effects that subsequent distribution devices have on the SNR at the set [0241] top boxes 1652, 1654, and 1656. Additionally, the AGC amplifier can minimize adverse effects of adding or removing distribution paths in the signal distribution system 1600. The AGC amplifier can, for example, be integrated into the distribution switch 1630 or signal splitter 1670.
  • FIGS. 17A through 17D are functional block diagrams of AGC amplifiers that can be, for example, integrated into the [0242] distribution switch 1630 and/or signal splitter 1670 of FIG. 16. The AGC amplifier can also be implemented in an intermediate signal processing device, such as the signal splitter 1670 or some other signal distribution device, alternatively referred to as a distribution device or signal processing device. Typically, the AGC amplifiers are not added as stand alone devices, but are implemented in conjunction with other distribution devices.
  • In some embodiments, intermediate signal distribution devices may not include AGC amplifiers. Such intermediate signal processing devices lacking an AGC amplifier may be configured for use in particular locations within the signal distribution system. In other embodiments, the intermediate signal distribution devices can, for example, include an AGC amplifier as the initial signal processing element. [0243]
  • Implementing an AGC amplifier with a signal distribution device allows the performance of the [0244] signal distribution system 1600 to be substantially unaffected by the physical location of the signal distribution device. That is, the performance of the signal distribution system 1600 is substantially indifferent to the placement of a signal distribution device at the front end of a cable run or at the back end of the cable run.
  • Implementing the AGC amplifier in the [0245] distribution device 1630 immediately following the low noise block 1626 can compensate for gain variations in the low noise block 1626. Thus, embodiments implementing the distribution device 1630 and low noise block 1626 locally or in a single housing may advantageously eliminate a production adjustment of the low noise block 1626 gain. Thus, the AGC function implemented in the distribution block 1630 can provide a lowered production cost by eliminating a production tuning step.
  • Each of the AGC amplifier embodiments shown in FIGS. 17A through 17D can be implemented with a signal distribution device as an integrated circuit, as discrete devices, or as a combination of integrated circuits and discrete devices. An integrated circuit can, for example, incorporate multiple independent AGC amplifiers in parallel, with each AGC amplifier controlling the power of a signal received from a satellite downlink. The integrated circuit can be manufactured on a variety of substrate materials such as silicon, germanium, gallium arsenide, indium phosphide, sapphire, diamond, and the like, or any other suitable substrate material. Additionally, the AGC amplifier embodiments can be manufactured using a variety of manufacturing techniques including bipolar, FET, BiCMOS, CMOS, SiGe, and the like. [0246]
  • FIG. 17A is a functional block diagram of a first AGC amplifier embodiment. The AGC amplifier includes a variable gain amplifier (VGA) [0247] 1710 and a detector 1720 connected to the output of the VGA 1710. An output of the detector 1720 is connected to a gain control input of the VGA 1710 to control the gain of the amplifier.
  • The AGC amplifier implements an output referred AGC function to attempt to maintain the output power of the power amplifier at a predetermined optimal level, also referred to as the AGC set point. The AGC function is a process that attempts to maintain a signal power at the AGC setpoint. The AGC function increases the gain of the [0248] amplifier 1710 when the output signal is below the AGC set point. The AGC function can continue to increase the gain of the VGA 210 as required, up to a maximum gain value. The VGA 210 continues to provide the maximum gain value as long as the output signal power remains below the AGC set point.
  • Conversely, the AGC function decreases the gain of the [0249] VGA 1710 when the output signal power is above the AGC set point. The AGC function can continue to decrease the gain of the VGA 1710 as required, down to a minimum value. The AGC function continues to provide the minimum gain value as long as the output signal power remains greater than the AGC set point.
  • Within a system such as the [0250] signal distribution system 1600 of FIG. 16, there is typically a limit of input signal range. That is, the input to the signal distribution system 1600 typically falls within a predetermined range. In such a system, it is possible to configure the AGC range such that one or more of the AGC limits is not ever reached. For example, the input signal from the satellite 1610 may vary over a predetermined range. If the AGC amplifier in the distribution switch 1630 or signal splitter 1670 has an AGC range that is greater than the input signal range, the AGC function may never reach its limits.
  • Initially, an input signal having an input signal power, Pin, is provided to the input [0251] 1715 of the VGA 1710. The control signal provided to the VGA 1710 can initially be set to control the VGA 1710 to provide the maximum available gain, Gmax. The VGA 1710 then provides an output signal having an output power, Pout, substantially equal to Pin+Gmax, for example, measured in terms of decibels relative to a milliwatt (dBm).
  • The output from the [0252] VGA 1710 is connected to an input of a power detector 1720. The power detector 1720 measures the output signal power and generates a control signal that can correlate with the output signal power. For example, the power detector 1720 can be configured to provide an output voltage that correlates with a given power level. Alternatively, the power detector 1720 can be configured to provide an output current that correlates with a given power level.
  • The power detector [0253] 1720 can be configured to measure the power of the composite amplifier output signal, including desired signals, noise, and distortion. Such a power detector 1720 can be a broadband detector and can detect a power level over a broad frequency band. Alternatively, the power detector 1720 can measure the power of only a portion of the output power from the VGA 1710. For example, the power detector 1720 can measure the power in a predetermined bandwidth, where the predetermined bandwidth represents only a portion of the bandwidth of the signal output from the VGA 1710. The predetermined bandwidth can, for example, be entirely within a desired signal bandwidth of the output from the VGA 1710. Alternatively, the predetermined bandwidth can partially overlap or be exclusive of a desired signal bandwidth of the VGA 1710 output.
  • The output of the power detector [0254] 1720 is connected to a control input of the VGA 1710. The AGC amplifier can be configured to provide an output referred AGC function. For example, the power detector 1720 can detect an output power of the VGA 1710. The power detector 1710 can also include a comparator having an AGC setpoint coupled to one comparator input. The detected output power can be provided to the second input of the comparator and compared to a AGC setpoint. The output of the comparator can be filtered, for example using an integrator. The output of the integrator can be the detector output control signal that controls the gain of the amplifier.
  • For example, a high power signal, one that is greater than the AGC set point, at the input to the power detector [0255] 1720 produces a control voltage. The control voltage value corresponds with an amplifier gain value that is smaller than the original gain value. The high power detector 1720 output reduces the gain of the VGA 1710 such that the power detected at the output of the VGA 1710 is substantially equal to the AGC set point.
  • Although the [0256] VGA 1710 is shown as an amplifier, the AGC function can be implemented with gain only, a combination of gain and attenuation, or attenuation only. Additionally, the VGA 1710 can be implemented with multiple stages and multiple devices. For example, the VGA 1710 can be configured as multiple cascaded variable gain amplifiers, or as amplifiers cascaded with variable attenuators, or as multiple variable gain amplifiers in parallel, and the like.
  • Additionally, the power detector [0257] 1720 can be a diode detector, a crystal detector, and the like. The power detector 1720 can be configured to sample mean power, peak power, RMS voltage, mean voltage, peak voltage, mean current, RMS current, peak current, or some other value correlated to signal level. The power detector can be a single device or can be constructed of multiple devices. As discussed above, the power detector 1720 can include, for example, a detector, a comparator, and integrator, or some other signal conditioning block.
  • Although the power detector [0258] 1720 is shown to provide an output referred AGC function, the power detector 1720 can be configured detect the signal power at other locations, such as at the input of the VGA 1710. The power detector 1720 can be configured to detect the signal power at some other location that is remote from the VGA 1710, such as at the input to a set top box of FIG. 16.
  • The actual AGC function can be implemented using a variety of techniques, including feedback and feed-forward. Regardless of whether the AGC function is configured as output referred using feedback, or output referred using feed-forward techniques, the AGC function can operate to provide a substantially stable output level over an predetermined AGC range. [0259]
  • FIG. 17B is a functional block diagram of an embodiment of an AGC amplifier. The AGC amplifier includes a [0260] constant gain amplifier 1732 at the input to the AGC amplifier. The output of the constant gain amplifier 1732 is connected to the input of a VGA 1734. The output of the VGA 1734 is connected to a power detector 1740. The output signal from the power detector 1740 is connected to the control input of the VGA 1734 to control the gain of the VGA 1734.
  • The AGC amplifier embodiment in FIG. 17B is similar to the embodiment of FIG. 17A except that a [0261] constant gain amplifier 1732 is implemented before the VGA 1734. The AGC amplifier of FIG. 17B operates effectively the same as the AGC amplifier of FIG. 17A. The gain of the constant gain amplifier 1732 can set a lower limit on the gain of the AGC amplifier. However, the gain of the constant gain amplifier 1732 can be negated by attenuation in the VGA 1734 if the VGA is configured to provide attenuation. The constant gain amplifier 1732 can be included in an AGC amplifier, for example, in order to provide a front end amplifier in the AGC amplifier having a low noise figure.
  • FIG. 17C is a functional block diagram of another AGC amplifier embodiment. The AGC amplifier includes a [0262] VGA 1752 at the input of the AGC amplifier. The output of the VGA 1752 is connected to a constant gain amplifier 1754. The output of the constant gain amplifier 1754 is the output of the AGC amplifier. The output of the VGA 1752 is also connected to the input of the power detector 1760. The detected output is provided to the control input of the VGA 1752. Thus, in the embodiment of FIG. 17C, the power detector 1760 detects the power of an intermediate stage, rather than the input or output of the AGC amplifier. Of course, the embodiment of FIG. 17A can be modified to correspond to the embodiment of FIG. 17C by cascading the AGC amplifier with a constant gain amplifier. Although a constant gain amplifier 1754 is implemented after the VGA 1752, the composite AGC amplifier can be interpreted as being output referred.
  • FIG. 17D is another embodiment of an AGC amplifier. The AGC amplifier is an embodiment of a VGA coupled with a signal distribution device. The AGC amplifier includes a [0263] VGA 1770 at the input of the AGC amplifier. The output of the VGA 1770 is connected to the input of a mixer 1780. A LO 1784 drives an LO port of the mixer 1780. The output of the mixer 1780 is the output of the AGC amplifier. The output of the mixer 1780 is also connected to the input of the power detector 1790. The detected output is provided to the control input of the VGA 1770.
  • In this AGC amplifier configuration, the AGC function is combined with band translation. The AGC amplifier power controls the output to track the AGC set point and can also frequency convert the signal from an input frequency band to an output frequency band. As noted earlier, a VGA such as [0264] 1770 can be combined with a variety of signal distribution devices. The signal splitter 1670 of FIG. 16 can represent another embodiment of a VGA coupled with a signal distribution device.
  • The [0265] VGA 1770 operates in a manner as described above in relation to the other AGC amplifier embodiments. The output of the VGA 1770 is connected to an input port of the mixer 1780. The mixer 1780 operates to frequency convert the signal from a first frequency band to a second frequency band. An LO 1784, which can be a fixed frequency LO or a variable frequency LO, drives the LO port of the mixer 1780. The mixer 1780 provides an output signal that includes a frequency component that is at the sum of the input signal frequencies and the LO frequency and a frequency component that is at the difference of the input signal frequencies and the LO frequency.
  • The power detector [0266] 1790 can be configured to detect signals within a predetermined frequency band. Thus, the power detector 1790 can detect the signals in the desired frequency band while ignoring signals outside the frequency band of interest. The AGC amplifier can thus be configured to provide a controlled signal amplitude combined with a frequency conversion.
  • The benefits of including an AGC stage in the signal distribution system, such as within the [0267] distribution switch 1630 or signal splitter 1670 in the system of FIG. 16, can be illustrated with a comparison of an AGC signal distribution implementation with a fixed gain signal distribution implementation. FIGS. 18A and 18B show embodiments of cascaded amplifier configurations. The configuration in FIG. 18A includes fixed gain amplifiers while the configuration of FIG. 18B includes the AGC amplifiers. Such cascaded amplifier configurations can be included in the signal distribution switch of FIG. 16, for example, to provide three independent copies of a single input signal destined for three different geographic locations within the signal distribution system.
  • FIG. 18A is an embodiment of a fixed gain [0268] signal distribution section 1800, such as a distribution section that can be implemented in the distribution switch of FIG. 16. For example, the devices in the distribution section 1800 can be distributed at front end, intermediate location, or near a termination of a signal distribution system. The fixed gain distribution section 1800 includes three gain devices 1810, 1820, and 1830 connected in series. Each of the gain devices, for example 1810, can be configured as an active power divider having a fixed gain of 0 dB, a noise figure (NF) of 3 dB, and an input third order intercept point (IIP3) of +30 dBm. Alternatively, each of the gain devices can include an amplifier in conjunction with some other type of signal distribution device.
  • A first fixed [0269] gain device 1810 includes a fixed gain amplifier 1812 followed by a passive power divider 1814 having a first output 1818 a and a second output 1818 b. The composite gain through the fixed gain amplifier 1812 and passive power divider 1814 to one of the outputs, for example 1818 b, can be configured to be 0 dB. The second output 1818 a of the first fixed gain device 1810 is connected to the input of a second fixed gain device 1820. The second fixed gain device 1820 also contains a fixed gain amplifier 1822 and a passive power divider 1824 having a first output 1828 a and a second output 1828 b. The second output 1828 b of the second fixed gain device 1820 is connected to the input of a third fixed gain device 1830. The third fixed gain device 1830 is similarly configured with a fixed gain amplifier 1832 followed by a passive power divider 1834 having two outputs 1838 a, 1838 b.
  • An alternative [0270] signal distribution section 1850 including AGC amplifiers is shown in FIG. 18B. The embodiment of the signal distribution section 1850, including the AGC amplifiers, can be implemented in the distribution switch of FIG. 16.
  • Three gain devices, [0271] 1860, 1870, and 1880 are cascaded in the signal distribution section. Each of the gain devices 1860, 1870, and 1880 includes an AGC amplifier followed by a passive power divider. Each of the gain devices, 1860, 1870, and 1880 may also include an AGC amplifier in conjunction with one or more other signal distribution devices.
  • Each of the gain devices, for example [0272] 1860, can have an output referred AGC function with an AGC set point of 0 dBm, an IIP3 of +30 dBm, and a NF of 3 dB at 0 dB of gain. The gain device, for example 1860, can have a gain range of from −20 dB to +20 dB. Each of the AGC amplifiers can be, for example, one of the AGC amplifier configurations shown in FIGS. 17A-17C.
  • An input signal is provided to an input of the [0273] first gain device 1860. The input signal is coupled to the input of an AGC amplifier 1862. The output of the AGC amplifier 1862 is connected to the input of a power detector 1864. The output of the power detector 1864 is connected to a control input of the AGC amplifier. The output of the AGC amplifier 1862 is also connected to the input of a power divider 1866 that has first and second outputs, 1868 a and 1868 b respectively.
  • The [0274] second output 1868 b of the first gain device 1860 is connected to the input of a second gain device 1870. The output from the first gain device 1860 is coupled to the input of an AGC amplifier 1872. The output of the AGC amplifier 1872 is connected to the input of a power detector 1874. The output of the power detector 1874 is connected to a control input of the AGC amplifier. The output of the AGC amplifier 1872 is also connected to the input of a power divider 1876 that has first and second outputs, 1878 a and 1878 b respectively.
  • The [0275] second output 1878 b of the second gain device 1870 is connected to the input of a third gain device 1880. The output from the second gain device 1870 is coupled to the input of an AGC amplifier 1882 in the third gain device 1880. The output of the AGC amplifier 1882 is connected to the input of a power detector 1884. The output of the power detector 1884 is connected to a control input of the AGC amplifier. The output of the AGC amplifier 1882 is also connected to the input of a power divider 1886 that has first and second outputs, 1888 a and 1888 b respectively.
  • The performance of the fixed [0276] gain distribution section 1800 can be compared against the performance of the variable gain distribution section 1850 for two operating conditions. In the first operating condition, the input signal is relatively small and uncorrelated noise is a significant factor limiting the SNR. In the second operating condition, the input signal is relatively large, and distortion products are significant factors limiting the SNR.
  • In the first operating condition, the input signal is relatively small. The configuration of the fixed [0277] gain distribution section 1800 does not change. However, the variable gain distribution section 1850 automatically configures itself to provide gain, up to a maximum gain level.
  • An active device, such as an amplifier, typically has multiple noise sources associated with it. The noise contribution of cascaded amplifiers can be reduced if the front end device has significant gain. The noise contribution of subsequent stages can become insignificant, and thus, the degradation to SNR can be minimized. Additionally, other noise contributors after the first gain stage, or front end device, degrade the SNR less than without the front end gain device. Thus, including the front end gain stage reduces the overall system SNR degradation. The performance of the fixed [0278] gain distribution section 1800 can be compared to the variable gain distribution section 1850 by examining the noise figures. The noise figure in a cascaded system is given by the following formula: nf cascade = nf 1 + i = 2 N nf i - 1 j = 1 i - 1 A j ,
    Figure US20040209584A1-20041021-M00001
  • where N=number of stages, A[0279] j=gain of jth stage
  • The noise figure values in the formula are given as ratios, while noise figure specified for the devices are given in dB. Thus, the NF for the gain devices, for example [0280] 1810 or 1870, needs to be converted from decibels to ratios before application of the formula. Table 1 provides a summary of the cascaded noise figures for the two gain distribution sections, 1800, 1850. Psig represents the signal power, in dBm at either the input or output of the gain devices. The gain of the elements is provided in dB. The noise figure, in dB, is provided for each gain device and the corresponding cascaded noise figure, in dB, is provided at the output of each gain device.
    TABLE 1
    Fixed Gain Distribution Section
    Psig (dBm) −20 −20 −20 −20
    Gain (dB) 0 0 0
    NF (dB) 3 3 3
    NFtot (dB) 3 4.8 6
    Variable Gain Distribution Section
    Psig (dBm) −20 0 0 0
    Gain (dB) 20 0 0
    NF (dB) 3 3 3
    NFtot (dB) 3 3.02 3.04
  • Thus, it can be seen that the ability of the variable [0281] gain distribution section 1850 to include gain in an initial amplifier section results in greatly reduced signal degradation due to noise contributed by subsequent stages when compared to the fixed gain distribution section 1800. Noise contributors after the initial gain section degrade the SNR less than without the gain section. Therefore, overall system degradation of SNR can be reduced with the inclusion of an initial gain section.
  • In the second operating condition, the input signal is relatively large. The configuration of the fixed [0282] gain distribution section 1800 does not change. However, the variable gain distribution section 1850 automatically configures itself to provide attenuation, up to a maximum attenuation level. When input signal levels are relatively large, distortion components, such as third order intermodulation distortion products, can be the dominant factor in degrading SNR. A cascaded IIP3 for the signal distribution sections, 1800, 1850 can be calculated and compared to illustrate the advantages of variable gain distribution over fixed gain distribution. The cascaded IIP3 of a gain section is given by the formula: 1 IP tot = 1 IP3 1 + i = 2 N j = 1 i - 1 A j IP3 i
    Figure US20040209584A1-20041021-M00002
  • The IP3 values in the formula are the linear terms and are not the values in dBm. Similarly, the gain values are provided as ratios and are not in dB. Table 2 provides a summary of the cascaded IIP3 for the two [0283] gain distribution sections 1800, 1850. Psig represents the signal power, in dBm at either the input or output of the gain devices. The gain of the elements is provided in dB. The IIP3, in dBm, is provided for each gain device and the corresponding cascaded IIP3, in dBm, is provided at the output of each gain device.
    TABLE 2
    Fixed Gain Distribution Section
    Psig (dBm) +20 +20 +20 +20
    Gain (dB) 0 0 0
    IIP3 (dBm) +30 +30 +30
    IIP3tot (dBm) +30 +27 +25.2
    Variable Gain Distribution Section
    Psig (dBm) +20 0 0 0
    Gain (dB) −20 0 0
    IIP3 (dBm) +30 +30 +30
    IIP3tot (dBm) +30 +29.96 +29.91
  • Thus, it can be seen that the ability of the variable [0284] gain distribution section 1850 to include attenuation in an initial amplifier section results in greatly reduced signal degradation due to noise contributed by subsequent stages when compared to the fixed gain distribution section 1800. Distortion contributors after the initial attenuation stage degrade the SNR less than without the attenuation stage. The overall system degradation of SNR can be reduced with the inclusion of an initial attenuation section.
  • The inclusion of an AGC function in a signal distribution section can thus improve the quality of the signal compared to a fixed gain configuration. The advantages of the variable gain section over the fixed gain section under the extreme conditions of low input signal power and high input signal power show that the variable gain distribution section has flexibility as to its position within a signal distribution system. The variable gain distribution section need not be placed at the front end or as a final stage in a signal distribution system. [0285]
  • One embodiment of the [0286] band translation switch 1510 can be used in a signal distribution system designed to provide distribution of satellite television signals in a residence. The AGC amplifiers 1520 a-1520 d provide variable gain and attenuation based on the power of the input signal. The measurement point for the AGC function is at the output of the AGC amplifiers 1520 a-1520 d and the gain of the crosspoint switch 1530 and the band translation devices 1540 a-1540 d are fixed.
  • Each AGC amplifier [0287] 1520 a-1520 d followed by a crosspoint switch 1530, band translation device 1540 a-1540 d, filter 1550 a-1550 d, and signal combiner 1560 a-1560 b can be configured to provide a total gain that ranges from a minimum of −7 dB to a maximum of +7 dB. The corresponding NF of a path through the band translation switch 1510 from the AGC amplifier, for example 1520 a, through to the output of a band translation device, for example 1540 a, can vary from, for example, a high of 24 dB to a low of 10 dB. The signal path experiences a higher NF when providing attenuation and has a lower NF when the gain is unity or greater. Similarly, the IIP3 associated with the signal path can range from a minimum of −7 dBm to a maximum of +7 dBm. For example, the IIP3 of the signal path can be −15, −10, −7, −6, −5, −4, −3, −2, −1, 0, +1, +2, +3, +4, +5, +6, +7, +10, +15, +20, +25, or +30 dBm.
  • The IIP3 of the [0288] AGC amplifier 1520 a is typically higher when the amplifier is configured to provide attenuation, which contributes to the composite IIP3 of the signal path. The IIP3 of the AGC amplifier 1520 a can vary in proportion to the gain of the amplifier.
  • Because the [0289] AGC amplifier 1520 a also provides the signal to a cascade output, the characteristics of the AGC function at the cascade output are substantially the same as the characteristics of the AGC amplifier 1520 a. Also because the AGC function is provided before the cascade output, the benefits of the AGC function are experienced in the main signal path as well as the signal path through the cascade output.
  • This [0290] band translation switch 1510 configuration can be used in a signal distribution system where the input to the band translation switch 1510 can be expected to vary over the range of −50 dBm through −10 dBm. The AGC amplifiers 1520 a-1520 d can be configured to have an output referred AGC setpoint of −17 dBm, where the output refers to the output signal of the switch 1500. The band translation switch 1510 need not actually measure the power at the output of the switch 1500. Because the devices following the band translation switch 1510 have fixed gains, the AGC output can be interpreted as being output referred to any point past an AGC amplifier where the gain or attenuation is fixed.
  • Using this AGC setpoint, the AGC amplifier, for example [0291] 1520 a, provides a gain of 7 dB when the input signal is −24 dBm or below. Additionally, the AGC amplifier 1520 a provides −7 dB of gain, or 7 dB of attenuation, when the input signal is −10 dBm or greater. Thus, within the input power range of −24 dBm through −10 dBm the AGC amplifier 1520 a provides a constant output power of −17 dBm.
  • FIG. 19 is a functional block diagram of multiple [0292] band translation switches 1910, 1920, 1930, 1940, and 1950, connected in a signal distribution system. The band translation switches 1910, 1920, 1930, 1940, and 1950, can be configured with LNBs to provide the distribution switch of FIG. 16. However, as noted earlier, one or more of the band translation switches 1910, 1920, 1930, 1940, and 1950 can be positioned at other locations within the signal distribution system. For example, one or more of the band translation devices can be positioned near the signal input, at an intermediate position within the signal distribution system, or near a termination or destination device of the signal distribution system.
  • A first [0293] band translation switch 1910 includes an LNA input that can be connected to an LNB that block converts a satellite downlink transmission. The output of the first band translation switch 1910 is connected to an input of a second band translation switch 1920 that, in turn, has an output connected to a third band translation switch 1930. A cascade output of the first band translation switch 1910 is connected to the input of a fourth band translation switch 1940. The output of the fourth band translation switch 1940 is connected to the input of a fifth band translation switch 1950.
  • Each of the band translation switches, [0294] 1910, 1920, 1930, 1940, and 1950, can be the band translation switch of FIG. 15 and can include one of the AGC amplifiers of FIGS. 17A-17C. Each of the band translation switches, 1910, 1920, 1930, 1940, and 1950, can be configured similarly to the first band translation switch 1910. In the first band translation switch 1910, an input VGA 1912 receives the input signal from the LNB's. The VGA 1912 typically has a low noise figure, such that the noise figure of the band translation switch 1910 from the input to a band translation output is below 3 dB, 4 dB, 5 dB, 6 dB, 8 dB, 10 dB, 12 dB, 14 dB, 15 dB, 20 dB, 25 dB, 30 dB, 35 dB or 40 dB. The noise figure of the band translation switch 1910 from an input to the cascade output is typically closer to the value of noise figure of the VGA 1912 and can be, for example less than 3 dB, 4 dB, 5 dB, 6 dB, 8 dB, 9 dB, 10 dB, 12 dB, 14 dB, 15 dB, 20 dB, 24 dB, 25 dB, 30 dB, 35 dB or 40 dB.
  • Additionally, the [0295] VGA 1912 contributes to the IIP3 of the band translation switch 510. The band translation switch 1910 typically has an IIP3, measured from an input to an output of a band translation device, of greater than −40, −30, −20, −10, −8, −7, −6, −5, −4, −3, −2, −1, 0, +1, +2, +3, +4, +5, +6, +7, or +8, +15, +20, +22, +25, +26, +27, +28, +29, or +30 dBm. Similarly, the band translation switch 1910 typically has an IIP3, measured from an input to the cascade output of greater than −10, −5, +1, +2, +3, +4, +5, +6, +7, +8, +9, +10, +15, +20, +25, or +30 dBm.
  • The output of the [0296] VGA 1912 is connected to a detector 1914 and N×M crosspoint switch 1916. The detector 1914 detects the power output by the VGA 1912 and provides a detected output that is connected to the control input of the VGA 1912. Additionally, the output of the VGA 1912 drives the cascade output of the first band translation switch 1910. The output of the N×M crosspoint switch 1916 is connected to a band translation device 1918.
  • Although only one [0297] VGA 1912 and detector 1914 are shown in the first band translation switch 1910, more than one VGA 1912 and cascade output can be included in a band translation switch, as shown in FIG. 19. Thus, the benefits of having an AGC function in line with a signal distribution path can be provided to two signal paths originating from a single VGA, for example 1912, in a single band translation switch, 1910.
  • Each of the subsequent [0298] band translation switches 1920, 1930, 1940 and 1950, can also be connected to signal paths at their cascade outputs and can likewise control the signal level and minimize the subsequent noise contributions by utilizing an input AGC stage. The fourth band translation switch 1940 connected to a cascade output of the first band translation switch 1910 does not contribute noise to the originating signal path and further controls noise contributions from subsequent stages.
  • FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a [0299] signal distribution method 2000 for use in a signal communication system, such as the satellite communication system shown in FIG. 16. The method 2000 begins at block 2002 where the distribution signals are received. The signals can be received from a satellite, as in FIG. 16, or can be received from an antenna configured to receive terrestrial signals, a cable, or an optical link. Additionally, the signals can be received from a combination of sources.
  • After receiving the signals to be distributed, the signals are amplified, typically by a low noise amplifier, as shown in [0300] block 2010. Because the gain can be varied from a positive gain value to a negative value, the amplifier may not be a low noise amplifier under all operating conditions and can be an attenuator under some operating conditions. In this context, a negative gain value refers to attenuation.
  • After amplification, the output power is measured, [0301] block 2012. Because output power is measured after the gain stage, the subsequent AGC function based on the measured output power can be referred to as output referred AGC. The measured output power is then used as a factor for varying the gain, block 2014. As previously discussed, the gain can typically be varied over a range spanning positive gain to attenuation.
  • A cascade output is also provided, [0302] block 2020, and can be provided after the AGC function. The gain controlled signal can be provided as a cascade output, as is shown in FIGS. 15 and 19.
  • Additionally, the signal is routed to a destination path, [0303] block 2030, such as by the N×M crosspoint switch shown in FIG. 15. The signal that is routed to the destination by the N×M crosspoint switch is typically independent of the signal provided to the cascade output. Thus, as is shown in the band translation switch of FIG. 15, the output of the AGC section is provided as a cascade output and is also provided to the input of the N×M crosspoint switch to be routed to one of M possible distribution paths.
  • The signal that is routed to a distribution path can then be band translated, [0304] block 2040. A band translation block can include a mixer to selectively translate the signal from a first frequency block to a second frequency block. Additionally, the band translation block can be configured to have a pass through path where the signal is not frequency translated.
  • Following band translation, the signal output from the band translation block can be filtered, [0305] block 2050, to remove noise and unwanted frequency components that are outside of a band of interest. Two or more of the filtered signals can be combined to produce a composite signal, block 2060. The two or more filtered signals can originate from one or more independent signal distribution paths. Each of the filtered signals can be in a distinct frequency band. Alternatively, one or more of the filtered signals can be in a frequency band that overlaps the frequency band of another of the filtered signals.
  • Although the [0306] method 2000 is shown with flow from one block to the next, the order of the method blocks is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 20.
  • A mixer with a fixed frequency LO can be implemented in the band translation device to provide frequency translation. FIG. 21 is a functional block diagram of a [0307] band extraction system 2100 for a dual band-stacked frequency plan. The band extraction system 2100 is configured to position input signals from either an upper or lower band block into the upper band block. The band extraction system 2100 is also configured to bandpass the upper band block and reject signals from the lower band block.
  • The [0308] band extraction system 2100 implements a band translation device 2118 and a bandpass filter 2150. The band translation device 618 includes a pass through signal path 2122 and a frequency translation signal path. The frequency translation signal path includes a mixer 2120 and a LO 2130.
  • As discussed earlier, one embodiment of a dual band-stacked frequency plan has a lower band block at 950-1450 MHz and an upper band block at 1650-2150 MHz. Thus, the [0309] filter 2150 is configured as a bandpass filter that passes 1650-2150 MHz and rejects signals in at least the 950-1450 MHz band.
  • The input signal is a band stacked signal having an input lower band signal [0310] 2110 and an input upper band signal 2112. Band extraction for the pass through configuration is trivial. The pass through signal path 2122 of the band translation device 2118 is selected. The input signal is pass through the band translation device 2118 without frequency translation. The upper band block is then extracted using the filter 2150 to produce an output signal.
  • The frequency translation signal path is used when the input lower band signal [0311] 2110 is to be frequency translated to the upper band block. The input signals are directed to an input of the mixer 2120 for frequency translation. A LO 2130 is connected to a LO port of the mixer 2130. A LO 2130 tuned to a frequency of 2×the band block center mean will result in a frequency translation of signals in the upper band block to the lower band block and frequency translation of signals in the lower band block to the upper band block. The LO frequency for the frequency plan shown in FIG. 21 is 3.1 GHz. Thus, this LO frequency can be used when extracting either the upper band block or the lower band block. Only the bandpass filter needs to be changed to extract the desired band block. The mixer 2130 provides output signals that are at the sum of the input signal frequency and the LO frequency and output signals that are at the difference of the input signal frequency and the LO frequency.
  • An input lower band signal is frequency translated by the [0312] mixer 2130 to an upper difference band 2142 and a lower sum band 2146. An input upper band signal 2112 is frequency translated by the mixer 2130 to a lower difference band 2140 and an upper sum band 2148. The sum and difference signals, 2140, 2142, 2146 and 2148, are provided to the filter 2150 which passes only the desired output upper band signal 2160 and rejects at least the other mixer products as well as the LO frequency. Thus, the input lower band signal, in the 950-1450 MHZ band, is frequency translated to an output upper band signal in the 1650-2150 MHz band.
  • The sum and difference bands are symmetric about the [0313] LO frequency 2144. Thus, this LO frequency swaps the positions of the input upper and lower signal. However, the difference bands are frequency inverted. A signal that is in the upper sideband of the input lower band 2110 is translated to the lower sideband of the upper difference signal. Frequency inversion does not pose any problems for double sideband signals. Similarly, spectral inversion does not pose problems for digitally modulated signals that are processed by a demodulator with built in spectral inversion. The frequency inverted signals can be further processed if the system designer requires, or desires, a particular frequency relationship. The two band-stacked configuration allows for a single LO to simultaneously rearrange the band stack. In other embodiments, each frequency component in the final composite output signal may be translated through a different band translation device. For example, a first band translation device may frequency translate a first signal to a first output signal band. Similarly, a second band translation device can frequency translate a second signal to a second output frequency band, and so on up to M frequency bands. Multiple output frequency bands can then be combined in one or more combiners. Each output frequency band can be one or more channels corresponding to signals from one or more transponders.
  • Although the previous embodiments show the frequency translation device as a single mixer, other frequency translation means can be used. A single frequency translation device can be a mixer, sampled switch, switching mixer such as diode ring, Gilbert cell, FET ring mixers, or nonlinear mixers such as diodes, linear multipliers such as translinear bipolar devices, variable resistors, or the like. Alternatively, the frequency translation device can perform multiple frequency translations. The input band blocks can be upconverted to a high Intermediate Frequency (IF) that is at a frequency greater than the highest frequency in the input band blocks. The IF signal can then be filtered to extract the band block of interest, where the desired band block can correspond to one or more channels from one or more transponders. The desired band block can then be downconverted to the desired output band block. The high IF can be a common IF or can be different for different band translation devices. Each high IF signal can be downconverted to a portion of an output frequency band. Multiple downconverted signals can be combined into a composite output signal. [0314]
  • Alternatively, the input band blocks can be downconverted to a low IF that is lower than the lowest frequency component of the input band blocks. The low IF signal can then be filtered to select the desired band block. The filtered band block is then upconverted to the desired output band block. For example, independent input signals can each be downconverted to a common IF where one or more channels are passed in a filter. The low IF can be a common IF or can be different for different band translation devices. Each of the filtered signals at the IF can then be upconverted to a desired frequency band. Multiple upconverted signals can then be combined to form a composite signal. The composite signal can then be output to a set top box or boxes. [0315]
  • In another alternative, the desired input band block can be downconverted to a baseband signal. The baseband signal can then be filtered, for example with a lowpass filter, before being upconverted to the desired output band block. If the input signals are quadrature modulated or if the two sidebands have different information, the input signal can be downconverted into two baseband channels in quadrature. Typically, a quadrature downconverter can frequency translate the signals to baseband In-phase (I) and Quadrature (Q) channels. The baseband I and Q channels can then be filtered, such as by a LPF, and the filtered signals I and Q upconverted to the desired band block. [0316]
  • For example, multiple signals can be frequency translated to baseband signals in a corresponding number of band translation devices. Each of the baseband signals can be upconverted to a portion of an output frequency band. The multiple upconverted signals can be combined to form a composite signal. [0317]
  • In other embodiments, more than two frequency translations can be used with various combinations of simple mixers, image reject mixers, IQ down converters, Single Side-Band upconverters, and filters to provide the frequency translation and filtering functions. [0318]
  • FIG. 22 is a functional block diagram of an embodiment a portion of a band translation switch configured to switch and frequency translate signals from two sources to a single output. The functional elements are shown along with a depiction of the signal spectrum output from the element. [0319]
  • A [0320] crosspoint switch 2210 can be configured to have N inputs and M outputs, where N and M can be the same or different integers. FIG. 7 shows two of the outputs from the crosspoint switch 2210.
  • A [0321] first crosspoint switch 2210 output provides a first composite signal. The first composite signal includes a first lower input band signal 2212 a and a first upper input band signal 2212 b. Similarly, a second crosspoint switch 2210 output provides a second composite input signal. The second composite signal includes a second lower input band signal 2214 and a second upper input band 2214 b signal.
  • The first composite signal is band translated in a [0322] band translation device 2220, such as a mixer having an LO tuned to 2×(block center mean). The output of the band translation device 2220 includes signals at a lower input band 2232 a, an upper band 2232 b, a lower sum band 2234 a, and an upper sum band 2234 b. The output of the band translation device 2220 is connected to a first filter 2240 that is configured to pass the upper band and substantially reject all other signals. The output of the first filter 2240 includes the upper band 2252 with the remaining signal components substantially rejected. The output of the first filter 2252 is connected to a first input of a signal combiner 2260.
  • The second output of the [0323] crosspoint switch 2210 is connected to a band translation device 2222 configured for pass through. Thus, the output of the band translation device 2222 appears substantially the same as the output from the crosspoint switch 2210. The signal includes a lower band 2236 a and an upper band 2236 b. The output of the band translation device 2222 is connected to a second filter 2242. The second filter 2242 is configured to pass the lower band and substantially reject all other signals. The output of the second filter 2242 is connected to a second input of the signal combiner 2260.
  • The [0324] signal combiner 2260 is configured to combine the signals provided to its first and second inputs. The output of the signal combiner is thus a band-stacked signal having a lower band signal 2272 and an upper band signal 2274. The lower band signal 2272 is provided by the second crosspoint switch output and the upper band signal 2274 is provided by the first crosspoint switch output. Thus, it can be seen how a band-stacked output having signal components from any number of predetermined input bands can be constructed.
  • FIG. 23 shows a flowchart of an embodiment of a [0325] method 2300 of frequency translating input frequency bands using an integrated band translation switch. An initial function performed is receiving satellite transponder signals 2310. The satellite transponder signals can be received from one or more satellite transponder groups located on one or more satellites. The satellite transponder signals are typically received in an antenna. However, satellite transponder signals can be received from signal distribution devices, such as a cable television headend, that use an antenna to directly receive the satellite transponder signals.
  • After receiving the satellite transponder signals, the received signals are block converted to first [0326] predetermined bands 2320. The first predetermined bands can also be referred to as predetermined input bands. One or more block converters can be used to convert the transponder signals to the first predetermined bands. The block converters can be low noise block converters configured to block convert signals from multiple transponder groups and band-stack the converted transponder group signals into one or more of the first predetermined bands. Each of the band-stacked signals can then be provided to an input to a routing device or assembly.
  • The block converted signals are then routed to [0327] destinations 2330. The routing can be a selective routing that is controlled using one or more control lines communicating one or more control signals. Additionally, the routing can be performed by a switch, such as a crosspoint switch, that is configured to route any of the LNB signals to one or more outputs. There can be any number N of LNB's. The crosspoint switch can be configured to have N inputs corresponding to the N LNB's. The crosspoint switch can also be configured to have M outputs, where the number of outputs M can be the same, or different, from the number of inputs N. The crosspoint switch can be configured to route a signal from any one of the crosspoint switch inputs to any one or more of the crosspoint switch outputs.
  • After routing the band-stacked transponder signals, the signals are band translated from the first predetermined frequency band to a second predetermined frequency band. Each of the band-stacked signals are translated independently of the others. The first predetermined band can be the same, or different, from the second predetermined band. [0328]
  • The band translated signals in the second predetermined frequency bands are then filtered [0329] 2350. Alternatively, filtering can occur prior to band translation. The filter is configured to pass the desired signal in the desired band and reject substantially the remaining frequency components.
  • The filtered signals are then combined [0330] 2360. One or more of the filtered signals can be combined to produce a band-stacked output signal. A combiner can be configured to combine any number of filtered signals. Additionally, more than one combiner can be used to provide more than one band-stacked output signal. In an alternative embodiment, a diplexer can be used to filter and combine signals.
  • One or more of the method steps can be performed by a single integrated circuit. For example, the block conversion can be performed by an integrated circuit. Similarly, routing the signals to destinations can be performed by an integrated circuit that can be the same, or different from the integrated circuit that performs the block conversion. In another embodiment, band translating the signals is performed on an integrated circuit that can be the same, or different from, the integrated circuit used for routing the signals or block converting the signals. Similarly filtering and combining the signals can be performed on one or more integrated circuits that are the same as, or different from, any of the other integrated circuits. One or more of the integrated circuits can include a semiconductor substrate such as a silicon substrate. Alternatively, the integrated circuit substrate can include germanium, gallium arsenide, indium phosphide, sapphire, diamond, and the like, or any other suitable substrate material. Additionally, the integrated circuit can be manufactured using any suitable technology, such as Silicon Germanium (SiGe), bipolar, FET, and the like. [0331]
  • Thus, an integrated crosspoint switch with band translation has been disclosed. Input band-stacked signals from one or more satellite transponder groups can be reconfigured to provide band-stacked output signals having a signal band from any transponder group positioned in any of the predetermined output bands. A LNB can receive one or more transponder group signals to create an band-stacked input signal. A low noise amplifier in an integrated circuit can amplify the LNB output and also provide a cascade output signal. The output from the low noise amplifier can be connected to a crosspoint switch on the same integrated circuit. The crosspoint switch can be configured to route signals from any one of its signal inputs to any one of its signal outputs. Each of the crosspoint signal outputs is connected to a band translation device. The band translation device can also be configured on the same integrated circuit. Each of the band translation devices is configured to frequency translate or pass through an input signal. The band translation device can frequency translate a predetermined input band to a predetermined output band. The output from one or more band translation devices can be combined to produce a band-stacked output signal. [0332]
  • Electrical connections, couplings, and connections have been described with respect to various devices or elements. The connections and couplings can be direct or indirect. A connection between a first and second device can be a direct connection or can be an indirect connection. An indirect connection can include interposed elements that can process the signals from the first device to the second device. [0333]
  • Those of skill in the art will understand that information and signals can be represented using any of a variety of different technologies and techniques. For example, data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, and chips that can be referenced throughout the above description can be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or particles, optical fields or particles, or any combination thereof. [0334]
  • Those of skill will further appreciate that the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, circuits, and algorithm steps described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented as electronic hardware, computer software, or combinations of both. To clearly illustrate this interchangeability of hardware and software, various illustrative components, blocks, modules, circuits, and steps have been described above generally in terms of their functionality. Whether such functionality is implemented as hardware or software depends upon the particular application and design constraints imposed on the overall system. Skilled persons can implement the described functionality in varying ways for each particular application, but such implementation decisions should not be interpreted as causing a departure from the scope of the invention. [0335]
  • The various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented or performed with a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof designed to perform the functions described herein. A general-purpose processor can be a microprocessor, but in the alternative, the processor can be any processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine. A processor can also be implemented as a combination of computing devices, for example, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, a plurality of microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core, or any other such configuration. [0336]
  • The steps of a method or algorithm described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be embodied directly in hardware, in a software module executed by a processor, or in a combination of the two. A software module can reside in RAM memory, flash memory, ROM memory, EPROM memory, EEPROM memory, registers, hard disk, a removable disk, a CD-ROM, or any other form of storage medium. An exemplary storage medium can be coupled to the processor such the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium. In the alternative, the storage medium can be integral to the processor. The processor and the storage medium can reside in an ASIC. [0337]
  • The above description of the disclosed embodiments is provided to enable any person skilled in the art to make or use the invention. Various modifications to these embodiments will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art, and the generic principles defined herein can be applied to other embodiments without departing from the spirit or scope of the invention. Thus, the invention is not intended to be limited to the embodiments shown herein but is to be accorded the widest scope consistent with the principles and novel features disclosed herein. [0338]

Claims (50)

What is claimed is:
1. An integrated switch with band translation, comprising:
a first input configured to receive a first signal in a first input frequency band, the first input frequency band selected from a plurality of predetermined frequency bands;
a second input configured to receive a second signal in a second input frequency band, the second input frequency band selected from the plurality of predetermined frequency bands;
a crosspoint switch connected to the first input and second input, the crosspoint switch configured to selectively route the first signal to a first switch output selected from a plurality of switch outputs and further configured to route the second signal to a second switch output selected from the plurality of switch outputs;
a first band translation device connected to the first switch output, the first band translation device configured to frequency translate the first signal to a first output frequency band selected from the plurality of predetermined frequency bands; and
a second band translation device connected to the second switch output, the second band translation device configured to frequency translate the second signal to a second output frequency band selected from the plurality of predetermined frequency bands.
2. The integrated switch with band translation of claim 1, further comprising a first amplifier interposed between the first input and a first input of the crosspoint switch, the amplifier comprising an input connected to the first input and an output connected to the first input of the crosspoint switch, the amplifier output also connected to a cascade output.
3. The integrated switch with band translation of claim 1, further comprising:
a first filter having an input and an output, the input of the first filter connected to an output of the first band translation device, and
a second filter having an input and an output, the input of the second filter connected to an output of the second band translation device.
4. The integrated switch with band translation of claim 3, wherein the first filter comprises a bandpass filter having a passband comprising the first output frequency band.
5. The integrated switch with band translation of claim 1, further comprising a signal summer having a first input connected to an output of the first band translation device, the signal summer having a second input connected to an output of the second band translation device.
6. The integrated switch with band translation of claim 1, wherein the plurality of predetermined frequency bands comprises the first input frequency band and the second input frequency band.
7. The integrated switch with band translation of claim 1, wherein the first input is further configured to receive a third signal in a third input frequency band selected from the plurality of predetermined frequency bands, and wherein the second input is further configured to receive a fourth signal in a fourth input frequency band selected from the plurality of predetermined frequency bands.
8. The integrated switch with band translation of claim 7, wherein the second input frequency band comprises substantially the third input frequency band.
9. The integrated switch with band translation of claim 7, wherein the first input frequency band comprises substantially the fourth input frequency band.
10. The integrated switch with band translation of claim 1, wherein the first input frequency band comprises substantially the first output frequency band.
11. The integrated switch with band translation of claim 1, wherein the first input frequency band comprises a frequency band distinct from the first output frequency band.
12. The integrated switch with band translation of claim 1, further comprising a block converter having an output connected to the first input, the block converter configured to receive signals from a satellite transponder group and block convert the signals from the satellite transponder group to the first input frequency band.
13. A band translation switch, comprising:
a plurality of amplifiers, each amplifier having an amplifier input and an amplifier output, each amplifier configured to receive an input signal having at least two frequency bands selected from a plurality of predetermined frequency bands;
a crosspoint switch comprising N inputs and M outputs, the crosspoint switch configured to selectively connect any of the N inputs to any of the M outputs, each of the N inputs connected to at least one amplifier output; and
M band translation devices, each of the M band translation devices having an input connected to one of the M outputs of the crosspoint switch, each of the M band translation devices configured to frequency translate a signal from the one of the M outputs of the crosspoint switch from a first frequency band to a second frequency band.
14. The band translation switch of claim 13, wherein each of the plurality of amplifiers comprises a low noise amplifier having an output of the band translation switch in parallel with the amplifier output.
15. The band translation switch of claim 13, wherein each of the plurality of amplifiers comprises:
a first buffer amplifier having an input connected to the amplifier input and an output connected to the amplifier output; and
a second buffer amplifier having an input connected to the amplifier input, the output of the buffer amplifier comprising an output of the band translation switch.
16. The band translation switch of claim 13, wherein each of the plurality of amplifiers comprises:
a power divider having an input connected to the amplifier input, a first divider output, and a second divider output, wherein the second divider output comprises an output of the band translation switch; and
a buffer amplifier having an input connected to the first divider output, the buffer amplifier also having an output connected to the amplifier output.
17. The band translation switch of claim 13, wherein a first amplifier selected from the plurality of amplifiers is configured to receive a band-stacked signal having a signal in a lower frequency band and a signal in an upper frequency band, the lower frequency band and the upper frequency band selected from the plurality of predetermined frequency bands.
18. The band translation switch of claim 17, wherein a first band translation device is configured to frequency translate the signal in the lower frequency band signal to an output signal in the upper frequency band.
19. The band translation switch of claim 17, wherein a first band translation device is configured to frequency translate the signal in the upper frequency band signal to an output signal in the lower frequency band.
20. The band translation switch of claim 13, wherein each of the M band translation devices comprises:
a frequency translation signal path; and
a pass-through signal path in parallel with the frequency translation path;
wherein each of the M band translation devices is independently controlled to select either the frequency translation signal path or the pass-through signal path.
21. The band translation switch of claim 13, further comprising a Local Oscillator (LO) and wherein each of the M band translation devices comprises a mixer having a LO port connected to the LO.
22. The band translation switch of claim 21, wherein the LO is a programmable frequency LO.
23. The band translation switch of claim 21, wherein the LO is a fixed frequency LO.
24. The band translation switch of claim 13, wherein the first frequency band and the second frequency band are selected from the plurality of predetermined frequency bands.
25. A band translation switch comprising:
a first input amplifier on a substrate, the first amplifier having an input and an output, the first amplifier configured to receive a first signal in a first frequency band selected from a plurality of predetermined frequency bands;
a second input amplifier on the substrate, the second amplifier having an input and an output, the second amplifier configured to receive a second signal in a second frequency band selected from the plurality of predetermined frequency bands;
a switch on the substrate, the switch having first and second inputs connected to the first amplifier output and the second amplifier output, respectively, the switch also having a first switch output and a second switch output, the switch configured to selectively route a signal from the first switch input to one of the first switch output or the second switch output;
a first band translation device on the substrate, the first band translation device having an input connected to the first switch output, the first band translation device configured to selectively frequency translate the first signal from the first frequency band to the second frequency band; and
a second band translation device on the substrate, the second band translation device connected to the second switch output, the second band translation device configured to selectively frequency translate the second signal from the second frequency band to the first frequency band.
26. The band translation switch of claim 25, wherein the substrate comprises a material selected from the group comprising silicon, silicon-germanium, germanium, sapphire, and diamond.
27. The band translation switch of claim 25, further comprising:
a first block converter configured to receive input signals from a first satellite transponder, the first block converter further configured to frequency translate the input signals to the first signal in the first frequency band.
28. A method of integrated band translation, the method comprising:
receiving an input signal from a satellite transponder group, the input signal in a first frequency band selected from a plurality of predetermined frequency bands;
amplifying the input signals in an amplifier;
coupling a cascade output to an amplifier output;
routing a signal from the amplifier output, independent of the cascade output, to a first band translation device selected from a plurality of band translation devices;
frequency translating the signal from the amplifier output from the first frequency band to a second frequency band, the second frequency band selected from the plurality of predetermined frequency bands.
29. The method of claim 28, wherein the act of receiving the input signal comprises:
receiving first downlink signals from the satellite transponder group; and
block converting the downlink signals to the first frequency band.
30. The method of claim 29, wherein the act of receiving the input signal further comprises:
receiving second downlink signals from an additional satellite transponder group; and
block converting the second downlink signals to the second frequency band.
31. A method of integrated band translation, the method comprising:
receiving one or more input signals;
routing, using a crosspoint switch, each of the one or more input signals to any combination of one or more band translation devices; and
frequency translating at least one of the input signals using the one or more band translation devices.
32. The method of claim 31, wherein receiving one or more input signals comprises receiving input signals from a first frequency band.
33. The method of claim 31, wherein receiving one or more input signals comprises receiving input signals from a satellite transponder.
34. The method of claim 31, wherein receiving one or more input signals comprises receiving input signals having a known polarization.
35. The method of claim 31, wherein receiving one or more input signals comprises:
receiving a first input signal in a first input frequency band at a first input; and
receiving a second input signal in a second input frequency band at a second input.
36. The method of claim 35, wherein the first input frequency band is independent of the second input frequency band.
37. The method of claim 35, wherein the first input frequency band overlaps at least partially the second input frequency band.
38. The method of claim 31, further comprising passing at least one input signal to an output of a band translation device without frequency translation.
39. The method of claim 31, wherein frequency translating at least one of the input signals comprises:
frequency translating, in a first band translation device, a first input signal in a first frequency band to a first output signal in a first output frequency band; and
frequency translating, in a second band translation device, a second input signal in a second frequency band to a second output signal in a second output frequency band.
40. The method of claim 39, further comprising combining the first output signal with the second output signal.
41. The method of claim 31, wherein frequency translating at least one of the input signals comprises frequency downconverting the at least one input signal.
42. The method of claim 31, wherein frequency translating at least one of the input signals comprises frequency upconverting the at least one input signal.
43. The method of claim 31, wherein frequency translating at least one of the input signals comprises:
frequency upconverting the at least one input signal frequency at least one time; and
frequency downconverting the at least one input signal at least one time.
44. The method of claim 31, wherein frequency translating at least one of the input signals comprises:
frequency downconverting the at least one input signal to at least one baseband signal; and
frequency upconverting the at least one baseband signal to an output frequency band.
45. The method of claim 31, wherein frequency translating at least one of the input signals comprises:
mixing the at least one input signal with a first Local Oscillator (LO) frequency in a first mixer; and
mixing the at least one input signal with a second LO frequency in a second mixer.
46. The method of claim 45, wherein the first LO comprises a frequency tunable LO.
47. The method of claim 45, wherein the first LO comprises the second LO.
48. The method of claim 31, further comprising outputting at least one of the one or more input signals prior to frequency translation.
49. The method of claim 31, further comprising amplifying the one or more input signals.
50. A band translation device, the device comprising:
one or more inputs each configured to receive one or more input signals;
a crosspoint switch coupled to the one or more inputs and configured to route each of the one or more input signals to any combination of one or more crosspoint switch outputs; and
one or more band translation devices having inputs coupled to at least one of the one or more crosspoint switch outputs, at least one of the one or more band translation devices configured to frequency translate the one or more input signals.
US10/735,521 2002-12-11 2003-12-11 Integrated crosspoint switch with band translation Abandoned US20040209584A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/735,521 US20040209584A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2003-12-11 Integrated crosspoint switch with band translation
US11/618,922 US20070111661A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2007-01-01 Integrated Crosspoint Switch with Band Translation

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US43306102P 2002-12-11 2002-12-11
US43306602P 2002-12-11 2002-12-11
US43306702P 2002-12-11 2002-12-11
US43306302P 2002-12-11 2002-12-11
US10/735,521 US20040209584A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2003-12-11 Integrated crosspoint switch with band translation

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/618,922 Continuation US20070111661A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2007-01-01 Integrated Crosspoint Switch with Band Translation

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20040209584A1 true US20040209584A1 (en) 2004-10-21

Family

ID=32512584

Family Applications (10)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/735,523 Abandoned US20040209588A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2003-12-11 Mixer circuit with bypass and mixing modes having constant even order generation and method of operation
US10/735,521 Abandoned US20040209584A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2003-12-11 Integrated crosspoint switch with band translation
US10/734,604 Abandoned US20050005296A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2003-12-11 NxM crosspoint switch with band translation
US10/734,603 Abandoned US20040214537A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2003-12-11 Signal distribution system cascadable AGC device and method
US11/164,768 Expired - Lifetime US7271640B2 (en) 2002-12-11 2005-12-05 Mixer circuit with bypass and mixing modes having constant even order generation and method of operation
US11/537,628 Expired - Lifetime US7526264B2 (en) 2002-12-11 2006-09-30 NxM crosspoint switch with band translation
US11/538,627 Expired - Lifetime US7558551B2 (en) 2002-12-11 2006-10-04 Signal distribution system cascadable AGC device and method
US11/618,922 Abandoned US20070111661A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2007-01-01 Integrated Crosspoint Switch with Band Translation
US12/477,339 Abandoned US20090239491A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2009-06-03 Signal distribution system cascadable agc device and method
US14/882,937 Abandoned US20170346519A9 (en) 2002-12-11 2015-10-14 Signal Distribution System Cascadable AGC Device and Method

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/735,523 Abandoned US20040209588A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2003-12-11 Mixer circuit with bypass and mixing modes having constant even order generation and method of operation

Family Applications After (8)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/734,604 Abandoned US20050005296A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2003-12-11 NxM crosspoint switch with band translation
US10/734,603 Abandoned US20040214537A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2003-12-11 Signal distribution system cascadable AGC device and method
US11/164,768 Expired - Lifetime US7271640B2 (en) 2002-12-11 2005-12-05 Mixer circuit with bypass and mixing modes having constant even order generation and method of operation
US11/537,628 Expired - Lifetime US7526264B2 (en) 2002-12-11 2006-09-30 NxM crosspoint switch with band translation
US11/538,627 Expired - Lifetime US7558551B2 (en) 2002-12-11 2006-10-04 Signal distribution system cascadable AGC device and method
US11/618,922 Abandoned US20070111661A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2007-01-01 Integrated Crosspoint Switch with Band Translation
US12/477,339 Abandoned US20090239491A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2009-06-03 Signal distribution system cascadable agc device and method
US14/882,937 Abandoned US20170346519A9 (en) 2002-12-11 2015-10-14 Signal Distribution System Cascadable AGC Device and Method

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (10) US20040209588A1 (en)
EP (3) EP1573931B1 (en)
JP (1) JP2006510247A (en)
AT (2) ATE458358T1 (en)
AU (3) AU2003293542A1 (en)
DE (2) DE60331350D1 (en)
DK (1) DK1574084T3 (en)
WO (3) WO2004054128A2 (en)

Cited By (39)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060031894A1 (en) * 2004-05-28 2006-02-09 Echostar Technologies Corporation Method and device for band translation
US20060205365A1 (en) * 2003-02-07 2006-09-14 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.C. Versatile baseband signal input current splitter
US20070019117A1 (en) * 2005-07-25 2007-01-25 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Low noise block converter
US20070082603A1 (en) * 2005-10-12 2007-04-12 John Norin Triple band combining approach to satellite signal distribution
US20070082644A1 (en) * 2005-10-12 2007-04-12 Kesse Ho Single local oscillator sharing in multi-band ka-band LNBS
US20070087720A1 (en) * 2005-10-14 2007-04-19 Skyworks Solutions, Inc. Downconverting mixer
US20080060023A1 (en) * 2004-10-11 2008-03-06 Invacom Ltd. Apparatus for Selected Provision of Linear and/or Circular Polarity Signals
US20080112385A1 (en) * 2006-11-03 2008-05-15 Rf Magic, Inc. Circuits, systems and methods for constructing a composite signal
US20080151809A1 (en) * 2006-11-01 2008-06-26 Siemens Corporation Research, Inc. Hierarchical Frame Structure for OFDMA Systems with Relay
WO2008089315A3 (en) * 2007-01-19 2009-01-22 Rf Magic Inc Circuits, systems, and methods for constructing a composite signal
US20090253375A1 (en) * 2005-12-20 2009-10-08 Fachhochschule Aachen Dual Mode Funk
US20100053836A1 (en) * 2007-03-26 2010-03-04 Lincheng Xiu Two stage surge protection for single wire multi switch transceiver
US7688277B2 (en) * 2004-06-04 2010-03-30 Radiall Usa, Inc. Circuit component and circuit component assembly for antenna circuit
US20100226291A1 (en) * 2009-03-03 2010-09-09 Oleksandr Gorbachov Multi-channel radio frequency front end circuit
US20100244981A1 (en) * 2009-03-30 2010-09-30 Oleksandr Gorbachov Radio frequency power divider and combiner circuit
US20100277252A1 (en) * 2009-05-04 2010-11-04 Oleksandr Gorbachov Multi-mode radio frequency front end module
US20120062420A1 (en) * 2007-12-06 2012-03-15 Chang Donald C D Satellite Ground Terminal Incorporating a Smart Antenna that Rejects interference
US20120167147A1 (en) * 2005-05-27 2012-06-28 Echostar Technologies L.L.C. Low Noise Block Converter Feedhorn
US20120256616A1 (en) * 2007-12-20 2012-10-11 Anritsu Company HAND-HELD MICROWAVE SPECTRUM ANALYZER WITH OPERATION RANGE FROM 9 KHz TO OVER 20 GHz
US20120278087A1 (en) * 2009-10-07 2012-11-01 Nec Corporation Multiband compressor and method of adjusting the same
US20130078938A1 (en) * 2011-09-26 2013-03-28 Kohji Motoyama Low noise converter of satellite broadcasting receiver
US8515342B2 (en) * 2005-10-12 2013-08-20 The Directv Group, Inc. Dynamic current sharing in KA/KU LNB design
US8928428B2 (en) 2010-12-22 2015-01-06 Rfaxis, Inc. On-die radio frequency directional coupler
US9093967B2 (en) 2011-05-02 2015-07-28 Rfaxis, Inc. Power amplifier with co-existence filter
US9143184B2 (en) 2010-10-19 2015-09-22 Rfaxis, Inc. Radio frequency multi-port switches
US20160204854A1 (en) * 2010-05-02 2016-07-14 Viasat, Inc. Flexible capacity satellite communications system
US20160211880A1 (en) * 2015-01-16 2016-07-21 Choi Jae-Won Method and apparatus for detecting power
US20170163293A1 (en) * 2015-12-04 2017-06-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Electronic device including single antenna supporting multiple communication protocols and operating method thereof
US20170366150A1 (en) * 2014-12-22 2017-12-21 Solid, Inc. Amplification apparatus having single-input multi-output structure
US20180184223A1 (en) * 2016-12-23 2018-06-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Amplifier module and control method thereof
US10034030B2 (en) 2013-09-24 2018-07-24 DISH Technologies L.L.C. Field-programmable low-noise block downconverter
US10511379B2 (en) 2010-05-02 2019-12-17 Viasat, Inc. Flexible beamforming for satellite communications
US10721363B2 (en) 2017-02-09 2020-07-21 Sony Corporation System and method for controlling notifications in an electronic device according to user status
US10985833B2 (en) 2017-04-10 2021-04-20 Viasat, Inc. Coverage area adjustment to adapt satellite communications
US20220038174A1 (en) * 2017-06-12 2022-02-03 Ast & Science, Llc System and method for high throughput fractionated satellites (htfs) for direct connectivity to and from end user devices and terminals using flight formations of small or very small satellites
US11437992B2 (en) 2020-07-30 2022-09-06 Mobix Labs, Inc. Low-loss mm-wave CMOS resonant switch
US11665043B2 (en) 2020-02-29 2023-05-30 Space Exploration Technologies Corp. Digital pre-distortion compensation using combined direct and indirect learning
US11700027B2 (en) 2020-05-05 2023-07-11 Mobix Labs, Inc. Multi-mode WiFi bluetooth RF front-ends
US11870540B2 (en) 2017-06-12 2024-01-09 Ast & Science, Llc System and method for high throughput fractionated satellites (HTFS) for direct connectivity to and from end user devices and terminals using flight formations of small or very small satellites

Families Citing this family (99)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7130576B1 (en) * 2001-11-07 2006-10-31 Entropic Communications, Inc. Signal selector and combiner for broadband content distribution
US7954127B2 (en) 2002-09-25 2011-05-31 The Directv Group, Inc. Direct broadcast signal distribution methods
JP4080298B2 (en) * 2002-10-29 2008-04-23 松下電器産業株式会社 amplifier
KR100546325B1 (en) * 2003-05-09 2006-01-26 삼성전자주식회사 Automatic gain controller providing for large signal to noise ratio and low power consumption by fine gain controlling at almost maximum gain region, mobile phone having it and method thereof
US7324799B2 (en) * 2003-06-10 2008-01-29 Nokia Corporation Multiband mixer
US7286795B2 (en) * 2003-07-23 2007-10-23 Mds America, Inc. System and method for effective reception and transmission of satellite signals
US7421259B2 (en) * 2004-04-16 2008-09-02 Broadcom Corporation RF mixer with high local oscillator linearity using multiple local oscillator phases
US7248847B2 (en) * 2004-04-22 2007-07-24 Kyocera Wireless Corp. System and method for adaptively controlling receiver gain switch points
US8095098B2 (en) * 2004-06-01 2012-01-10 Time Warner Cable Inc. Apparatus and methods for network interface and spectrum management
MY142732A (en) * 2004-06-28 2010-12-31 Sony Emcs Malaysia Sdn Bhd Electronic switch for tv signal booster
JP4451236B2 (en) * 2004-07-16 2010-04-14 三菱電機株式会社 Pulse modulation circuit
US7386290B2 (en) * 2004-07-30 2008-06-10 Broadcom Corporation RX dual-band mixer
FR2877517B1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2007-02-23 Micsystemes Sa Sa "METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTING HIGH FREQUENCY SIGNALS IN A CABLE NETWORK IN TWILIGHT PAIRS"
US20060251115A1 (en) * 2004-12-03 2006-11-09 Haque Samudra E Broadband multi-service, switching, transmission and distribution architecture for low-cost telecommunications networks
US7509049B2 (en) * 2005-01-24 2009-03-24 Emcore Corporation System for selectively combining satellite signals sent to a user through an optical fiber
GB2423205A (en) * 2005-02-10 2006-08-16 Zarlink Semiconductor Ltd Multi-channel tuner
US8621525B2 (en) 2005-04-01 2013-12-31 The Directv Group, Inc. Signal injection via power supply
US7987486B2 (en) 2005-04-01 2011-07-26 The Directv Group, Inc. System architecture for control and signal distribution on coaxial cable
US7958531B2 (en) * 2005-04-01 2011-06-07 The Directv Group, Inc. Automatic level control for incoming signals of different signal strengths
US7945932B2 (en) 2005-04-01 2011-05-17 The Directv Group, Inc. Narrow bandwidth signal delivery system
US8024759B2 (en) 2005-04-01 2011-09-20 The Directv Group, Inc. Backwards-compatible frequency translation module for satellite video delivery
US7950038B2 (en) 2005-04-01 2011-05-24 The Directv Group, Inc. Transponder tuning and mapping
US7900230B2 (en) 2005-04-01 2011-03-01 The Directv Group, Inc. Intelligent two-way switching network
US8549565B2 (en) 2005-04-01 2013-10-01 The Directv Group, Inc. Power balancing signal combiner
JP4050288B2 (en) 2005-08-10 2008-02-20 シャープ株式会社 Integrated circuit device and low noise block down converter having the same
US7937732B2 (en) 2005-09-02 2011-05-03 The Directv Group, Inc. Network fraud prevention via registration and verification
US8789115B2 (en) 2005-09-02 2014-07-22 The Directv Group, Inc. Frequency translation module discovery and configuration
US7609218B2 (en) 2005-10-12 2009-10-27 The Directv Group, Inc. Enhanced back assembly for Ka/Ku ODU
WO2007047364A2 (en) * 2005-10-12 2007-04-26 The Directv Group, Inc. Single local oscillator sharing in multi-band ka-band lnbs
US7663543B2 (en) 2005-10-12 2010-02-16 The Directv Group, Inc. Alignment method for multi-satellite consumer receiver antennas
US8019275B2 (en) 2005-10-12 2011-09-13 The Directv Group, Inc. Band upconverter approach to KA/KU signal distribution
US7636067B2 (en) 2005-10-12 2009-12-22 The Directv Group, Inc. Ka/Ku antenna alignment
US20070105514A1 (en) * 2005-11-08 2007-05-10 Chao-Wen Tseng Low Noise, High Linearity TV Tuner Architecture with Switched Fixed-Gain LNA
KR100653199B1 (en) * 2005-11-18 2006-12-05 삼성전자주식회사 Rf receiving apparatus and method for removing leakage component of received signal using local signal
US7554380B2 (en) * 2005-12-12 2009-06-30 Icera Canada ULC System for reducing second order intermodulation products from differential circuits
AR061528A1 (en) * 2006-06-19 2008-09-03 Directv Group Inc DEDICATED TUNER FOR NETWORK ADMINISTRATION FUNCTIONS
US7400193B2 (en) 2006-06-29 2008-07-15 Itt Manufacturing Enterprises, Inc. Ultra wide band, differential input/output, high frequency active splitter in an integrated circuit
US8719875B2 (en) * 2006-11-06 2014-05-06 The Directv Group, Inc. Satellite television IP bitstream generator receiving unit
US20080175175A1 (en) * 2007-01-18 2008-07-24 Yair Oren Hybrid Passive Active Broadband Antenna for a Distributed Antenna System
US9276656B2 (en) * 2007-02-19 2016-03-01 Corning Optical Communications Wireless Ltd Method and system for improving uplink performance
US7774016B2 (en) * 2007-02-19 2010-08-10 Raven Antenna Systems Inc. Satellite communications interoperability module and down-conversion method
US20080247416A1 (en) * 2007-04-04 2008-10-09 Finisar Corporation Circuit for tapping a line in a network diagnostic component
US8712318B2 (en) * 2007-05-29 2014-04-29 The Directv Group, Inc. Integrated multi-sat LNB and frequency translation module
US7702296B2 (en) * 2007-08-01 2010-04-20 Mediatek Usa Inc. Transmit/receive switch
TW200908540A (en) * 2007-08-02 2009-02-16 Univ Nat Central Wideband cascade mixer
US8238813B1 (en) 2007-08-20 2012-08-07 The Directv Group, Inc. Computationally efficient design for broadcast satellite single wire and/or direct demod interface
US8107910B2 (en) * 2007-08-29 2012-01-31 Qualcomm, Incorporated Differential to single-ended conversion for radio frequency devices
US9942618B2 (en) 2007-10-31 2018-04-10 The Directv Group, Inc. SMATV headend using IP transport stream input and method for operating the same
US20090163160A1 (en) * 2007-12-21 2009-06-25 Motorola, Inc. Adaptive responsivity rf receiver detector system
TW200931791A (en) * 2008-01-03 2009-07-16 Univ Nat Central Method of third-order transconductance cancellation and high-linearity mixer thereof
CN101599779B (en) * 2008-06-02 2013-06-05 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 Intermediate-frequency signal loss compensating circuit
US8571510B2 (en) * 2008-08-18 2013-10-29 Qualcomm Incorporated High linearity low noise receiver with load switching
US8200181B1 (en) * 2008-08-29 2012-06-12 Rf Micro Devices, Inc. Noise reduction in a dual radio frequency receiver
GB2463702A (en) * 2008-09-23 2010-03-24 Technetix Group Ltd An amplifier system for cable television network which has a power delay device
US20100279641A1 (en) * 2008-12-31 2010-11-04 Siu-Chuang Ivan Lu Receiver for wireless communication system
US8929848B2 (en) * 2008-12-31 2015-01-06 Mediatek Singapore Pte. Ltd. Interference-robust receiver for a wireless communication system
BRPI1006912A2 (en) * 2009-01-06 2016-02-16 Directv Group Inc frequency drift estimation for low cost outdoor unit
US8526898B2 (en) 2009-04-17 2013-09-03 Maxlinear, Inc. Wideband tuner architecture
ES2370550A1 (en) * 2009-05-26 2011-12-19 Televes S.A. Device for distributing telecommunication signals
US8179186B2 (en) * 2009-08-04 2012-05-15 Bae Systems Information And Electronic Systems Integration Inc. Differential switch with off-state isolation enhancement
CN101655711B (en) * 2009-08-25 2012-02-01 广东电网公司电力科学研究院 Device for acquiring and processing plant-level automatic generation control instruction
JP5355366B2 (en) * 2009-12-02 2013-11-27 株式会社東芝 Differential amplifier circuit and radio receiver
JP5044674B2 (en) * 2010-03-26 2012-10-10 株式会社東芝 Frequency converter and transmitter using the same
JP5488116B2 (en) * 2010-03-30 2014-05-14 ソニー株式会社 Receiver
TWI407718B (en) * 2010-05-13 2013-09-01 Wistron Neweb Corp Optical low-noise block downconverter, multiple dwelling unit and related satellite television system
US8922923B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2014-12-30 Seagate Technology Llc Interleaved automatic gain control for asymmetric data signals
DE102011006566A1 (en) * 2011-03-31 2012-10-04 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Devices for automatically setting a gain or damping factor
US9131265B2 (en) * 2011-05-19 2015-09-08 Maxlinear, Inc. Method and system for providing satellite television service to a premises
JP2013038646A (en) * 2011-08-09 2013-02-21 Sony Corp Signal transmission device, reception circuit and electronic apparatus
TWI478484B (en) * 2011-09-19 2015-03-21 Richwave Technology Corp Multiple-input multiple-output low-noise block downconverter and low-noise module
US9154356B2 (en) * 2012-05-25 2015-10-06 Qualcomm Incorporated Low noise amplifiers for carrier aggregation
US9736436B2 (en) * 2012-07-25 2017-08-15 Echostar Technologies L.L.C. Systems and methods for transponder stacking
US8954019B2 (en) * 2012-08-03 2015-02-10 Blackberry Limited Mobile wireless communications device with LNA front end circuit and related methods
JP5982259B2 (en) * 2012-11-06 2016-08-31 Kddi株式会社 Low noise amplifier and wireless communication device
GB2510247A (en) * 2012-12-03 2014-07-30 Global Invacom Ltd Apparatus for distribution of data signals to a plurality of locations
US8903343B2 (en) 2013-01-25 2014-12-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Single-input multiple-output amplifiers with independent gain control per output
US20140328436A1 (en) * 2013-05-03 2014-11-06 Nvidia Corporation Receiver front-end architecture for carrier aggregation
US9548779B2 (en) * 2014-04-03 2017-01-17 Rafael Microelectronics, Inc. Multi-user satellite receiving system and method thereof
ES2556150A1 (en) * 2014-07-07 2016-01-13 Televes, S.A. Device for transmitting telecommunication signals (Machine-translation by Google Translate, not legally binding)
US9515690B1 (en) 2014-08-22 2016-12-06 Interstate Electronics Corporation Receiver with multi-spectrum parallel amplification
US9356639B1 (en) 2014-08-22 2016-05-31 Interstate Electronics Corporation Receiver with multi-spectrum parallel amplification
US9246664B1 (en) * 2014-08-22 2016-01-26 Interstate Electronics Corporation Receiver with multi-spectrum parallel amplification
KR101868965B1 (en) * 2014-12-30 2018-06-19 주식회사 쏠리드 Remote apparatus of distributed antenna system
GB201506706D0 (en) * 2015-04-21 2015-06-03 Pro Brand Internat Europ Ltd Improvements to low noise block
US10177722B2 (en) 2016-01-12 2019-01-08 Qualcomm Incorporated Carrier aggregation low-noise amplifier with tunable integrated power splitter
US11366455B2 (en) 2016-05-09 2022-06-21 Strong Force Iot Portfolio 2016, Llc Methods and systems for optimization of data collection and storage using 3rd party data from a data marketplace in an industrial internet of things environment
US11774944B2 (en) 2016-05-09 2023-10-03 Strong Force Iot Portfolio 2016, Llc Methods and systems for the industrial internet of things
US11327475B2 (en) 2016-05-09 2022-05-10 Strong Force Iot Portfolio 2016, Llc Methods and systems for intelligent collection and analysis of vehicle data
CA3045439A1 (en) 2016-05-09 2017-11-16 Strong Force Iot Portfolio 2016, Llc Methods and systems for the industrial internet of things
US10983507B2 (en) 2016-05-09 2021-04-20 Strong Force Iot Portfolio 2016, Llc Method for data collection and frequency analysis with self-organization functionality
US11237546B2 (en) 2016-06-15 2022-02-01 Strong Force loT Portfolio 2016, LLC Method and system of modifying a data collection trajectory for vehicles
US10523305B2 (en) 2017-05-11 2019-12-31 Wilson Electronics, Llc Variable channelized bandwidth booster
CA3072045A1 (en) 2017-08-02 2019-02-07 Strong Force Iot Portfolio 2016, Llc Methods and systems for detection in an industrial internet of things data collection environment with large data sets
US11397428B2 (en) 2017-08-02 2022-07-26 Strong Force Iot Portfolio 2016, Llc Self-organizing systems and methods for data collection
US10778200B2 (en) * 2018-05-24 2020-09-15 Swiftlink Technologies Inc. Wide-band 360 degree phase shifter utilizing right-hand and left-hand transmission line switches for RF communications
CN109286449B (en) * 2018-10-08 2024-03-08 中兵通信科技股份有限公司 Equipment tester for error code test and simulation of satellite transponder
JP2020205472A (en) * 2019-06-14 2020-12-24 株式会社村田製作所 High frequency circuit and communication device
US11177988B2 (en) * 2020-01-23 2021-11-16 Shenzhen GOODIX Technology Co., Ltd. Receiver circuits with blocker attenuating mixer
US11762408B1 (en) 2022-04-06 2023-09-19 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Methods and systems for selecting voltage for a substrate connection of a bypass switch

Citations (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4705967A (en) * 1985-10-31 1987-11-10 Hazeltine Corporation Multifunction floating FET circuit
US4931802A (en) * 1988-03-11 1990-06-05 Communications Satellite Corporation Multiple spot-beam systems for satellite communications
US5073930A (en) * 1989-10-19 1991-12-17 Green James A Method and system for receiving and distributing satellite transmitted television signals
US5184084A (en) * 1990-07-28 1993-02-02 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Double band frequency converting system
US5220419A (en) * 1991-04-08 1993-06-15 Hughes Aircraft Company Automatic RF leveling in passenger aircraft video distribution system
US5319673A (en) * 1992-04-10 1994-06-07 Cd Radio Inc. Radio frequency broadcasting systems and methods using two low-cost geosynchronous satellites
US5339484A (en) * 1993-03-02 1994-08-23 Ez Paintr Corporation Closed end paint roller and method of manufacture thereof
US5715532A (en) * 1995-01-24 1998-02-03 Matsushita Electric Industrial, Co. Frequency converter apparatus with distortion compensating circuit
US5881369A (en) * 1996-07-03 1999-03-09 Northern Telecom Limited Dual mode transceiver
US6072994A (en) * 1995-08-31 2000-06-06 Northrop Grumman Corporation Digitally programmable multifunction radio system architecture
US6295282B1 (en) * 1998-08-03 2001-09-25 Motorola, Inc. Calibrated low loss radio frequency switch matrix
US6408164B1 (en) * 1997-01-17 2002-06-18 Com Dev Limited Analog processor for digital satellites
US6434374B1 (en) * 1996-03-29 2002-08-13 Thomson Licensing S.A. Apparatus for controlling the conversion gain of a down converter
US6498926B1 (en) * 1997-12-09 2002-12-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Programmable linear receiver having a variable IIP3 point
US6509777B2 (en) * 2001-01-23 2003-01-21 Resonext Communications, Inc. Method and apparatus for reducing DC offset
US6510185B2 (en) * 1998-07-24 2003-01-21 Gct Semiconductor, Inc. Single chip CMOS transmitter/receiver
US6584304B1 (en) * 1998-11-30 2003-06-24 Robert Bosch Gmbh Switchable wide band receiver front end for a multiband receiver
US20030190900A1 (en) * 2001-04-06 2003-10-09 Masashi Yasuda Wide band tuner
US6652682B1 (en) * 2001-10-17 2003-11-25 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Propellant composition comprising nano-sized boron particles
US20040203337A1 (en) * 2002-09-05 2004-10-14 Xytrans, Inc. Low cost VSAT MMIC transceiver with automatic power control
US6882834B1 (en) * 2002-04-26 2005-04-19 Analog Devices, Inc. Direct conversion receiver apparatus
US6987958B1 (en) * 1998-12-24 2006-01-17 Cingular Wirless Ii, Inc. Method for combining communication beams in a wireless communication system

Family Cites Families (32)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3011160A (en) * 1960-03-23 1961-11-28 Gen Dynamics Corp Error detection and compensation for quantized signal recording system
US4345251A (en) * 1981-02-20 1982-08-17 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Solid state commutator switch
CA1212746A (en) * 1983-01-31 1986-10-14 R. Ian Macdonald Optoelectronically switched phase shifter for radar and satellite phased array antennas
US4758803A (en) * 1987-07-13 1988-07-19 General Electric Company Marginal oscillator for acoustic monitoring of curing of plastics
US4953184A (en) * 1989-06-01 1990-08-28 Motorola, Inc. Complex bandpass digital filter
CA2066851C (en) * 1991-06-13 1996-08-06 Edwin A. Kelley Multiple user digital receiver apparatus and method with combined multiple frequency channels
US5339454A (en) * 1991-08-05 1994-08-16 Ford Motor Company Automatic gain control for RF amplifier
JP3004105B2 (en) * 1991-11-15 2000-01-31 株式会社東芝 Television receiver
US6334061B1 (en) * 1994-12-21 2001-12-25 Itt Manufacturing Enterprises, Inc. Integrated vehicle applique unit for the position enhanced cellular system
US5488379A (en) * 1995-01-05 1996-01-30 Hughes Aircraft Company Apparatus and method for positioning an antenna in a remote ground terminal
US5546050A (en) * 1995-03-14 1996-08-13 The Boeing Company Radio frequency bus leveling system
US5654774A (en) * 1995-06-06 1997-08-05 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Tuner for digital satellite receiver
DE19528589C1 (en) 1995-08-03 1997-01-09 Kathrein Werke Kg Satellite reception system with controllable head-end
US5608724A (en) 1995-09-27 1997-03-04 Nippondenso Co., Ltd. Dynamically reconfigurable frequency division multiplexer and modulator
US6005861A (en) * 1995-11-22 1999-12-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Home multimedia network architecture
JPH11511937A (en) * 1996-06-19 1999-10-12 コーニンクレッカ、フィリップス エレクトロニクス、エヌ.ヴィ. Video communication network
US5852662A (en) * 1996-07-11 1998-12-22 Lucent Technologies Inc. Scrambler bypass system
US5757941A (en) * 1996-08-23 1998-05-26 Gibson Guitar Corp. Audio signal patching mixer and method
US5929895A (en) 1996-11-27 1999-07-27 Rockwell International Corporation Low cost hybrid video distribution system for aircraft in-flight entertainment systems
KR100265236B1 (en) * 1997-08-22 2000-09-15 윤종용 A tv-set having a tuner combinig use for analog/digital
US6071239A (en) * 1997-10-27 2000-06-06 Cribbs; Robert W. Method and apparatus for lipolytic therapy using ultrasound energy
DE19749120C2 (en) 1997-11-06 2002-07-18 Kathrein Werke Kg Satellite reception system and associated method for operating an antenna reception system
AU2456899A (en) * 1998-02-18 1999-09-06 Viasat, Inc. Method for improving inter-beam capacity switching for multiple spot beam satellite systems
GB9821839D0 (en) * 1998-10-08 1998-12-02 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv Radio receiver
KR100275708B1 (en) * 1998-12-31 2000-12-15 윤종용 Digital broadcasting signal processing device and method for improving channel interference of analog broadcasting
US6417733B1 (en) * 1999-07-06 2002-07-09 Texas Instruments Incorporated High output voltage swing class AB operational amplifier output stage
JP3653215B2 (en) * 1999-10-01 2005-05-25 シャープ株式会社 Satellite broadcast receiving system, and low noise block down converter and satellite broadcast receiver used in satellite broadcast receiving system
GB2369007B (en) 2000-11-11 2002-11-06 3Com Corp Dual purpose spread spectrum radio receivers with controlled frequency rejection
DE10064370C1 (en) * 2000-12-21 2002-06-27 Ankaro Otto Wolf Kg Multiswitch head unit, satellite receiving system and method for installing a satellite receiving system
DE20103220U1 (en) * 2001-02-23 2001-06-13 Technisat Digital Gmbh Converter for satellite systems
US7130576B1 (en) * 2001-11-07 2006-10-31 Entropic Communications, Inc. Signal selector and combiner for broadband content distribution
US7088975B1 (en) * 2002-01-04 2006-08-08 Broadcom Corporation Automatic gain control system and method using multiple local AGC loops

Patent Citations (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4705967A (en) * 1985-10-31 1987-11-10 Hazeltine Corporation Multifunction floating FET circuit
US4931802A (en) * 1988-03-11 1990-06-05 Communications Satellite Corporation Multiple spot-beam systems for satellite communications
US5073930A (en) * 1989-10-19 1991-12-17 Green James A Method and system for receiving and distributing satellite transmitted television signals
US5184084A (en) * 1990-07-28 1993-02-02 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Double band frequency converting system
US5220419A (en) * 1991-04-08 1993-06-15 Hughes Aircraft Company Automatic RF leveling in passenger aircraft video distribution system
US5319673A (en) * 1992-04-10 1994-06-07 Cd Radio Inc. Radio frequency broadcasting systems and methods using two low-cost geosynchronous satellites
US5339484A (en) * 1993-03-02 1994-08-23 Ez Paintr Corporation Closed end paint roller and method of manufacture thereof
US5715532A (en) * 1995-01-24 1998-02-03 Matsushita Electric Industrial, Co. Frequency converter apparatus with distortion compensating circuit
US6072994A (en) * 1995-08-31 2000-06-06 Northrop Grumman Corporation Digitally programmable multifunction radio system architecture
US6434374B1 (en) * 1996-03-29 2002-08-13 Thomson Licensing S.A. Apparatus for controlling the conversion gain of a down converter
US5881369A (en) * 1996-07-03 1999-03-09 Northern Telecom Limited Dual mode transceiver
US6408164B1 (en) * 1997-01-17 2002-06-18 Com Dev Limited Analog processor for digital satellites
US6498926B1 (en) * 1997-12-09 2002-12-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Programmable linear receiver having a variable IIP3 point
US6510185B2 (en) * 1998-07-24 2003-01-21 Gct Semiconductor, Inc. Single chip CMOS transmitter/receiver
US6295282B1 (en) * 1998-08-03 2001-09-25 Motorola, Inc. Calibrated low loss radio frequency switch matrix
US6584304B1 (en) * 1998-11-30 2003-06-24 Robert Bosch Gmbh Switchable wide band receiver front end for a multiband receiver
US6987958B1 (en) * 1998-12-24 2006-01-17 Cingular Wirless Ii, Inc. Method for combining communication beams in a wireless communication system
US6509777B2 (en) * 2001-01-23 2003-01-21 Resonext Communications, Inc. Method and apparatus for reducing DC offset
US20030190900A1 (en) * 2001-04-06 2003-10-09 Masashi Yasuda Wide band tuner
US6652682B1 (en) * 2001-10-17 2003-11-25 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Propellant composition comprising nano-sized boron particles
US6882834B1 (en) * 2002-04-26 2005-04-19 Analog Devices, Inc. Direct conversion receiver apparatus
US20040203337A1 (en) * 2002-09-05 2004-10-14 Xytrans, Inc. Low cost VSAT MMIC transceiver with automatic power control

Cited By (82)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20100069024A1 (en) * 2003-02-07 2010-03-18 St-Ericsson Sa Baseband signal input current splitter
US20060205365A1 (en) * 2003-02-07 2006-09-14 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.C. Versatile baseband signal input current splitter
US7643847B2 (en) * 2003-02-07 2010-01-05 St-Ericsson Sa Versatile baseband signal input current splitter
US7949367B2 (en) 2003-02-07 2011-05-24 St-Ericsson Sa Baseband signal input current splitter
US20060048197A1 (en) * 2004-05-28 2006-03-02 Echostar Technologies Corporation Method and device for band translation
US7792486B2 (en) * 2004-05-28 2010-09-07 Echostar Technologies L.L.C. Method and device for band translation
US20060031894A1 (en) * 2004-05-28 2006-02-09 Echostar Technologies Corporation Method and device for band translation
US7502587B2 (en) 2004-05-28 2009-03-10 Echostar Technologies Corporation Method and device for band translation
US8855547B2 (en) 2004-05-28 2014-10-07 Echostar Technologies L.L.C. Method and device for band translation
US7688277B2 (en) * 2004-06-04 2010-03-30 Radiall Usa, Inc. Circuit component and circuit component assembly for antenna circuit
US20080060023A1 (en) * 2004-10-11 2008-03-06 Invacom Ltd. Apparatus for Selected Provision of Linear and/or Circular Polarity Signals
US9015771B2 (en) * 2004-10-11 2015-04-21 Global Invacom Limited Apparatus for selected provision of linear and/or circular polarity signals
US20120167147A1 (en) * 2005-05-27 2012-06-28 Echostar Technologies L.L.C. Low Noise Block Converter Feedhorn
US9179170B2 (en) * 2005-05-27 2015-11-03 EchoStar Technologies, L.L.C. Low noise block converter feedhorn
US20070019117A1 (en) * 2005-07-25 2007-01-25 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Low noise block converter
US20070082644A1 (en) * 2005-10-12 2007-04-12 Kesse Ho Single local oscillator sharing in multi-band ka-band LNBS
US8515342B2 (en) * 2005-10-12 2013-08-20 The Directv Group, Inc. Dynamic current sharing in KA/KU LNB design
US9282299B2 (en) * 2005-10-12 2016-03-08 The Directv Group, Inc. Single local oscillator sharing in multi-band Ka-band LNBS
US7991348B2 (en) 2005-10-12 2011-08-02 The Directv Group, Inc. Triple band combining approach to satellite signal distribution
US20070082603A1 (en) * 2005-10-12 2007-04-12 John Norin Triple band combining approach to satellite signal distribution
US20070087720A1 (en) * 2005-10-14 2007-04-19 Skyworks Solutions, Inc. Downconverting mixer
KR101280212B1 (en) 2005-10-14 2013-06-28 스카이워크스 솔루션즈, 인코포레이티드 Downconverting mixer
US7512393B2 (en) * 2005-10-14 2009-03-31 Skyworks Solutions, Inc. Downconverting mixer
US20090253375A1 (en) * 2005-12-20 2009-10-08 Fachhochschule Aachen Dual Mode Funk
US8699945B2 (en) * 2005-12-20 2014-04-15 Fachhochschule Aachen Dual mode funk
US20080151809A1 (en) * 2006-11-01 2008-06-26 Siemens Corporation Research, Inc. Hierarchical Frame Structure for OFDMA Systems with Relay
US8204018B2 (en) * 2006-11-01 2012-06-19 Nokia Siemens Networks Gmbh & Co. Kg Hierarchical frame structure for OFDMA systems with relay
US8086170B2 (en) 2006-11-03 2011-12-27 Rf Magic, Inc. Satellite signal frequency translation and stacking
US8023912B2 (en) 2006-11-03 2011-09-20 Rf Magic, Inc. Circuits, systems and methods for frequency translation and signal distribution
US9219557B2 (en) 2006-11-03 2015-12-22 Entropic Communications, Llc Circuits, systems and methods for constructing a composite signal
US10439746B2 (en) 2006-11-03 2019-10-08 Entropic Communications, Llc Satellite signal frequency translation and stacking
US20080112385A1 (en) * 2006-11-03 2008-05-15 Rf Magic, Inc. Circuits, systems and methods for constructing a composite signal
US11616585B2 (en) 2006-11-03 2023-03-28 Entropic Communications, Llc Satellite signal frequency translation and stacking
US8009725B2 (en) 2007-01-19 2011-08-30 Rf Magic, Inc. Translational switching system and signal distribution system employing same
WO2008089315A3 (en) * 2007-01-19 2009-01-22 Rf Magic Inc Circuits, systems, and methods for constructing a composite signal
US20100071009A1 (en) * 2007-03-26 2010-03-18 Thomson Licensing Six port linear network single wire multi switch transceiver
US8699983B2 (en) 2007-03-26 2014-04-15 Thomson Licensing Six port linear network single wire multi switch transceiver
US20100053836A1 (en) * 2007-03-26 2010-03-04 Lincheng Xiu Two stage surge protection for single wire multi switch transceiver
US20120062420A1 (en) * 2007-12-06 2012-03-15 Chang Donald C D Satellite Ground Terminal Incorporating a Smart Antenna that Rejects interference
US10490892B2 (en) * 2007-12-06 2019-11-26 Spatial Digital Systems, Inc. Satellite ground terminal incorporating a smart antenna that rejects interference
US9103856B2 (en) * 2007-12-20 2015-08-11 Anritsu Company Hand-held microwave spectrum analyzer with operation range from 9 KHz to over 20 GHz
US20120256616A1 (en) * 2007-12-20 2012-10-11 Anritsu Company HAND-HELD MICROWAVE SPECTRUM ANALYZER WITH OPERATION RANGE FROM 9 KHz TO OVER 20 GHz
US20100226291A1 (en) * 2009-03-03 2010-09-09 Oleksandr Gorbachov Multi-channel radio frequency front end circuit
US20100226292A1 (en) * 2009-03-03 2010-09-09 Oleksandr Gorbachov Multi-channel radio frequency front end circuit with full receive diversity for multi-path mitigation
US20100225414A1 (en) * 2009-03-03 2010-09-09 Oleksandr Gorbachov Multi-channel radio frequency front end circuit with full transmit and receive diversity for multi-path mitigation
WO2010101584A1 (en) * 2009-03-03 2010-09-10 Rfaxis, Inc. Multi-channel radio frequency front end circuit
US8325632B2 (en) 2009-03-03 2012-12-04 Rfaxis, Inc. Multi-channel radio frequency front end circuit with full receive diversity for multi-path mitigation
US9231680B2 (en) 2009-03-03 2016-01-05 Rfaxis, Inc. Multi-channel radio frequency front end circuit
US20100244981A1 (en) * 2009-03-30 2010-09-30 Oleksandr Gorbachov Radio frequency power divider and combiner circuit
US8467738B2 (en) 2009-05-04 2013-06-18 Rfaxis, Inc. Multi-mode radio frequency front end module
US20100277252A1 (en) * 2009-05-04 2010-11-04 Oleksandr Gorbachov Multi-mode radio frequency front end module
US20120278087A1 (en) * 2009-10-07 2012-11-01 Nec Corporation Multiband compressor and method of adjusting the same
US11637629B2 (en) 2010-05-01 2023-04-25 Viasat Inc. Flexible capacity satellite communications system
US10313002B2 (en) * 2010-05-02 2019-06-04 Viasat, Inc. Flexible capacity satellite communications system
US11909508B2 (en) 2010-05-02 2024-02-20 Viasat, Inc. Flexible capacity satellite communications system
US20160204854A1 (en) * 2010-05-02 2016-07-14 Viasat, Inc. Flexible capacity satellite communications system
US11601195B2 (en) 2010-05-02 2023-03-07 Viasat Inc. Flexible beamforming for satellite communications
US11265078B2 (en) 2010-05-02 2022-03-01 Viasat, Inc. Flexible beamforming for satellite communications
US11171721B2 (en) 2010-05-02 2021-11-09 Viasat, Inc. Flexible capacity satellite communications system
US10511379B2 (en) 2010-05-02 2019-12-17 Viasat, Inc. Flexible beamforming for satellite communications
US10498433B2 (en) 2010-05-02 2019-12-03 Viasat, Inc. Flexible capacity satellite communications system
US9143184B2 (en) 2010-10-19 2015-09-22 Rfaxis, Inc. Radio frequency multi-port switches
US8928428B2 (en) 2010-12-22 2015-01-06 Rfaxis, Inc. On-die radio frequency directional coupler
US9093967B2 (en) 2011-05-02 2015-07-28 Rfaxis, Inc. Power amplifier with co-existence filter
US8948714B2 (en) * 2011-09-26 2015-02-03 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Low noise converter of satellite broadcasting receiver
US20130078938A1 (en) * 2011-09-26 2013-03-28 Kohji Motoyama Low noise converter of satellite broadcasting receiver
US10034030B2 (en) 2013-09-24 2018-07-24 DISH Technologies L.L.C. Field-programmable low-noise block downconverter
US20170366150A1 (en) * 2014-12-22 2017-12-21 Solid, Inc. Amplification apparatus having single-input multi-output structure
US10333481B2 (en) * 2014-12-22 2019-06-25 Solid, Inc. Amplification apparatus having single-input multi-output structure
US9748912B2 (en) * 2015-01-16 2017-08-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Method and apparatus for detecting power
US20160211880A1 (en) * 2015-01-16 2016-07-21 Choi Jae-Won Method and apparatus for detecting power
US20170163293A1 (en) * 2015-12-04 2017-06-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Electronic device including single antenna supporting multiple communication protocols and operating method thereof
US10327087B2 (en) * 2016-12-23 2019-06-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Amplifier module and control method thereof
US20180184223A1 (en) * 2016-12-23 2018-06-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Amplifier module and control method thereof
US10721363B2 (en) 2017-02-09 2020-07-21 Sony Corporation System and method for controlling notifications in an electronic device according to user status
US10985833B2 (en) 2017-04-10 2021-04-20 Viasat, Inc. Coverage area adjustment to adapt satellite communications
US11770179B2 (en) 2017-04-10 2023-09-26 Viasat, Inc. Coverage area adjustment to adapt satellite communications
US20220038174A1 (en) * 2017-06-12 2022-02-03 Ast & Science, Llc System and method for high throughput fractionated satellites (htfs) for direct connectivity to and from end user devices and terminals using flight formations of small or very small satellites
US11870540B2 (en) 2017-06-12 2024-01-09 Ast & Science, Llc System and method for high throughput fractionated satellites (HTFS) for direct connectivity to and from end user devices and terminals using flight formations of small or very small satellites
US11665043B2 (en) 2020-02-29 2023-05-30 Space Exploration Technologies Corp. Digital pre-distortion compensation using combined direct and indirect learning
US11700027B2 (en) 2020-05-05 2023-07-11 Mobix Labs, Inc. Multi-mode WiFi bluetooth RF front-ends
US11437992B2 (en) 2020-07-30 2022-09-06 Mobix Labs, Inc. Low-loss mm-wave CMOS resonant switch

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20090239491A1 (en) 2009-09-24
EP1574084A2 (en) 2005-09-14
US20070111661A1 (en) 2007-05-17
DK1574084T3 (en) 2010-06-07
AU2003293542A1 (en) 2004-06-30
US20040214537A1 (en) 2004-10-28
US7526264B2 (en) 2009-04-28
DE60322583D1 (en) 2008-09-11
US20070141982A1 (en) 2007-06-21
EP1576751A2 (en) 2005-09-21
EP1574084B1 (en) 2010-02-17
DE60331350D1 (en) 2010-04-01
AU2003293542A8 (en) 2004-06-30
WO2004054312A2 (en) 2004-06-24
US7558551B2 (en) 2009-07-07
ATE458358T1 (en) 2010-03-15
US20040209588A1 (en) 2004-10-21
US20070087712A1 (en) 2007-04-19
WO2004054128A2 (en) 2004-06-24
US7271640B2 (en) 2007-09-18
AU2003297006A1 (en) 2004-06-30
AU2003297935A8 (en) 2004-06-30
WO2004054145A3 (en) 2004-11-11
US20160072534A1 (en) 2016-03-10
JP2006510247A (en) 2006-03-23
US20050005296A1 (en) 2005-01-06
EP1573931A2 (en) 2005-09-14
US20060148440A1 (en) 2006-07-06
WO2004054128A3 (en) 2004-08-05
WO2004054145A2 (en) 2004-06-24
US20170346519A9 (en) 2017-11-30
AU2003297935A1 (en) 2004-06-30
EP1573931B1 (en) 2008-07-30
ATE403276T1 (en) 2008-08-15
WO2004054312A3 (en) 2004-08-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20040209584A1 (en) Integrated crosspoint switch with band translation
US9219557B2 (en) Circuits, systems and methods for constructing a composite signal
US7973603B2 (en) Low-noise amplifier suitable for use in a television receiver
US7231189B2 (en) Transmit and/or receive channel communication system with switchably coupled multiple filtering components
US8457574B2 (en) Front-end integrated circuit for television receivers
EP1317073B1 (en) Tuner arrangement and set top box
EP2119068B1 (en) Circuits, systems, and methods for frequency translation and signal distribution
US9516256B2 (en) Apparatus and method for processing a radio frequency signal
CN100555885C (en) Integrated crosspoint switch with frequency band transformation
JP3955232B2 (en) Radio frequency input interface device and composite device thereof
US6473598B1 (en) Most cost-effective asmmic-based universal microwave and millimeter wave transceiver
CN101378248A (en) Low noise amplifier and tuner including the same
US20060194557A1 (en) Tuner
CN108028675B (en) Device for transmitting and receiving mobile radio signals by means of a stationary antenna
CN101465630A (en) Frequency conversion device, double inversion frequency device, tuner and modulation method thereof
Noda et al. A front-end for a digital satellite TV broadcasting receiver

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: RF MAGIC, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:BARGROFF, KEITH, MR.;FRANSIS, BERT, MR.;HANCOCK, DALE, MR.;REEL/FRAME:018595/0660;SIGNING DATES FROM 20060926 TO 20060927

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION

AS Assignment

Owner name: MAXLINEAR COMMUNICATIONS LLC, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:ENTROPIC COMMUNICATONS LLC;REEL/FRAME:055776/0482

Effective date: 20180213

AS Assignment

Owner name: MAXLINEAR, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY;ASSIGNOR:MUFG UNION BANK, N.A.;REEL/FRAME:055779/0001

Effective date: 20210331

Owner name: MAXLINEAR COMMUNICATIONS LLC, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY;ASSIGNOR:MUFG UNION BANK, N.A.;REEL/FRAME:055779/0001

Effective date: 20210331

AS Assignment

Owner name: ENTROPIC COMMUNICATIONS, LLC, NEW YORK

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:MAXLINEAR COMMUNICATIONS LLC;REEL/FRAME:055899/0291

Effective date: 20210331